Konica Minolta bizhub C203/C253/C353 Short Guide Poster - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

bizhub C253

Title
bizhub C203/C253/C353 Short Guide Poster
Type of Manual
Abrégé d'utilisation
Applicable for
bizhub C203, bizhub C253, bizhub C353
Languages
Français
Version
1-0-1
Release Date
2009-09-02
ID
DLEU0916953EN00

Files:

 

 

 

 

Autre documentation Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC550UserGuideBoxOper.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Short-Guide-Poster-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePro-1300W-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-302-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bihub-423-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-203-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-211-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-1600f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-164-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC452_C552_C552DS_C652_C652DSCopyOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide English ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.0 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Greek ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish NC-503 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i5 2010-01-08 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 Declaration of Conformity - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i6 2011-09-15 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien 7013 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais K7013 RS-232C User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Druckerkarte Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Print Server Card Owner's Manual 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand RS232C Schnittstelle Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 RS-232C 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Abrégé d'utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Quick Reference 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Danois Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-011 User's Guide 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais FK-101 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-11-02 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7020 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-011 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-421 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Konica 7022 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7022/7130 Manuale Instruzioni 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7022/7130/7135 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7022/7130 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7024 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7024 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Spanish d131f_d191f - pcl Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-12 User`s Guide Spanish D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Italian D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Dutch D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide German MB-190 Manual 1.0.0 2007-09-12 User`s Guide French D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Danish D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide German ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide French ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Italian ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide English ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-0 2012-07-27 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 1052, ineo 1250 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link Quick Guide Swedish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 Quick Guide Turkish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 Reference Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide German ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide French ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Czech ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Danish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Dutch ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Finnish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Greek ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Polish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Russian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Swedish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Turkish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide English ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide German ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide French ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Italian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Spanish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Czech ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Danish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Dutch ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Finnish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Greek ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Polish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Russian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Swedish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Turkish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide German ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide French ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo+ 25 i1n 2012-11-14 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16 User`s Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Czech ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Danish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Greek ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides Spanish 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Hungarian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Norwegian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Polish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Portuguese ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Russian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Slovakian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Turkish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i3 2011-09-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Hungarian bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Russian bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Spanish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Polish bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Multifunktions- gerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) 17011 2005-12-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C250, C250P, C252, C252P CEM 2006 - T012B 2006-10-17 ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135 Alkategória Nyelv Megnevezés Verzió Megjelenés dátuma Link Felhasználói segédlet Czech bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Multilingual bizhub 40P Installation and Safety Guide 1.1.1 2009-03-11 Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Portugál Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet English Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Danish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Polish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Italian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Spanish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Italian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Slovakian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Dutch bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Greek Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet German bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Russian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Russian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet German Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Swedish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Danish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Polish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Spanish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Hungarian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Dutch Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Swedish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Norwegian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Turkish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet French bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Finnish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Czech Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 ISO tanúsítvány English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P Reference Guide 1.1.0 2009-03-11 Felhasználói segédlet French Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Különleges tanúsítványok English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 Megfelelőségi nyilatkozat - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub 40P CEM-2007-T018G 2011-09-16 Gyors segédlet Romanian poster bizhub 40P Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C352/C250 and bizhub 750/600/bizhub 500/420) 1.1.0 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C352/C351/C250) 1.0.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English FK-502 Phase 2.5 for bizhub C250/C300/C351/C352/C450 1.0.0 (Phase2.5) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126 Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase 2.5 (complete set) 1.0.0 (Phase 2.5) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English Network Fax Operations 1.1.0 2006-08-22 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 1.8) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Swedish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126 Search Results: 101 - 126 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Kopierer bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) 16721 2005-07-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for C450, C450P +Print Controller IC-402 +Fax CEM-2005 -T001C 2006-09-01 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for bizhub C451, bizhub C550, bizhub C650 CEM-2007-T015A 2007-09-07 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26 ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 Product Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link IC-202 User`s Guide French IC-202 for ineo 750/600, Phase 2 - User Manual 1.1.1 2007-01-17 IC-204 User`s Guide Czech IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Russian IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide German IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Spanish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-207_generic User`s Guide Spanish IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide French IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide Dutch IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide English IC-207 1-1-0 2008-06-24 IC-208_generic User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27 IC-208_generic User`s Guide French ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27 Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060 : Manuel de Référence n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Reference Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1060 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Reference Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Service-Handbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 1060: Instructions de Service n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Operation n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Operation n.a. 1997-09-10 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660E: Print System Reference n.a. 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660: Print System Reference B 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Manuel de Référence n.a. 1997-09-10 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660E: Print System Operation n.a. 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660: Print System Operation B 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1660: Getting Started b 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1660E: Getting Started n.a. 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1660 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos n.a. 1996-01-01 1725 E Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 E Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1996-01-01 1725 E Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1996-01-01 1725 E Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started b 1996-01-01 1725 EX Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 SLS Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2025 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 2025 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 2025 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 2025 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2025 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2060: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10 Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-08 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1998-09-18 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Drucksystem QMS 2060 Inbetriebnahme n.a. 1997-09-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1998-09-18 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide B 2003-08-29 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner cartridge. n.a. 2003-07-18 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 2060 WX Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 2060 WX Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-09-10 2060 WX Sonstiges Englisch What is "LEF" A4? n.a. 1997-09-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 2425 Operation Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2425: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch QMS 2425 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425 Stacking and Stapling Information n.a. 1997-09-05 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425: Options Installation Guide. n.a. 1997-09-05 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 2425 Print System Service-Handbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 2425: Instructions de Service n.a. 1997-09-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner cartridge. n.a. 2003-07-18 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 2425 Reference Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425: Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95 / 98 installation n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reload Staples. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address via Control Panel or via MAP Utililty. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup Conserve Toner. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup TCP/IP port on Windows 95/98. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change / Set output resolution in the driver. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Restore driver to defaults. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup IPX connection. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Installing or Replacing the Toner Cartridge n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3.xx and lower Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Input tray selection. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Uninstall printer driver on PC. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT installation n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4.xx NDS Installation n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4.xx Bindery Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Service-Handbuch Englisch Load Paper. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 installation n.a. 2003-01-28 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup Collation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installation on Unix. n.a. 2002-04-13 3225 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 3225 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3225 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3225 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3225 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-02-02 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 2000-01-31 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replacing the Staple Cartridge n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3825 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3825 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3825 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-02-02 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 2000-01-31 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replacing the Staple Cartridge n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18 4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Options Installation Guide n.a. 1997-09-05 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner. n.a. 2003-07-18 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Media Specification 1.1.0 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation n.a. 1997-01-31 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference n.a. 1997-01-31 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 4060 Q-Doc Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Q-Doc User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29 bizhub C10P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C10P, mc2500W, mc2530DL, mc2550 CEM-2006-T018A 2007-04-30 bizhub C20P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C20P, mc4650DN, mc4650EN CEM-2007-T019B 2007-12-18 bizhub C30P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C30P, mc5550, mc5570 CEM-2006-T017C 2007-10-02 bizhub C31P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C31P, mc5650, mc5670 CEM-2008-T001A 2008-04-09 Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address n.a. 2002-03-21 Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Install a Page Pro Printer on Windows 95/98 via TCP/IP. n.a. 2002-03-21 Color PagePro Ex Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Manual 1.1.0 2004-06-18 Color PagePro Ex Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Ex Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Usermanual Network Card 1.1.0 2005-01-04 Color PagePro L Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide 1.1.0 2002-05-08 Color PagePro L Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Plus Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide 1.1.0 2004-06-18 Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download Color PagePro Plus Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Plus Sonstiges Englisch Network Setup Guide 1.1.0 2001-09-30 Color PagePro PS Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro PS Plus Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide 1.1.0 2004-06-18 Color PagePro PS Plus Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro PS Plus Sonstiges Englisch Network Setup Guide 1.1.0 2001-09-30 Color PageWorks L Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide 1.1.0 2002-05-08 ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Assign a TCP/IP Address. n.a. 2002-04-13 DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell, NDS installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell, Bindery installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User manual n.a. 2002-04-05 DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4, NDS installation. n.a. 2001-12-27 DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Network Interface - User manual n.a. 2002-04-05 DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Duplexer - User manual n.a. 2002-04-05 DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Macintosh Installation. n.a. 2001-12-27 DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Assign TCP/IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-27 DeskLaser 2000 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 DeskLaser 2000 Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-09-10 DeskLaser 2000 Sonstiges Englisch What is "LEF" A4? n.a. 1997-09-10 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Japanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (traditionell) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Arabisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch User's guide 01 2008-12-01 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 01 2008-12-01 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (traditionell) Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Arabisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch Print System Options B 1999-06-16 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1999-06-16 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Color Density Adjustment A 1998-11-17 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-06-16 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08 Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Service-Handbuch Deutsch User Maintenance Guide n/a. 2001-01-25 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide A 1999-09-01 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation manual A 1999-09-01 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference manual A 1999-09-01 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Statistics page on Crown Printers. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Französisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Black and White printing. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide C 1999-06-26 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Setup Guide C 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Spanisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch -Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Option specification n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specifications 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Italienisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung 1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Repacking instructions A 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide d'installation 1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide d’utilisation B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the OPC drum. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series. n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit? n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida di installazione A 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Guida Utenete B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Belt. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Laser Lens Cover. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor n.a. 2002-09-18 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Unit. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Spanisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Portugiesisch (Portugal) Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Italienisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Deutsch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Französisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Niederländisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Dänisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Tschechisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series n.a. 2003-08-18 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Oil Roller. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Toner Cartridges. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Statistics page on Crown Printers. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Using the Printer's Web Page n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Repacking instructions A 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Sostituzione di materiali di consumo n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Installation Guide C 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Black and White printing. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setup duplexing n,a, 2002-05-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Assign IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Driver Options, using the printer driver. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Driver Options, using the printer driver. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch User Guide . B 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Disabling Color Matching Setting. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Thailändisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setting the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser to Switch Bins When One Bin is Empty n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Polnisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the OPC drum. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000 n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000 n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch -Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series. n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Installation Guide C 2002-02-23 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User Guide B 2002-02-23 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Uninstall the printer driver. n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit? n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Installation Guide C 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Uninstalling the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser Driver n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Belt. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Disabling Composite Black Setting. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch Austausch von Verbrauchsmaterial. n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide d’utilisation B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Laser Lens Cover. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-29 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Clear Care Procedure / Clear messages. n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor n.a. 2002-09-18 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Installing the Printer Driver for the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser in Windows 95/98/NT4/2000/XP n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n,a, 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Vietnamesisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Unit. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Slovakisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide d'installation C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de instalación C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Guía de usuario B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Spanisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Portugiesisch (Portugal) Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Italienisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Deutsch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Französisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Niederländisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Dänisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Tschechisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series n.a. 2003-08-18 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Oil Roller. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida di installazione C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Guida Utente B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Menu options. n.a. 2002-05-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Toner Cartridges. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Remplacement des consommables n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2210 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2210 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Polnisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Französisch Installation Guide Magicolor 2210, French A 2001-11-15 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Slovakisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2210 Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Installation Guide C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia de Instalação C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000 Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien 7823 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7823 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7823 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7823 Quick Guide 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7915 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide 1.1.1 2004-05-10 7920 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide 1.1.1 2004-05-10 8020 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations 7.1.1 2004-03-09 8020 Guide d’utilisation Français URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur 7.1.1 2004-09-08 8031 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations 7.1.1 2004-03-09 8031 Guide d’utilisation Français URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur 7.1.1 2004-09-08 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8050 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 8050 Quick Guide 1.1.1 2004-09-08 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 bizhub C10 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C10 User Manuals 1.1.1 2007-08-03 bizhub C10 Guide d’utilisation Multi-Langues bizhub C10 Installation Guide and Safety Information 1.1.0 2007-08-03 bizhub C10P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C10P User Manual 1.0.1 2007-03-01 bizhub C10P Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C10P Installation Manual 1.0.0 2007-03-01 bizhub C20 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C20 User Guides 1.1.1 2008-10-28 bizhub C200 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C200 User Manuals 1-1-1 2008-07-07 bizhub C200 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C200 Phase2 User Manuals 1-1-1 Phase2 2009-02-23 bizhub C200 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C200 Phase2 Quick Guide 1-1-1 Phase2 2009-02-23 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C20P Guide d’utilisation Français Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 bizhub C20P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C20P User Manual 1.0.1 2008-04-17 bizhub C220 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C220 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C224 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C224 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Français User's guides (French) 01 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Quick guide (French) 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Arabe Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Turc Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Suédois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation slovaque Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Russe Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Polonais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Norvégien Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Hongrois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Grec Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Finnois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Hollandais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Danois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 Résultats recherche : 51 - 100 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Tchèque Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Espagnol Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Portugais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Italien Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Français Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Allemand Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Anglais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Arabe Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Turc Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Suédois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation slovaque Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Russe Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Polonais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Norvégien Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Hongrois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Grec Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Finnois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Danois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Tchèque Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Coréen Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Simplified Chinese Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Traditional Chinese Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Italien Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Français Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 bizhub C250P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C250P User Manual 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-09-13 bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 bizhub C252P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C252P User Manual 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C280 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C280 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C284 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C284 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français HDD Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français Real time mode Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C300 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-21 Résultats recherche : 51 - 100 de 266 Résultats recherche : 101 - 150 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2) 1.1.1 2006-05-24 bizhub C30P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C30P User Manual 1.0.1 2007-03-01 bizhub C30P Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C30P Installation Manual 1.0.0 2007-03-01 bizhub C31P Guide d’utilisation Français Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 bizhub C31P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C31P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-03-28 bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C35 User's Guide 2-1-1 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C35 Quick Guide 2-1-2 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C35 French Short Guide 1-1-1 2010-07-14 bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Anglais bizhub C35 Reference Guide 1-1-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Arabe bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Turc bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Suédois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation slovaque bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Russe bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Polonais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Norvégien bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Hongrois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Grec bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Finnois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Hollandais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Danois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Tchèque bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Coréen bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Simplified Chinese bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Traditional Chinese bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Espagnol bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Portugais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Italien bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Français bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Allemand bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C35, Step 2, Quick Guide 3-2-1 2010-12-01 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Printer Controller User Manual 1.1.1 2004-05-21 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Advanced Information 1.1.1 2004-05-21 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-02-09 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Printer Controller Advanced Information 1.1.1 2004-02-09 bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C351 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-15 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français HDD Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français Real time mode Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C352 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2) 1.1.1 2006-05-24 bizhub C352P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C352P User Manual 1.1.1 Phase3 2006-03-09 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04 Résultats recherche : 101 - 150 de 266 Résultats recherche : 151 - 200 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C353P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C353P 1.1.1 2007-11-13 bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Tchèque User's guide 12 2010-06-29 bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Anglais bizhub C35P Reference Guide 00A 2010-02-02 bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Français User's Guide - Manuel Utilisateur (Fr) 12 2010-06-29 bizhub C360 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C360 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C364 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C364 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C450 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C450 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 bizhub C450P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C450P User Manual 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-11-14 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C452 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C452 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C454 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C454 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C552 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C552 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C552 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box 1-1-1 2009-02-18 bizhub C554 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C554 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C652 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C652 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C652 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box 1-1-1 2009-02-18 bizhub C652DS Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C652DS Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C654 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French) 1-1-1 2012-02-16 bizhub C754 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French) 1-1-1 2012-02-16 bizhub PRESS C6000 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23 bizhub PRESS C7000 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23 bizhub PRESS C7000P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 Résultats recherche : 151 - 200 de 266 Résultats recherche : 201 - 250 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-405 (Manuals from EFI) 1.0 2006-06-19 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C500 1.1.1 2005-02-28 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-302 (Manuals from EFI) 1.0 2006-06-19 bizhub PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C5500, User manual 1.1.1 2007-06-29 bizhub PRO C5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C5501 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C5501 1-1-1 2008-08-06 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual 111 2006-10-04 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e, Phase 2.0 - User Manual 111 2006-10-04 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual 211 2006-10-04 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-408 (Manuals from EFI) 100 2006-11-16 bizhub PRO C6500P Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6501 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e 1-1-1 2008-06-23 bizhub PRO C6501e Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6501e Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e 1-1-1 2008-06-23 bizhub PRO C6501P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501eP User`s Guide 1-1-1 2008-07-29 bizhub PRO C65hc Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C65hc Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C65hc 1.1.1 2008-12-10 CF1501 Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001 1.1.1 2001-09-12 CF1501 Guide d’utilisation Français CF1501/CF2001 Ver1.0.1 2001-05-28 CF2001 Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001 1.1.1 2001-09-12 CF2001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF1501/CF2001 Ver1.0.1 2001-05-28 CF2001P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2001P 1.0.1 2001-11-15 CF2001P Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light for CF2001P 1.1.1 2001-09-12 CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français Available Features 1.1.1 2002-11-18 CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 User Manual 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF2002P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/3102 Printer 1.1.1 2003-02-18 CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français Available Features 1.1.1 2002-11-18 CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 User Manual 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF3102P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/3102 Printer 1.1.1 2003-02-18 CF5001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF5001 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-01-01 CF9001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.0.1 2001-05-10 CF9001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.1.1 2001-05-10 CF9001 Abrégé d'utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.0.0 2001-05-10 CF910 Guide d’utilisation Français CF910 VER 1.1.1 2001-05-10 CF911P Guide d’utilisation Français CF911P VER 1.0.1 2001-05-10 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 CS550 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 CS655 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 CS665 Pro Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Résultats recherche : 201 - 250 de 266 Résultats recherche : 251 - 266 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien IKON BusinessPro 550c Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON BusinessPro 650 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON BusinessPro 660c Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON CPP550 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON CPP560 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON CPP650 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 ineo+ 5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 ineo+ 5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 ineo+ 6500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 LD-5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 LD-6501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Linium PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Résultats recherche : 251 - 266 de 266

FONCTIONS de BASE RÉALISER UNE COPIE EFFACER une valeur CHARGEMENT du PAPIER dans le MAGASIN 1 Réapprovisionnement 1. Placez l’original. 2. Tapez le nombre d’exemplaires. 3. Appuyez sur la touche DÉPART. ARRETER UNE OPERATION DE COPIE 1. Appuyez sur la touche ARRET. 1. Appuyez sur la touche EFFACER. UTILISER LA MACHINE PANNEAU DE CONTRÔLE ÉCRAN TACTILE (Fonctions de Base) Guide rapide 1/3 MODIFIER LA SÉLECTION PAPIER 1. Tirez le magasin 1. 2. Placez le papier dans le magasin 1 (ne pas dépasser le repère ,). 3. Si vous chargez du papier spécial, changez aussi la sélection papier. 1. Appuyez sur PAPIER sur l’écran Fonctions de base. 2. Appuyez sur MAGASIN 1. 3. Appuyez sur MODIF. PARAM. MAG. 4. Appuyez sur la sélection papier désirée. 5. Appuyez sur VALIDER. Économie d’énergie M/A Spécifier les paramètres du panneau de contrôle Afficher le mode Zoom Écran Ajuster le contraste de l’écran tactile Cliquer pour vous connecter ou vous déconnecter Afficher l’écran AIDE Introduire une valeur ou un nombre EFFACER une valeur Imprimer une épreuve DEMARRER une opération Enregistrer les paramètres de la copie Afficher l’écran Utilitaires/Compteur ALIMENTATION M/A Interrompre un travail de copie ARRÊTER une opération REINITIALISER les paramètres Témoin Alimentation principale ÉCRAN BOITE UTILISATEUR TACTILE Choisir le mode FAX/NUMERISATION COPIE Choisir la fonction de l’onglet FONCTIONS de BASE Afficher les détails du travail Passer aux diverses fonctions de l’onglet Afficher l’écran Liste Travaux Zone des messages Indicateur Mémoire disponible Nombre d’exemplaires Lancer la fonction Numérisation séparée Afficher l’écran FINITION Icônes indiquant l’état Machine/Travail Témoin de niveau toner Afficher le résultat des réglages spécifiés Activer/Désactiver la rotation automatique de l’image scannée 6. Appuyez sur VALIDER. Couleur ET Noir&Blanc FS-520 Guide de l’utilisateur FS-520 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2.1 Etiquettes et indicateurs d'avertissement ..................................... 2-3 2.2 Encombrement ................................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Module de finition FS-520 ................................................................ 2-6 2.4 Equipement Standard/En option..................................................... 2-8 2.5 Rajout d'agrafes ............................................................................... 2-9 Insertion d'une nouvelle cartouche d'agrafes dans le module de finition FS-520................................................................................ 2-9 2.6 Élimination des déchets de perforation ....................................... 2-12 Vidage de la corbeille du Module de finition FS-520 ................... 2-12 2.7 Informations sur le papier.............................................................. 2-14 2.8 Spécifications ................................................................................. 2-16 Module de finition FS-520............................................................ 2-16 3 Opérations de copie 3.1 Utilisation du Module de finition FS-520......................................... 3-3 Sortie sur bac principal .................................................................. 3-3 Sortie sur le bac auxiliaire .............................................................. 3-4 3.1.1 Non trié/Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac principal ............................. 3-5 3.1.2 Agrafage, sortie sur le bac principal .............................................. 3-7 3.1.3 Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac auxiliaire ........................................ 3-10 3.1.4 Perforer des trous dans les copies (Perforation) .......................... 3-13 3.2 Insertion de couvertures (bac d'insertion) ................................... 3-16 3.3 Utilisation manuelle du Module de finition FS-520...................... 3-18 Table des matières-2 FS-520 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) 03 Réglage perforation \ 01 Régl. position verticale....................... 4-3 03 Réglage perforation/02 Régl. position horizontale .................... 4-3 03 Réglage perforation \ 03 Réglage synchronisation.................... 4-3 03 Réglage perforation \ 04 Capteur dét. bord feuille .................... 4-3 06 Détect. format bac insert ........................................................... 4-3 07 Limite quantité sortie ................................................................. 4-3 08 Réglage Gondolage ................................................................... 4-4 1 Introduction Introduction 1 FS-520 1-3 1 Introduction Le module de finition FS-520 est périphérique en option récemment ajouté à la configuration des options du bizhub PRO C6500. Veuillez consulter ce guide pour le fonctionnement et les informations de sécurité de ce module de finition et conservez ce guide dans le guide de l'utilisateur de l'unité principale afin de pouvoir le consulter à tout moment. Et, n'oubliez pas de lire le chapitre 1 "Introduction/Informations de sécurité" du Guide de l'utilisateur du bizhub PRO C6500. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC 1 Introduction 1-4 FS-520 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-3 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2.1 Etiquettes et indicateurs d'avertissement Sur cette machine, les étiquettes et indicateurs d'avertissement de sécurité apparaissent aux emplacements suivants. Faites bien attention à ce qu'aucun accident ne survienne pendant l'exécution de certaines opérations comme le dégagement d'un bourrage papier. 2 Rappel Ne pas ôter les étiquettes ni les avis d'avertissement. Si une étiquette ou un avis d'avertissement est souillé, veuillez les nettoyer pour qu'ils soient lisibles. Si vous ne pouvez pas les rendre lisibles, ou si l'étiquette ou l'avis d'avertissement est endommagé, veuillez contacter le S.A.V. Pour éviter toute blessure, NE PAS mettre vos mains sur le haut des feuilles imprimées. Assurez-vous de tenir les deux bords des feuilles imprimées quand vous les sortez, et NE PAS laisser vos mains sur les feuilles imprimées pendant que le bac principal remonte. ATTENTION Module de finition FS-520 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-4 FS-520 2.2 Encombrement Pour faciliter le fonctionnement de la machine, l'approvisionnement en consommables, le remplacement des pièces et l'entretien régulier, veuillez observer les exigences d'encombrement détaillées ci-dessous. Veuillez-vous assurer que le sol de l'emplacement d'installation est de niveau et stable. La taille combinée de la machine et des options peut varier pour l'environnement d'installation. 1619 899 2142 1021 950 293 1021 1619 393 205 410 760 718 656 2419 1160 1177 100 85 100 Machine + DF-609 + LU-202 + FS-520 + PI-502 Machine + DF-609 + LU-202 + FS-520 + PI-502 (vue latérale) Unité :mm Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-5 2 Rappel Veillez à prévoir un dégagement de 200 mm ou plus à l'arrière de cette machine pour le conduit de ventilation et permettre l'accès au bac de récupération toner. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-6 FS-520 2.3 Module de finition FS-520 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-7 Vue externe Vue interne No. Nom Description 1 Porte du module de finition S'ouvre vers le module de finition interne pour permettre de dégager le papier serré, de rajouter des agrafes et de vider la corbeille à déchets du kit de perforation. 2 Bac principal Reçoit les jeux éjectés en mode Non-Trié, en mode Groupé (décalage) ou en mode Agrafage. 3 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux éjectés en mode Non-Trié. No. Nom Description 1 Levier de transport du bac auxiliaire S'ouvre vers la droite afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 2 Levier de transport du bac d'insertion S'ouvre vers la gauche afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 3 Kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513 (en option) Réalise des trous de classeur dans les copies sorties. 4 Levier d'entrée S'ouvre vers le bas afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 5 Levier de transport de l'empileuse S'ouvre en bas vers la gauche afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 6 Cartouche d'agrafes Contient la cartouche d'agrafes à remplacer lors de l'alimentation en agrafes. 7 Poignée de l'empileur Permet de tirer le module en arrière pour enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage et remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-8 FS-520 2.4 Equipement Standard/En option PI-502 PK-512 PK-513 FS-520 DF-609 OC-506 Compteur clé Machine IC-303 IC-304 IC-408 LU-502 HT-503 HT-504 PF-601 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-9 2.5 Rajout d'agrafes Insertion d'une nouvelle cartouche d'agrafes dans le module de finition FS-520 Lorsque la cartouche d'agrafes du module de finition FS-520 est vide, le témoin Cartouche d'agrafes s'allume en rouge dans la zone d'option de l'écran Machine. 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité de finition. 2 Sortez l'empileuse. – Saisissez la poignée de l'unité d'empilage et tirez doucement jusqu'à la butée pour dégager l'unité d'empilage. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-10 FS-520 3 Enlevez la cartouche d'agrafes. – Tout en tenant le levier sur la cartouche d'agrafes, tirez la cartouche vers le bas pour la dégager. 4 Sortez la cartouche vide de son support. 5 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support. – N'enlevez pas les agrafes qui restent à l'intérieur du logement, sinon la première feuille à agrafer après le rechargement en agrafes ne sera pas agrafée. Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-11 6 Ramenez l'empileuse à sa position d'origine. 7 Fermez la porte de l'unité de finition. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-12 FS-520 2.6 Élimination des déchets de perforation Vidage de la corbeille du Module de finition FS-520 Quand la corbeille de perforation de l'unité de perforation PK-512/PK-513 installée sur le module de finition FS-520 est pleine, le témoin Corbeille Perforation s'allume en rouge dans la zone d'option de l'écran Machine. 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité de finition. 2 Tirez la corbeille. Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-13 3 Videz la corbeille. 4 Replacez la corbeille dans sa position initiale, puis refermez soigneusement la porte du module de finition. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-14 FS-520 2.7 Informations sur le papier Le module de finition FS-520 offre les fonctions suivantes. - Sortie droite via le bac principal : éjecte des jeux triés/groupés normalement dans le bac principal. - Sortie droite via le bac auxiliaire : éjecte des jeux triés/groupés normalement dans le bac auxiliaire. - Sortie décalée : éjecte des jeux triés/groupés dans le bac principal en décalant chaque jeu d'env. 30mm au moment de la sortie. - Sortie agrafée : agrafe chaque jeu à l'aide d'une agrafe en coin ou de deux agrafes le long du bord. Le mode perforation est disponible avec le module de finition FS-520 complété par le kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513. L'insertion de feuilles est disponible avec le module de finition FS-520 complété par le bac d'insertion PI-502. Informations sur le papier Poids Bac principal : 60 à 300 g/m2 Bac auxiliaire : 50 à 300 g/m2 Agrafage : 60 à 209 g/m2 Capacité Bac auxiliaire Max. 100 feuilles Bac principal (normal) 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) (A5 w/v, B6 w, 5,5" e 8,5" w/v) 3000 feuilles (80 g/m2) (A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 7,25" e 10,5" w/v) 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) (SRA3 w, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 8K w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, format large (320mm max. e 450 mm)) La capacité des bacs varie en fonction du grammage. • ~80g/m2 : 1500 feuilles • 81~135 g/m2 : 1000 feuilles • 136~209 g/m2 : 700 feuilles • 210~300 g/m2 : 500 feuilles Bac principal (agrafage) 50 feuilles max. (80 g/m2) par jeu 2 à 9 feuilles agrafées : 100 jeux (150-417mm en longueur)/ 50 jeux (autres) 10 à 20 feuilles agrafées : 50 jeux 21 à 30 feuilles agrafées : 30 jeux 31 à 40 feuilles agrafées : 25 jeux 41 à 50 feuilles agrafées : 20 jeux Bac d'insertion PI-502 Magasin supérieur/ inférieur 200 feuilles max. (50 à 200 g/m2) Kit de perforation PK-512/ PK-513 Illimité Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-15 Capacité d'agrafage Format papier Bac auxiliaire Format standard : SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w/v, 13" e 19" w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 5,5" e 8,5" w/v Formats personnalisés : 330 mm max. e 487 mm à 100mm min. e 148mm Papier avec onglets A4 v, 8,5" e 11" v Bac principal (normal) Format standard : SRA3 w*1, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w*1/v, B6 w*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 5,5" e 8,5" w*1/v *1 : 5,5" e 8,5" w, SRA3 w, A5 w et B6 w ne sont disponibles que pour la sortie droite. Formats personnalisés*2 : 314mm max. e 458 mm à 182mm min. e 148mm *2 : 314 mm max. e 458 mm à 128mm min. e 148mm pour sortie droite uniquement. Papier avec onglets A4 v, 8,5" e 11" v Bac principal (agrafage) Format standard : SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 8K w, 16K w/v, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 5,5" e 8,5" v Formats personnalisés : 314mm max. e 458 mm à 182mm min. e 148mm Papier avec onglets A4 v, 8,5" e 11" v Informations sur le papier Grammage du papier Type de papier Papier ordinaire Papier de qualité supérieure Papier couleur Papier couché 64 à 80 g/m2 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 40 feuilles 81 à 105 g/m2 40 feuilles 30 feuilles 30 feuilles 25 feuilles 106 à 135 g/m2 30 feuilles 30 feuilles 25 feuilles 20 feuilles 136 à 209 g/m2 20 feuilles 20 feuilles 15 feuilles --- 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-16 FS-520 2.8 Spécifications Module de finition FS-520 Rubrique Description Nom FS-520 Type module de finition Magasin de décalage Bac de sortie Bac principal et bac auxiliaire Fonction Sortie droite (trié, groupée) Sortie décalée (triée et décalée, groupée et décalée) Sortie agrafée (en coin, 2 points) Types de papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-14. Formats papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-14. Capacité magasin papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-14. Consommation électrique maximum 80 W ou moins Dimensions 424 (674,5 quand le bac principal est monté/ 790,5 quand le bac sorti) (L) e 656 (P) e 990 (H) mm Poids Environ 60 kg 3 Opérations de copie Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-3 3 Opérations de copie 3.1 Utilisation du Module de finition FS-520 Le module de finition FS-520 dispose d'un bac principal et d'un bac auxiliaire, chacun proposant les modes de finition suivants. Sortie sur bac principal Vous pouvez combiner aux modes de finition ci-dessus, à l'exception du mode Agrafage, les types de sortie suivants : recto vers le haut ou vers le bas, et de la première page à la dernière et de la dernière à la première. Exemple : réaliser 3 jeux de copie à partir d'un original de 4 feuilles. Mode Description Non-Trié Le mode Non-Trié signifie simplement que le mode décalage du module de finition n'est pas sélectionné. Les copies seront éjectées sans être triées par jeux décalés. Tri Le mode Tri éjecte plusieurs pages du jeu d'impression en triant et décalant les jeux de copies de 30 mm à la sortie. Groupe Le mode Groupe regroupe plusieurs pages de chaque original et décale les jeux de 30 mm à la sortie. Agrafage Le mode Agrafage décale et agrafe chaque jeu issu du tri. Non-Trié Agrafage Trié Vers le haut 1 agrafe Agrafage Décalage de 30 mm Décalage de 30 mm 2 agrafes 3 Opérations de copie 3-4 FS-520 Sortie sur le bac auxiliaire Vous pouvez combiner aux modes de finition ci-dessus, les types de sortie suivants : recto vers le haut ou vers le bas, et de la première page à la dernière ou de la dernière à la première. Exemple : réaliser 3 jeux de copies Mode Description Tri Le mode Tri délivre plusieurs copies du jeu d'originaux. Aucun décalage n'est possible. Groupe Le mode Groupe regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Aucun décalage n'est possible. Groupé recto vers le bas Groupé recto vers le haut Recto vers le haut vers le bas Recto vers le haut vers le haut Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-5 3.1.1 Non trié/Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac principal Une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-520 est réglée par défaut pour grouper les copies sur le bac principal, peu importe qu'elle soit équipée d'autres périphériques en option. Choisir un mode de finition en appliquant la procédure suivante. ! Détails Vous pouvez changer le mode initial de finition dans le réglage UTILITAIRES. Pour plus de détails, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur du bizhub PRO C6500. Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. Les positions des bacs de sortie sont indiquées par des carrés portés sur l'image de la façade de la machine ; lorsqu'un bac est sélectionné, le carré correspondant apparaît en évidence. Si le bac principal n'est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Bac de sortie] pour le sélectionner. 3 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. – Pour une sortie Non-trié, annulez les modes [Tri] et [Groupe]. – Pour une sortie Triée, appuyez sur [Tri] pour la mettre en évidence. – Pour une sortie Groupé, appuyez sur [Groupe] pour la mettre en évidence. 3 Opérations de copie 3-6 FS-520 – Sélectionnez le sens de sortie (Recto vers le bas/Recto vers le haut), et l'ordre de sortie (1 vers N/N vers 1) selon les besoins. 4 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. 2 Rappel Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des feuilles imprimées. NE PAS laisser le moindre objet faire obstacle au fonctionnement du magasin du côté gauche de l'unité de finition, car la moindre interférence risque d'endommager l'unité de finition. Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-7 3.1.2 Agrafage, sortie sur le bac principal Dans ce mode les copies sont agrafées. Appliquez la procédure suivante pour sélectionner la position d'agrafage et nombre d'agrafes : Haut gauche/ Haut droite (Agrafage en coin), Gauche/Haut/Droite (Agrafage 2 points). ! Détails Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Agraf.] sur l'écran Copie. – Les feuilles agrafées seront éjectées dans le bac principal. L'icône Finition indique la position d'agrafage actuellement sélectionnée. Si vous voulez modifier la position d'agrafage, appliquez la procédure suivante. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 3 Opérations de copie 3-8 FS-520 4 Appuyez sur [Agrafage] pour sélectionner la position d'agrafage. L'écran Configuration Agrafage s'affiche. 5 Appuyez sur la touche de la position d'agrafage voulue pour la mettre en évidence. 6 Appuyez sur [Valider]. – Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à la configuration précédente. – Pour désactiver la fonction Agrafage sans effacer la position d'agrafage actuelle, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition réapparaît. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-9 2 Rappel Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des feuilles imprimées. NE PAS laisser le moindre objet faire obstacle au fonctionnement du magasin du côté gauche de l'unité de finition, car la moindre interférence risque d'endommager l'unité de finition. Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. 3 Opérations de copie 3-10 FS-520 3.1.3 Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac auxiliaire Une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-520 est réglée par défaut pour grouper les copies sur le bac principal, peu importe qu'elle soit équipée d'autres périphériques en option. Changez de bac de sortie et sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré au moyen de la procédure suivante. ! Détails Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le bac auxiliaire comme bac de sortie. – Appuyez sur [Bac de sortie] pour afficher l'écran Sélection du bac de sortie. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-11 – Appuyez sur la touche de position du bac auxiliaire pour la mettre en évidence et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. – Pour une sortie Triée, appuyez sur [Tri] pour la mettre en évidence. – Pour une sortie Groupé, appuyez sur [Groupe] pour la mettre en évidence. – Sélectionnez le sens de sortie (Recto vers le bas/Recto vers le haut), et l'ordre de sortie (1 vers N/N vers 1) selon les besoins. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. 3 Opérations de copie 3-12 FS-520 2 Rappel Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-13 3.1.4 Perforer des trous dans les copies (Perforation) Le Module de finition FS-520 équipé du Kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513 peut perforer les copies imprimées. 2 Rappel Ne perforez pas les types de papier spéciaux comme les étiquettes, le papier calque, etc. sinon un incident peut se produire sur la machine. Assurez-vous que les plaques-guide du magasin papier sont correctement alignées sur le papier, sinon les copies ne seront pas perforées au bon emplacement. ! Détails Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 80mm 80mm 70mm 21mm 21mm 3 Opérations de copie 3-14 FS-520 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Perfo] sur l'écran Copie. – Les feuilles perforées seront éjectées dans le bac principal. L'icône Finition montre le nombre de trous ainsi que la position de perforation actuellement sélectionnées. Si vous voulez modifier le nombre de trous et la position de perforation, appliquez la procédure suivante. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Perforation]. L'écran Perforation s'affiche. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-15 5 Appuyez sur la touche de perforation voulue pour la sélectionner. 6 Appuyez sur [Valider]. – Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à la configuration précédente. – Pour désactiver la fonction Perforation tout en mémorisant le nombre et la position des trous de perforation actuellement sélectionnés, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition réapparaît. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. 2 Rappel Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. 3 Opérations de copie 3-16 FS-520 3.2 Insertion de couvertures (bac d'insertion) Le Module de finition FS-520 équipé du Bac d'insertion PI-502 peut joindre des couvertures aux copies imprimées. La fonction Insertion Intercalaires permet d'insérer des pages de couverture chargées dans les magasins supérieur et inférieur du bac d'insertion comme couverture et/ou dos ou comme intercalaires aux copies imprimées et également avec le mode Agrafage de réaliser un livret agrafé et doté d'une couverture. Couverture Jeu copié avec couvertures et Jeu copié avec couverture fixée en mode Agrafage intercalaires joints Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-17 0 Capacité magasin supérieur/inférieur : 200 feuilles (papier) ou 30mm d'épaisseur pour chacun 0 Utiliser le chargeur ADF. 0 Le format de la page de couverture doit être identique au format utilisé pour les copies. 0 La couverture chargée dans le bac d'insertion ne peut pas être copiée. 1 Placez le papier à couverture dans les magasins supérieur et inférieur du bac d'insertion. 2 Utiliser la fonction Insertion intercalaires pour joindre des couvertures aux copies imprimées. Bac supérieur Bac inférieur 3 Opérations de copie 3-18 FS-520 3.3 Utilisation manuelle du Module de finition FS-520 Le Module de finition FS-520 équipé du Bac d'insertion PI-502 peut être utilisé manuellement par l'intermédiaire du panneau de contrôle intégré du Bac d'insertion. Placez du papier dans le magasin inférieur. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le magasin supérieur. Voici les modes de finition disponibles en fonction des options installées. - Module de finition FS-520 + Bac d'insertion PI-502 – Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) - Module de finition FS-520 + Bac d'insertion PI-502 + Kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513 – Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) – Perforation 0 Le papier ne devrait être chargé que dans le magasin inférieur du bac d'insertion. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le magasin supérieur. 0 Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) et Perforation peuvent être combinés. Bouton Départ/Arrêt 1 agrafe en coin 2 agrafes parallèles Perforation Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-19 1 Placer un jeu de papier le magasin inférieur du bac d'insertion. – Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) : placez le papier Recto vers le HAUT. – Perforation : placez le papier Recto vers le HAUT. – Alignez la plaque-guide avec le papier. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage et sur le bouton Perforation pour sélectionner le mode désiré. – Pour sélectionner Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes), appuyez sur la touche de sélection du mode d'agrafage pour allumer le voyant du mode désiré. – Pour sélectionner Perforation, appuyez sur le bouton Perforation pour allumer le voyant. Pour utiliser l'Agrafage et une autre fonction, allumez le voyant du mode d'agrafage désiré. Pour sélectionner seulement le mode Perforation, éteignez tous les autres voyants. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt. ? Si vous désirez arrêter l'opération de finition ? % Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle du bac d'insertion. Bac inférieur Bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage Bouton Perforation Bouton Départ/Arrêt 3 Opérations de copie 3-20 FS-520 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) 4 FS-520 4-3 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) Utilisez cette fonction pour procéder aux réglages de précision du module de finition FS-520. Pour plus de détails, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur du bizhub PRO C6500. ! Détails Les éléments de réglage cible varient en fonction de la configuration des options installées. 03 Réglage perforation \ 01 Régl. position verticale % Procédez à ce réglage pour centrer les trous effectués par l'unité de perforation PK-512/PK-513. 03 Réglage perforation/02 Régl. position horizontale % Procédez à ce réglage pour la position des trous par rapport au bord de la feuille effectués par l'unité de perforation PK-512/PK-513. 03 Réglage perforation \ 03 Réglage synchronisation % Procédez à ce réglage pour la position oblique de la position de perforation effectuée par le Kit perforation PK-512/PK-513 en copie recto-verso ou en mode insertion couvertures avec le bac d'insertion. 03 Réglage perforation \ 04 Capteur dét. bord feuille % Procédez à ce réglage pour détecter le bord du papier à utiliser comme point de référence de l'opération de perforation. 06 Détect. format bac insert % Procédez à ce réglage du format pour le magasin supérieur et le magasin inférieur du bac d'insertion PI-502. 07 Limite quantité sortie % Spécifiez la limite de quantité de sortie des jeux agrafés. 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) 4-4 FS-520 08 Réglage Gondolage % Ce réglage peut être utilisé pour régler la quantité de fixation de compression du rouleau détuileur de sortie si un pli se forme sur les feuilles imprimées éjectées par le FS-520. User’s Guide [Printer/Copier/Scanner]x-1 Thank You Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35. You have made an excellent choice. Your bizhub C35 is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows, Macintosh and Linux environments. Trademarks Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo and Photoshop are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple and the Apple logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. DIC and the DIC logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DIC Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Mac and Mac OS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. NETWARE is a registered trademark or trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Pentium is registered trademark or trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. TOYO is a registered trademark of TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.x-2 Copyright Notice Copyright © 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.x-3 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. 2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. 3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. 4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. 6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor. 8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. 9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above. 10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.x-4 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. 12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries.x-5 Legal Restrictions on Copying Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals. The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying. Financial Instruments z Personal checks z Traveler’s checks z Money orders z Certificates of deposit z Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness z Stock certificates Legal Documents z Food stamps z Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) z Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies z Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled) z Passports z Immigration papers z Motor vehicle licenses and titles z House and property titles and deeds General z Identification cards, badges, or insignias z Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner. When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel. " This machine provides the forgery prevention function in order to prevent financial instruments from being copied illegally. We appreciate your understanding that printed images may infrequently have some noise or image data may not be stored under certain circumstances due to this forgery prevention function.x-6 For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents Contents x-7 1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine ....................................................... 1-2 Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2 Part Names ................................................................................................. 1-4 Front View............................................................................................. 1-4 Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-6 Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6 Adjusting the angle of the control panel...................................................... 1-7 Drivers CD/DVD.......................................................................................... 1-8 Printer Drivers (PostScript Drivers)....................................................... 1-8 Printer Drivers (PCL Drivers) ................................................................ 1-8 Printer Drivers (XPS Drivers) ................................................................ 1-8 Printer Drivers (PPD Files).................................................................... 1-9 Scanner Drivers .................................................................................... 1-9 PC Fax Drivers...................................................................................... 1-9 Applications CD/DVD................................................................................ 1-10 Applications......................................................................................... 1-10 Documentation CD/DVD ........................................................................... 1-12 Documentation.................................................................................... 1-12 System Requirements............................................................................... 1-13x-8 Contents 2 Control panel and touch panel screens ...................................................... 2-1 About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 2-2 Touch panel screens ..................................................................................... 2-5 Home screen............................................................................................... 2-5 Initial Copy mode screen............................................................................. 2-7 Initial Scan to Folder mode screen.............................................................. 2-8 Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen.............................................................. 2-9 Initial Fax mode screen............................................................................... 2-9 Job screen................................................................................................. 2-10 Status screen ............................................................................................ 2-11 USB/HDD screen ...................................................................................... 2-12 Keys and icons that appear in the screens ............................................... 2-13 User authentication and account track ..................................................... 2-15 With user authentication............................................................................ 2-15 Device authentication.......................................................................... 2-15 External server authentication ............................................................ 2-15 Logging in using the authentication device ......................................... 2-16 With account track..................................................................................... 2-16 3 Utility Settings ................................................................................................ 3-1 [Accessibility] ................................................................................................ 3-2 [Meter Count] ................................................................................................. 3-7 [Address Registration] .................................................................................. 3-8 [User Settings] ............................................................................................. 3-10 [Machine Settings]..................................................................................... 3-13 [Copy Settings].......................................................................................... 3-15 [Scan Settings].......................................................................................... 3-16 [Print Settings]........................................................................................... 3-17 [Fax Settings] ............................................................................................ 3-20 [Select Default Start App].......................................................................... 3-20 [Admin Settings] .......................................................................................... 3-21 [Machine Settings]..................................................................................... 3-41 [Administrator Registration]....................................................................... 3-43 [Address Registration]............................................................................... 3-43 [Authentication Setting] ............................................................................. 3-44 [Ethernet]................................................................................................... 3-45 [External Memory Print]............................................................................. 3-48 [Job Timeout] ............................................................................................ 3-48 [Copy Settings].......................................................................................... 3-48 [Print Settings]........................................................................................... 3-49 [Fax Settings] ............................................................................................ 3-63 [Maintenance Menu].................................................................................. 3-63 [Folder Settings]........................................................................................ 3-69 [Security Settings] ..................................................................................... 3-70 Changing the administrator password ................................................ 3-74 Limitations of the password rules........................................................ 3-74Contents x-9 Passwords regulated by the password rules............................................. 3-74 Conditions of the password rules.............................................................. 3-75 Enhanced security settings ................................................................. 3-75 Required settings ...................................................................................... 3-75 Changed settings ...................................................................................... 3-76 [Restore Defaults] ..................................................................................... 3-77 [HDD Format]............................................................................................ 3-77 [Paper Empty] ........................................................................................... 3-78 [Restriction Code Settings]........................................................................ 3-78 [Erase Job Log]......................................................................................... 3-78 4 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 4-1 Print Media ..................................................................................................... 4-2 Specifications.............................................................................................. 4-2 Types .......................................................................................................... 4-4 Plain Paper (Recycled Paper)............................................................... 4-4 Thick Stock ........................................................................................... 4-5 Envelope ............................................................................................... 4-6 Label ..................................................................................................... 4-7 Letterhead............................................................................................. 4-8 Postcard................................................................................................ 4-8 Glossy Media ........................................................................................ 4-9 Single Side Only........................................................................................ 4-10 Special Paper............................................................................................ 4-11 Printable Area ........................................................................................... 4-12 Envelopes ................................................................................................. 4-13 Page Margins............................................................................................ 4-13 Loading Media .............................................................................................. 4-14 How do I load media? ............................................................................... 4-14 Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) ....................................................................... 4-14 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-14 Other Media ........................................................................................ 4-16 Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 4-17 Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media ...................................................................................... 4-19 Tray 2........................................................................................................ 4-21 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-21 Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media ...................................................................................... 4-24 Tray 3/4 (Optional Lower Feeder Unit)...................................................... 4-27 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-27 About Duplex Printing ................................................................................. 4-30 How do I autoduplex? ............................................................................... 4-30 Output Tray .................................................................................................. 4-32 Media Storage .............................................................................................. 4-33x-10 Contents Original Media .............................................................................................. 4-34 Specifications............................................................................................ 4-34 Documents that can be placed on the original glass .......................... 4-34 Documents that can be loaded into the ADF ...................................... 4-34 Loading a Document ................................................................................... 4-36 Placing a document on the original glass.................................................. 4-36 Loading a document into the ADF............................................................. 4-37 5 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 5-1 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 5-2 Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/ 2000...................................................................................................... 5-2 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 5-4 Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/ 2000...................................................................................................... 5-4 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 5-5 Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 .................................................................. 5-5 Windows Vista/Server 2008.................................................................. 5-5 Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 5-5 Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 5-5 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver ..................................... 5-6 Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 5-6 [OK]....................................................................................................... 5-6 [Cancel]................................................................................................. 5-6 [Apply] ................................................................................................... 5-6 [Help]..................................................................................................... 5-6 [Favorite Setting]................................................................................... 5-6 [Printer View]......................................................................................... 5-7 [Paper View].......................................................................................... 5-7 [Quality View] ........................................................................................ 5-7 [Printer Information] .............................................................................. 5-7 [Default]................................................................................................. 5-7 [Advanced] Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)......................................... 5-7 [My Tab] ...................................................................................................... 5-8 [Basic] Tab .................................................................................................. 5-8 [Layout] Tab ................................................................................................ 5-9 [Cover Mode] Tab ....................................................................................... 5-9 [Stamp/Composition] Tab............................................................................ 5-9 [Quality] Tab.............................................................................................. 5-10 [Other] Tab................................................................................................ 5-11 Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 5-11 6 Proof Print, External memory and ID & Print functions ............................. 6-1 Proof Print ...................................................................................................... 6-2 Printing a job saved on the hard disk.......................................................... 6-2 Deleting a job saved on the hard disk......................................................... 6-2Contents x-11 External Memory ............................................................................................ 6-3 Printing from a connected USB memory device ......................................... 6-3 Selecting the type of files to be displayed................................................... 6-4 ID & Print ........................................................................................................ 6-4 Printing simultaneously with log-in........................................................ 6-4 Specifying a job to print......................................................................... 6-4 Deleting a job........................................................................................ 6-5 7 Performing Copy mode operations .............................................................. 7-1 Basic copy operation .................................................................................... 7-2 [Original Size] ................................................................................................. 7-4 Documents of mixed page sizes ................................................................. 7-4 [Paper] ............................................................................................................ 7-5 [Zoom] ............................................................................................................. 7-6 [Duplex/Combine] .......................................................................................... 7-7 [Density] ......................................................................................................... 7-8 [Original Type] ............................................................................................... 7-9 [Color Mode] ................................................................................................... 7-9 [Finishing] .................................................................................................... 7-10 [Proof Copy] ................................................................................................. 7-10 Proof Copy operation ................................................................................ 7-10 [Separate Scan] ............................................................................................ 7-11 Scanning the document in separate batches............................................ 7-12 [ID Copy] ....................................................................................................... 7-13 [Paper Margin] .............................................................................................. 7-14 [Image Quality] ............................................................................................. 7-15 8 Additional copy operations .......................................................................... 8-1 Interrupting a copy job .................................................................................. 8-2 Copy programs .............................................................................................. 8-3 Storing a copy program............................................................................... 8-3 Deleting a copy program............................................................................. 8-3 Copying using stored settings (copy programs).......................................... 8-4 9 Scanning From a Computer Application ..................................................... 9-1 Basic Scanning Operation ............................................................................ 9-2 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings .................................................................. 9-3 Mode settings.............................................................................................. 9-3 When [Basic Mode] is selected................................................................... 9-3 When [Advanced Mode] is selected............................................................ 9-4 Windows WIA Driver Settings ...................................................................... 9-7 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings ................................................................ 9-8 Mode settings.............................................................................................. 9-8 When [Basic Mode] is selected................................................................... 9-8 When [Advanced Mode] is selected............................................................ 9-9x-12 Contents Using a Web Service ................................................................................... 9-12 Settings required to use a Web Service.................................................... 9-12 Installing this machine on the computer.................................................... 9-12 Confirmation before installation .......................................................... 9-12 Installation procedure.......................................................................... 9-12 Specifying the scan command from a computer (Web Service) ............... 9-13 Specifying the scan command from a computer................................. 9-13 10 Scanning with the machine ........................................................................ 10-1 Initial settings ............................................................................................... 10-2 Useful functions ........................................................................................... 10-2 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations ............................................ 10-3 Basic Scan to E-mail operation................................................................. 10-3 Specifying document settings ................................................................... 10-4 [Simplex/Duplex] ................................................................................. 10-4 [Original Size]...................................................................................... 10-5 [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]................................................... 10-5 [Original Settings] - [Original Direction]............................................... 10-6 [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]........................................ 10-6 [Color Mode] ....................................................................................... 10-7 [Original Type]..................................................................................... 10-7 Specifying scan settings............................................................................ 10-8 [Background/Density].......................................................................... 10-8 [Resolution] ......................................................................................... 10-8 [File Settings] - [File Type] .................................................................. 10-9 [File Settings] - [Scan Setting]............................................................. 10-9 [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]........................................................... 10-10 Specifying communication settings......................................................... 10-12 [Binary Division] ................................................................................ 10-12 [E-mail Encryption]............................................................................ 10-12 [Send Use Signature]........................................................................ 10-12 [E-mail].............................................................................................. 10-13 Specifying destinations ............................................................................ 10-14 Selecting from registered destinations.................................................... 10-14 Selecting from the Favorites list........................................................ 10-14 Selecting with an index search ......................................................... 10-15 Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ..................... 10-15 Directly typing in the address.................................................................. 10-16 Selecting from the log ............................................................................. 10-16 Selecting a program destination.............................................................. 10-17 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations .......................................... 10-18 Basic Scan to Folder operation............................................................... 10-18 Specifying document settings ................................................................. 10-20 [Simplex/Duplex] ............................................................................... 10-20 [Original Size].................................................................................... 10-20 [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]................................................. 10-21Contents x-13 [Original Settings] - [Original Direction]............................................. 10-21 [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]...................................... 10-22 [Color Mode] ..................................................................................... 10-22 [Original Type]................................................................................... 10-23 Specifying scan settings.......................................................................... 10-23 [Background/Density]........................................................................ 10-23 [Resolution] ....................................................................................... 10-24 [File Settings] - [File Type] ................................................................ 10-24 [File Settings] - [Scan Setting]........................................................... 10-25 [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]........................................................... 10-25 Specifying the document name............................................................... 10-26 Specifying communication settings......................................................... 10-27 [URL Notification] .............................................................................. 10-27 [URL Notification Destination] ........................................................... 10-27 Specifying destinations ............................................................................ 10-27 Selecting from registered destinations.................................................... 10-27 Selecting from the Favorites list........................................................ 10-28 Selecting with an index search ......................................................... 10-28 Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ..................... 10-28 Directly typing in the address.................................................................. 10-29 With [FTP] ......................................................................................... 10-29 With [PC(SMB)]................................................................................. 10-29 With [WebDAV] ................................................................................. 10-30 With [USB Memory] .......................................................................... 10-30 With [HDD] ........................................................................................ 10-31 With [Web Service Settings] ............................................................. 10-32 Selecting from the log ............................................................................. 10-32 Selecting a program destination.............................................................. 10-33 Registering destinations ........................................................................... 10-34 Destination registration ........................................................................... 10-34 Address Book.................................................................................... 10-34 Group ................................................................................................ 10-34 Program ............................................................................................ 10-34 Registering an address book destination................................................ 10-35 Registering an address book destination (E-mail transmission) ....... 10-35 Registering Address Book (SMB transmission) ...................................... 10-36 Registering a program destination .......................................................... 10-37 11 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................. 11-1 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................. 11-2 About Toner Cartridges............................................................................. 11-2 Replacing a Toner Cartridge..................................................................... 11-4 Replacing a Imaging Unit.......................................................................... 11-9 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle .......................................................... 11-17 Replacing the Transfer Roller ................................................................. 11-20 Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit ............................................................. 11-22x-14 Contents Replacing the Backup Battery................................................................. 11-30 Replacing the Fuser Unit......................................................................... 11-33 Antistatic Protection .................................................................................. 11-38 12 Maintenance ................................................................................................. 12-1 Maintaining the machine ............................................................................. 12-2 Cleaning the machine .................................................................................. 12-4 Exterior...................................................................................................... 12-4 Media Rollers ............................................................................................ 12-5 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers (Manual Feed Tray) ....................... 12-5 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2/3/4 ................................. 12-7 Cleaning the Media Transfer Rollers for Tray 3/4 ............................... 12-8 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the ADF .................................... 12-9 Cleaning the Laser Lens ......................................................................... 12-10 13 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 13-1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 13-2 Printing a configuration page ..................................................................... 13-2 Unlocking the Scanner ................................................................................ 13-3 Preventing Media Misfeeds ......................................................................... 13-4 Understanding the Media Path ................................................................... 13-5 Clearing Media Misfeeds ............................................................................. 13-6 Media misfeed indications......................................................................... 13-6 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 2 .................................................... 13-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 3/4 ............................................... 13-11 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the ADF........................................... 13-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex....................................... 13-15 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Fuser Unit ................................. 13-16 Clearing a Media Misfeed from Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) and Transfer Roller .................................................................................. 13-20 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ................................................... 13-23 Solving Other Problems ............................................................................ 13-26 Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................. 13-31 Status, error and service messages ........................................................ 13-38 Status messages..................................................................................... 13-38 Error messages....................................................................................... 13-39 Warning messages ........................................................................... 13-39 Operator messages .......................................................................... 13-41 Service messages................................................................................... 13-47 14 Installing Accessories ................................................................................. 14-1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 14-2 Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 .......................................................................... 14-3 Kit Contents............................................................................................... 14-3 Installing a Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 ..................................................... 14-4Contents x-15 Working Table WT-P01 ................................................................................ 14-6 Kit Contents............................................................................................... 14-6 Installing a Working Table WT-P01........................................................... 14-7 15 Authentication device (IC card type) ......................................................... 15-1 Using authentication device (IC card type) ............................................... 15-2 Configuring this machine ........................................................................... 15-2 Registering a user ....................................................................................... 15-4 Registering a user using Data Administrator............................................. 15-4 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator.......................... 15-4 Setup......................................................................................................... 15-5 User registration...................................................................................... 15-10 Associating the user with card using authentication device.................... 15-15 Logging in to this machine ....................................................................... 15-15 When [Card Authentication] is enabled................................................... 15-16 When [Card Authentication + Password] is enabled............................... 15-16 A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1 Technical specifications ...............................................................................A-2 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-6 User-Replaceable .................................................................................A-6 Service-Replaceable.............................................................................A-7 Text input ........................................................................................................A-8 Entering text................................................................................................A-8 Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-9 What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-9x-16 Contents1Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Space Requirements To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. Side View Front View 1068 mm (42.0") 100 mm (3.9") 150 mm (5.9") 530 mm (20.9") 288 mm (11.3") 937 mm (36.9") 70 mm (2.8") 508 mm (20.0") 776 mm (30.6") 359 mm (14.1") 226 mm (8.9") 550 mm (21.7")Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-3 " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. Side View with Options 954 mm (37.6") 70 mm (2.8") 508 mm (20.0") 1009 mm (39.7") 359 mm (14.1") 226 mm (8.9") 550 mm (21.7") 376 mm (14.8") 233 mm (9.2")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Part Names The following drawings illustrate the parts of your machine referred to throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with them. Front View 1—Control panel 2—Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 2-a: ADF feed cover 2-b: Document guide 2-c: Document feed tray 2-d: Document output tray 2-e: Document stopper " Lower the document stopper when scanning Legal-size paper with the ADF. 3—USB HOST port " A USB hub can be connected to the USB HOST port. In addition, a USB memory device and an authentication device (IC card type) can be connected to the USB hub at the same time. 4—Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) 5—Tray 2 6—Output tray 7—Scanner lock lever 8—Original glass 9—Original cover pad 10—Scanner unit 10 9 6 7 8 4 3 2-e 2 2-c 2-d 5 1 2-a 2-bGetting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-5 11—Fuser unit 12—Right door 13—Transfer roller 14—Transfer belt unit 15—Imaging unit(s) 16—Front cover 17—Waste toner bottle 18—Toner cartridge(s) 11 12 15 14 13 16 17 18 18 17 13 14 151-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Rear View 1—Power switch 2—Rear cover 3—Power connection 4—LINE (telephone line) jack 5—TEL (telephone) jack 6—10Base-T/100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T Ethernet Interface port 7—USB port Front View with Options 1—Lower feeder unit PF-P08 (Tray 3) 2—Lower feeder unit PF-P08 (Tray 4) 3—Working Table WT-P01 1 3 2 4 6 5 7 2 1 3Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-7 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 1 Grab the sides of the control panel, and then tilt it up. " Before moving the control panel to a lower angle, tilt it up first, and then slowly tilt it down. " When tilting the control panel, do not press on the touch panel.1-8 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Drivers CD/DVD Printer Drivers (PostScript Drivers) " A specific PPD file has been prepared for applications (such as Page Maker and Corel Draw) that require that a PPD file be specified when printing. When specifying a PPD file while printing on Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Vista, Server 2008, XP, Server 2003 and 2000, use the specific PPD file provided on the Drivers CD/DVD. Printer Drivers (PCL Drivers) Printer Drivers (XPS Drivers) Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features, including finishing and advanced layout. For details, refer to “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 5-5. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features, including finishing and advanced layout. For details, refer to “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 5-5. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/ Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features, including finishing and advanced layout. For details on the installation method and functions, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation CD/ DVD. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/ Vista/ Server 2008 for 64bitGetting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-9 Printer Drivers (PPD Files) Scanner Drivers PC Fax Drivers " For details on the installation of the drivers, refer to the [Installation Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD. Operating System Use/Benefit Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/ 10.6) These files are required in order to use the printer driver for each operating system. For details of the Macintosh and Linux printer driver, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 Operating System Use/Benefit TWAIN Driver for Windows 7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000 These drivers enable you to set scanning functions, such as the color setting and size adjustments. For details, refer to “Windows WIA Driver Settings” on page 9-7. TWAIN Driver for Mac OS X (10.3.9/ 10.4/10.5/10.6) WIA Driver for Windows 7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP This driver enables you to set scanning functions, such as the color setting and size adjustments. For details, refer to “Windows WIA Driver Settings” on page 9-7. WIA Driver for Windows 7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers enable you to specify fax settings, such as the paper settings for sending faxes and the settings for editing the address book. For details, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide] on the Documentation CD/ DVD. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for 64 bit1-10 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine " For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Documentation CD/DVD. " Windows TWAIN driver does not correspond to 64-bit applications though it corresponds to 32-bit applications on 64-bit OS. Applications CD/DVD Applications Applications Use/Benefit Download Manager (Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000, Mac OS 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6) This utility enables fonts and overlay data to be downloaded to the hard disk. For details, refer to the online help for all functions of Download Manager. PageScope Net Care Device Manager Printer management functions such as status monitoring and network settings can be accessed. For details, refer to the PageScope Net Care Device Manager User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD. PageScope Data Administrator PageScope Data Administrator is an administration tool with which authentication data and addresses registered with the control panel of supported devices (multifunctional OA equipment) can be changed from other computers on the network. For details, refer to the PageScope Data Administrator User Manual on the Applications CD/DVD. Print Status Notifier This application notifies the user as to whether a print job has completed successfully or has encountered an error. For details, refer to the Print Status Notifier User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD.Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-11 PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for sending PDF and TIFF files directly to a printer to be printed. For details, refer to the PageScope Direct Print User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD. PageScope Enterprise Suite Plug-In This plug-in provides the additional functions of PageScope Enterprise Suite, which enables centralized management of devices and permission management.1-12 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Documentation CD/DVD Documentation Documentation Use/Benefit Installation Guide This manual provides installation details that must be performed in order to use this machine, such as setting up the machine and installing the drivers. Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide (this manual) This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using the drivers and control panel and replacing consumables. Facsimile User’s Guide This manual provides details on general fax operations, such as sending and receiving faxes and using the control panel. Reference Guide This manual provides details on installing the Macintosh and Linux drivers and on specifying settings for the network. Quick Guide This manual provides an introduction to, and illustrations for, basic machine operations and frequently used functions.Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-13 System Requirements „ Personal computer – Pentium 3: 400MHz or higher (Windows Vista: 1GHz or higher) – PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended) – Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor „ Operating System – Microsoft Windows 7 Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate, Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/ Ultimate, Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/ Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/ Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium /Ultimate/Business /Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later) – Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6; We recommend installing the most recent patch.) – Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop, SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 „ Free hard disk space 256 MB or more „ RAM 512 MB or more „ CD/DVD drive „ I/O interface – 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet interface port – USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port " The Ethernet cable and USB cable are not included with the machine. " For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD.1-14 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine2Control panel and touch panel screens2-2 About the Control Panel About the Control Panel No. Name Function 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 [Power Save] key/indicator Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 3 [Fax] key/indicator Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key lights up in green. 4 [E-mail] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. While the machine is in Scan to E-mail mode, the indicator on the [E-mail] key lights up in green. 5 [Folder] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. While the machine is in Scan to Folder mode, the indicator on the [Folder] key lights up in green. 6 [Copy] key/indicator Press to enter Copy mode. While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. 7 [Reset] key Press to clear the settings (except programmed settings) of all displayed functions. Press to delete a job stopped during the scan operation. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 191817 16 14 15 13 121110About the Control Panel 2-3 8 [Interrupt] key/ indicator Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 9 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 10 [Start (Color) ] key Press to start color copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 11 [Start] indicator Lights up in blue when copying, scanning or faxing can be performed. Lights up in orange when copying, scanning or faxing cannot be performed. 12 [Start (B&W) ] key Press to start black-and-white copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies, a fax number, an E-mail address or a name. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [C] (clear) key Press to erase numbers or text. Press to delete a job stopped during the scan operation. 15 [Error] indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred. Lights up in orange when the service representative is being called. 16 [Data] indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue while printing or when a print job is queued. 17 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the [Utility Settings] screen. From the [Utility Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the parameters in the [Accessibility], [Meter Count], [Address Registration], [User Settings] and [Admin Settings] screens. No. Name Function2-4 About the Control Panel 18 [Mode Memory] key Press to store the desired settings for copy, fax or scan operations. In addition, stored settings can be recalled. 19 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the [Access] key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to log on to this machine. While logged on, press the [Access] key to log off. No. Name FunctionTouch panel screens 2-5 Touch panel screens Home screen No. Indication Description 1 Status Displays messages about the current operating status. 2 [Fax] Press to enter Fax mode. For details, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. 3 [Scan to E-mail] Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. For details on the Scan to E-mail mode operations, refer to “Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations” on page 10-3. 4 [Scan to Folder] Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. For details on the Scan to Folder mode operations, refer to “Performing Scan to Folder mode operations” on page 10-18. 5 [Copy] Press to enter Copy mode. For details on the Copy mode operations, refer to “Performing Copy mode operations” on page 7-1. 6 Date/time Shows the current date and time. 1 10 6 9 7 8 2 3 4 52-6 Touch panel screens 7 [USB/HDD] Press to print files on a USB memory device. Press to print a print job saved on hard disk. 8 [Status] Press to view information on consumables and devices. 9 [Job] Press to check a print, transmission, reception or stored data job. 10 Toner supply indicators Shows the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K). No. Indication DescriptionTouch panel screens 2-7 Initial Copy mode screen No. Indication Description 1 Number of copies Indicates the specified number of copies. 2 Copy mode operations Press to display the corresponding screen for specifying various settings. 3 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified copy settings. 4 Press to return to the home screen. 1 3 2 42-8 Touch panel screens Initial Scan to Folder mode screen No. Indication Description 1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter an address of the selected destination type. 3 [Log] Press to specify a destination from the log. 4 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified Scan to Folder mode settings. 5 [Settings] Press to specify settings such as the document scanning method. 6 Press to return to the home screen. 5 4 1 2 3 6Touch panel screens 2-9 Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen Initial Fax mode screen For details on the initial Fax mode screen, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. No. Indication Description 1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter a destination address. 3 [Log] Press to specify a destination from the log. 4 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified Scan to E-mail mode settings. 5 [Settings] Press to specify settings such as the document scanning method. 6 Press to return to the home screen. 5 4 1 2 3 62-10 Touch panel screens Job screen No. Indication Description 1 [Print] Press to display a screen listing the print jobs. 2 [Send] Press to display a screen listing the transmission jobs. 3 [Receive] Press to display a screen listing the reception jobs. 4 [Active]/[Log] Press to display screens listing the jobs currently being performed or the job log. 5 Job list Displays the list of jobs. The job number, user name and job status can be checked. 6 [Delete] Press to delete the selected job. Next, press [Yes], then [OK]. "When the job log is displayed, [Details] appears. To view job details, press [Details]. 7 Press to return to the home screen. 1 4 2 3 6 5 7Touch panel screens 2-11 Status screen No. Indication Description 1 [Consumables] Press to display a screen showing the status of consumables. "The percentages remaining for the consumables may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. 2 [Device info.] Press to display a screen showing the information of devices. 3 Press to return to the home screen. 2 3 12-12 Touch panel screens USB/HDD screen " For details on the Proof Print function, refer to “Proof Print” on page 6-2. " For details on the External Memory Print function, refer to “External Memory” on page 6-3. " For details on the ID & Print function, refer to “ID & Print” on page 6-4. No. Indication Description 1 [Proof Print] Press to print a print job saved on hard disk. [User Name] Select a user. 2 [External Memory] Press to print files on a USB memory device. [File List] Select the file to be printed. In addition, print settings can be specified. [File Type] Select the type of files to be displayed. 3 [ID & Print] Press to print a print job sent as a registered user or public user. [Login User] Press to display and print a job of the user who is currently logged in. [Public User] Press to display and print a job of a public user. 4 Press to return to the home screen. 1 2 3 4Touch panel screens 2-13 Keys and icons that appear in the screens Icon Description If the screen has multiple pages, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different page. If values appear between [ ] and [ ], the current page number/total number of pages is indicated. If there are tabs that are not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different tab. Press to adjust the image quality during a copy, scan or fax operation. Press [+] or [-] to change the entered value. Press to view the error message when an error occurs. Press to display descriptions of the various functions. A description of the current screen will be displayed. Press to display the address book. From this screen, you can select single destinations and group destinations registered in the address book. Press to return to the home screen. Appears while scanning and printing when making copies. Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning operations.2-14 Touch panel screens Appears while printing with PC printing, received fax printing and report printing. Appears when using a G3 fax connection. Appears when there are documents queued for a timer transmission. Appears when there are fax documents received with memory reception or PC faxing. Appears when data or documents are being sent from this unit. Appears when this unit is receiving data or documents. Appears when enhanced security settings have been applied. Appears when a USB memory device is connected. Icon DescriptionUser authentication and account track 2-15 User authentication and account track If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine, the user name or account name and the password must be entered in the Login screen in order to log on. The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or account track settings have been specified. " User authentication and account track settings are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. With user authentication Device authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. External server authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Specify a server for [Server]. 3 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. " If account track settings have been applied, account track will be performed after [Login] is pressed. However, if the machine has been set to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account had been specified for the user who is logging on, account track will not be performed. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].2-16 User authentication and account track Logging in using the authentication device The following describes how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication. „ To perform IC card authentication, register the information recorded in the IC card in advance. „ If an authentication failure recurs, the problem may be due to incorrect registration of IC card information. Register IC card information again. „ Press [Device Authentication] to log in by specifying the user name and password for [User Name] and [Password], without using the authentication device. 1 Press [Card Authentication]. 2 Press [Access Basic Screen]. – For ID & Print jobs, press [Begin Printing] to authenticate the user and start printing. 3 Place the IC card on the authentication device. " For details on how to register an IC card for the user, refer to “Authentication device (IC card type)” on page 15-1. With account track 1 Specify an account and password for [Account] and [Password]. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used.3Utility Settings3-2 [Accessibility] [Accessibility] From the [Accessibility] screen, various settings can be specified for the displayed screens and the operation of control panel keys. Invalid Input Sound Input Confirmation Sound Key Repeat/ Interval Sound Set- Set All tings Accessibility Time to Start Enable Enable Key Interval Volume Operation Confirmation Volume Enable Volume Enable Volume Operation Completion Successful Enable Completion Volume Transmission Completion Enable Volume Basic Sound[Accessibility] 3-3 Low Caution Sound (Level 2) Low Caution Sound (Level 1) Completion Preparation Touch Panel Adujstment Message Display Time Enable Enable Volume Caution Sound Volume Enable Volume Enable Volume Severe Caution Sound Enable Volume Low Caution Sound (Level 3) LCD Brightness3-4 [Accessibility] 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Accessibility]. " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Key Repeat /Interval] The length of time until the value begins to change after a button is held down and the length of time for the value to change can be specified. [Time to Start] Settings 0.1 to 3.0 seconds (Default:0.8) Specify the length of time until a value begins to change after a button is held down. [Key Interval] Settings 0.1 to 3.0 seconds (Default:0.3) Specify the length of time for the value to change. [Sound Settings] Settings can be specified for the various sounds produced with key operations. [Set all] Settings Enable: [ON] / [OFF] Volume: [Low] / [Medium] / [High] To specify that sounds be produced, press [Enable], and then press [ON]. To adjust the volume, press [Volume], and then press [Low], [Medium] or [High]. To specify that sounds not be produced, press [Enable], and then press [OFF]. [Operation Confirmation] Select if confirmation sounds are to be produced with key operations. [Input Confirmation Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when keys are pressed to enter data. [Invalid Input Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when keys are pressed to enter invalid data. [Basic Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when the default setting is selected while scrolling through the settings.[Accessibility] 3-5 [Successful Completion] Select if sounds are to be produced when an operation or communication is completed successfully. [Operation Completion] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when an operation is completed successfully. [Transmission Completion] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when a communication is completed successfully. [Completion Preparation] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select if sounds are to be produced when machine preparations are finished. [Caution Sound] Select if sounds are to be produced when cautions occur. [Low Caution Sound (Level 1)] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when a message appears in the touch panel, warning that it is almost time to replace consumables or a replaceable part. [Low Caution Sound (Level 2)] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when the user performs an incorrect operation. [Low Caution Sound (Level 3)] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appeared or the User’s Guide. [Severe Caution Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires a service representative.3-6 [Accessibility] [Touch Panel Adujstment] If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted. „ Press the four check points ([+]) in the touch panel adjustment screen, making sure that a sound is produced with each, and then press the [Start] key. „ The check points ([+]) can be pressed in any order. „ To reset the adjustment, press the [C] key, and then press the four check points ([+]) again. „ To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key. „ If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the service representative. [Message Display Time] Settings [3 sec.] / [5 sec.] Specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. [LCD Brightness] Settings -3 to 3 (Default: 0) Adjust the contrast of the touch panel.[Meter Count] 3-7 [Meter Count] From the [Meter Count] screen, the page count for each function and the total page count can be viewed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Meter Count]. 3 Press [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to display the desired information. Item Description [Total] Displays the total page count for each operation mode. [Copy] Displays the page count for copy operations. [Print] Displays the page count for print operations. [Scan] Displays the page count for scan operations. [Fax] Displays the page count for fax operations. Scan Total Print Copy Meter Count Fax3-8 [Address Registration] [Address Registration] From the [Address Registration] screen, E-mail and fax destinations can be registered and viewed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. " [Address Registration] does not appear if only account track settings have been specified and no user is logged on with an account. Item Description [E-mail] Destinations for E-mail transmissions can be registered and viewed. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. [Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination. [New] Press to register a new destination. Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [E-mail], [Favorites] and [Index]. Fax Address Registration E-mail Mode Check New Mode Check New SMB Mode Check New[Address Registration] 3-9 [Fax] Fax destinations can be registered and viewed. For details on registering, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. [Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination. [New] Press to register a new destination. Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [Fax number], [Favorites], [Index] and [Line Settings]. [SMB] Destinations for SMB transmissions can be registered and viewed. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. [Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination. [New] Press to register a new destination. Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [Connection] ([Host Name], [File Path], [User ID], [Password]), [Favorites] and [Index]. Item Description3-10 [User Settings] [User Settings] From the [User Settings] screen, various settings are available to be changed by the user. Machine Settings Paper Tray Settings Copy Settings User Settings Language Auto Tray Switch Tray 1 Measurement Unit Setting Enable ATS/ APS ACS Level Tray 2 Tray 3 Default Copy Settings Auto Zoom for Combine Separate Scan Output Method Tray 4 Scan to E-mail Default Tab Fax Default Tab Scan to Folder Default Tab[User Settings] 3-11 Scan Settings Default Scan Settings Print Settings JPEG Compression Level Paper Tray Settings Paper Size Black Compression Level Default Tray Custom Size Paper Settings Tray 1 Tray 2 Duplex Tray 3 Copies Collate Auto Tray Switching Paper Type Paper Size Custom Size Paper Type Paper Size Paper Type Tray 4 Paper Size Paper Type3-12 [User Settings] Tray Mapping Mode Logical Tray 0 Logical Tray 3 Logical Tray 4 Tray Mapping Logical Tray 1 Logical Tray 2 Logical Tray 5 Logical Tray 6 Logical Tray 7 Logical Tray 8 Logical Tray 9 Print Reports Statistics Page PS Font List PCL Configuration Page HDD Directory List Counter List Print[User Settings] 3-13 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [User Settings]. " [User Settings] is not displayed when the job log is full. [Machine Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Language] Settings [English] / [French] / [Italian] / [German] / [Spanish] / [Portuguese] / [Hangul] / [Simplified Chinese] / [Traditional Chinese] / [Czech] / [Hungarian] / [Polish] / [Slovak] / [Russian] / [Dutch] / [Danish] / [Norwegian] / [Swedish] / [Finnish] / [Greek] / [Turkish] / [Catalan] / [Japanese] Specify the language for the screens that appear in the touch panel. [Measurement Unit Setting] Settings [Inch] / [mm] Select the measurement units for the values that appear in the touch panel screens. "The default setting is [Inch] for 120V model, and [mm] for other models. Fax Settings Default Fax Settings Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. Display Fax Activity Fax RX Fax TX3-14 [User Settings] [Paper Tray Settings] Specify paper tray settings. [Auto Tray Switch] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. [Enable ATS/APS] Specify the paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically changed. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed. [Tray 1] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 1] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [Tray 2] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 2] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [Tray 3] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 3] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [Tray 4] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 4] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [ACS Level] Settings 0 to 4 (Default: 2) Adjust the level for detecting whether a document is in color or in black and white when the [Auto] Color setting is selected.Set to [0] or [1] for a tendency toward black and white, or set to [3] or [4] for a tendency toward color. [Scan to E-mail Default Tab] Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Log] Specify the initial screen when changing to the E-mail transmission screen. [Fax Default Tab] Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Others] Specify the initial screen when changing to the fax transmission screen.[User Settings] 3-15 [Copy Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Scan to Folder Default Tab] Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Log] Specify the initial screen when changing to the folder transmission screen. Item Description [Auto Zoom for Combine] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not the zoom ratio is automatically adjusted when the [Auto] Paper setting and a Combine setting are selected. [Default Copy Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting] Select the default copy settings that are selected when the machine is turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. [Factory Default]: The manufacturer’s default settings are used as the default settings. [Current Setting]: The currently specified settings are used as the default settings. [Separate Scan Output Method] Settings [Batch Print] / [Page Print] Select whether or not printing begins after all document pages have been scanned when the document is divided and the batches are separately loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages. [Batch Print]: Printing begins after all pages of the document have been scanned. [Page Print]: Printing of pages that can be printed begins while the document is being scanned.3-16 [User Settings] [Scan Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [JPEG Compression Level] Settings [High Quality] / [Standard] / [High Compression] Select the compression method for saving an image in full color. [High Quality]: The data size will become large, but the image quality will be high. [Standard]: Both the data size and image quality will be between those of [High Quality] and [High Compression]. [High Compression]: The data size will become small, but the image quality will be low. [Black Compression Level] Settings [MH] / [MMR] Select this machine’s transmission quality when sending data with the TIFF file format selected. [MH]: The data size will become large. [MMR]: The data size will become small. [Default Scan Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting] Select the default scan settings that are selected when the machine is turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. [Factory Default]: The manufacturer’s default settings are used as the default settings. [Current Setting]: The currently specified settings are used as the default settings.[User Settings] 3-17 [Print Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Paper Settings] Specify settings for the paper and paper trays. [Paper Tray Settings] Specify settings for the paper trays. [Default Tray] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Select the paper tray that is given priority. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed. [Tray 1]-[Tray 4] Specify the default settings for [Tray 1] through [Tray 4]. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed.3-18 [User Settings] [Paper Size] Settings [Any] / [Letter] / [Legal] / [Executive] / [A4] / [A5] / [A6] / [B5 (JIS)] / [B6] / [Govt Letter] / [Statement] / [Folio] / [SP Folio] / [UK Quarto] / [Foolscap] / [Govt Legal] / [16K] / [4×6] / [Kai 16] / [Kai 32] / [Env C6] / [Env DL] / [Env Monarch] / [Env Chou#3] / [Env Chou#4] / [B5 (ISO)] / [Env #10] / [J Postcard] / [J Postcard-D] / [8 1/8×13 1/4] / [8 1/ 2×13 1/2] / [Custom Size] Select the size of paper loaded in the selected tray. "The default setting is [Letter] for 120V model, and [A4] for other models. "Depending on the setting selected for [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Measurement Unit Setting], 4 × 6 may change to 10 × 15 cm. "With [Tray 2], [Env C6], [Env DL], [Env Monarch], [Env Chou#3], [Env Chou#4], [B5 (ISO)], [Env #10] do not appear. "With [Tray 3] and [Tray 4], only [Letter], [Legal], [Govt Legal], [Executive], [A4] and [B5 (JIS)] appear. [Custom Size] Press [Width] and [Length], and then type in the paper size. "These settings can be specified if [Paper Size] is set to [Custom]. "Settings for [Custom Size] cannot be specified for [Tray 3] and [Tray 4].[User Settings] 3-19 [Paper Type] Settings [Any] / [Plain Paper] / [Recycled] / [Thick 1] / [Thick 2] / [Label] / [Envelope] / [Postcard] / [Letterhead] / [Glossy 1] / [Glossy 2] / [1 Side Only] / [Special Paper] Select the type of paper loaded in the selected tray. "[Envelope] appears only with [Tray 1]. "With [Tray 3] and [Tray 4], only [Any], [Plain Paper], [Recycled], [1 Side Only] and [Special Paper] appear. [Duplex] Settings [OFF] / [Long Edge] / [Short Edge] Select whether pages are printed double-sided. If [Long Edge] is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for long-edge binding. If [Short Edge] is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for short-edge binding. [Copies] Settings 1 to 9999 (Default: 1) Specify the number of copies to be printed. [Collate] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to enable collated (sort) printing. [Auto Tray Switching] Settings [ON] / [OFF] If [ON] is selected and the specified tray runs out of paper during printing, a tray loaded with paper of the same size is automatically selected so printing can continue. If [OFF] is selected and the specified tray runs out of paper, printing stops.3-20 [User Settings] [Fax Settings] Specify the fax settings. For details on specifying the fax settings, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. [Select Default Start App] This screen appears when an available application is registered while Enhanced Server Authentication is enabled. [Tray Mapping] Specify the Tray Mapping settings. [Tray Mapping Mode] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the Tray Mapping function is used. [Logical Tray 0]- [Logical Tray 9] Settings [Physical Tray 1] / [Physical Tray 2] / [Physical Tray 3] "For [Logical Tray 1], the default value is [Physical Tray 1]. Select the tray that is used for printing when a print job is received from another manufacturer’s printer driver. [Print Reports] Specify settings for printing the various reports. [Configuration Page] Prints information and status of this machine. [Statistics Page] Prints the statistics page. [Font List] Prints the font list. [PS] Prints the PostScript font list. [PCL] Prints the PCL font list. [HDD Directory List] Prints the directory list for the hard disk. [Counter List Print] Prints the list of counters.[Admin Settings] 3-21 [Admin Settings] From the Admin Settings screen, various settings are available to be changed by the machine administrator. In order to display the Admin Settings screen, the user must log on using the administrator password. Administrator Registration Administrator Registration Extension No. E-mail Address Auto Reset Settings Enable Auto Reset Priority Mode Machine Settings Date & Time Settings Admin Settings Date (XX.XX.XX) Sleep Time Setting Time Daylight Saving Time List/Counter Report Input Tray Time Zone Enable Job Settings List Name Offset3-22 [Admin Settings] Address Registration Address Book Address Book Fax E-mail List Output Number of Addresses List Output FTP Start Number Number of Addresses List Output WebDAV Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses Start Number SMB Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Machine Settings Device Name Address[Admin Settings] 3-23 Program Fax E-mail FTP Group Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Internet Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Output3-24 [Admin Settings] WebDAV Start Number Number of Addresses List Output SMB Address Book Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Group Address Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Internet Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Output[Admin Settings] 3-25 Ethernet TCP/IP Enable BOOTP ARP/PING HTTP FTP IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DHCP Telnet Bonjour Dynamic DNS RAW Port Enable Bidirectional IPP Authentication Setting Logout Confirmation Display User List Display Setting Card Authentication3-26 [Admin Settings] SNMP IPv6 WSD Print IPSec IP Address Filter Netware AppleTalk Network Speed Binary Division IEEE802. 1X Permit Access Deny Access Enable Auto Setting Link Local Global Address Gateway Address SLP SMTP[Admin Settings] 3-27 Encryption Method Auto. Obtain Certificates S/MIME Enabled Digital Signature S/MIME Comm.Setting Print S/MIME Information Copy Settings Specify Tray When APS OFF Paper Priority Job Timeout External Memory Print Print Settings Startup Page Setting Auto Continue Paper Default Paper Paper Size Custom Size Paper Type Measurement Unit Setting Width Length3-28 [Admin Settings] Hold Job Timeout Edge Enhancement Color Mode Brightness Halftone Edge Strength Economy Print PCL Settings Text Printing Image Printing Text Printing Graphics Printing Image Printing Text Printing Graphics Printing Image Printing Quality Settings Contrast RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray[Admin Settings] 3-29 Graphics Printing RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray PS Settings Graphics Printing Text Printing Image Printing RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray Simulation Simulation Profile Sim. Intent CMYK Gray RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray Destination Profile Destination Profile Destination Profile3-30 [Admin Settings] Gradation Adjustment Tone Calibration Cyan Magenta Yellow Black AIDC Process CMYK Density Highlight Middle Shadow Highlight Middle Shadow Highlight Middle Shadow Highlight Middle Shadow[Admin Settings] 3-31 Emulation PCL Default Emulation CR/LF Mapping Line/Page Wait Timeout Print PS Errors PS Protocol Auto Trapping Color Separation PS Black Overprint Font Setting Font Number Pitch Size Symbol Set XPS Digital Signature Print XPS Errors Fax Settings Sender Settings Sender Sender Fax No.3-32 [Admin Settings] Header/ Footer Settings Header Position Fax TX Header Name Footer Position Comm. Settings PB/DP RX Mode Number of RX Call Rings Redial Redial Interval Line Monitor Line Monitor Volume Ring Pattern Manual RX V.34 OFF[Admin Settings] 3-33 Fax Function Settings Function Settings Inch Paper Priority Paper Priority Print Paper Size Tray Selection for RX Print Min. Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages Duplex Print(RX) F-Code TX Dest. Check Display Func. Confirm Addr (TX) Confirm Addr (Register) Restrict Fax TX Restrict Fax RX Restrict PC-Fax TX Memory RX Memory RX Password Restrict Internet Fax RX Restrict Internet Fax TX3-34 [Admin Settings] Closed Network RX Password Enable Password Forward TX Settings Forward TX Setting Forwarding Address Forward & Print Remote RX Settings Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. PC-Fax RX Settings PC-Fax RX Setting PC-Fax RX Print PBX Connection Settings PBX Function PBX Number Nighttime RX Settings Night Fax RX Print Night RX Start Time Night RX End Time Fax Report Activity Report TX Result Report TX Result Report Image Output Settings Output Time Setting Output Limit Setting[Admin Settings] 3-35 List Print Fax Setup Pg Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Screen PC-Fax TX Error Report Broadcast Report TX Reserve Fax Target Fax Factory Default Fax Image initialized Maintenance Menu Event Log Halftone 64 Cyan 64 Magenta 64 Yellow 64 Black 64 Halftone 128 Cyan 128 Magenta 128 Yellow 128 Black 128 I-Fax RX Error Report Print Menu3-36 [Admin Settings] Halftone 256 Cyan 256 Magenta 256 Yellow 256 Black 256 Gradation Activity Report Scan Send Report Print Scan Event Log Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Plain Paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Envelope Side Edge Adjustment Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4[Admin Settings] 3-37 Left ADJ Duplex Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 2nd Image Transfer Current Simplex Pass Plain Paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Postcard Envelope Label Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Manual Duplex Plain Paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Postcard Envelope Label3-38 [Admin Settings] Thick Paper Image Density Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Monochrome Density Adj. Engine DipSW 1 Engine DipSW 2 Engine DipSW 3 Engine DipSW 26 Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Fine Line ADJ AIDC Mode Thick Mode Engine DipSW Engine DipSW 27 Engine DipSW 28 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~[Admin Settings] 3-39 Yellow Magenta Main Scan Page Scan Adjust Value Main Scan Adjust Cyan Folder Settings Auto Del Interval Auto Document Delete Time Security Settings Administrator Password Security Details Password Rules Tranfer Belt Unit Transfer Roller Unit Consumables Replace Supplies Fusing Unit Document Hold Setting Registering and Changing Addr. Manual Destination lnput Hide Personal Data Disable Job History Display Restrict Scan to USB3-40 [Admin Settings] Restore Defaults Restore NetWork Restore System Mode Check HDD Capacity HDD Settings Execute Restore All Enhanced Security Mode Overwrite All Data SSD Low-level Format HDD Format User Area (Print) User Area (Scan) All Paper Empty Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Restriction Code Settings Erase Job Log[Admin Settings] 3-41 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Admin Settings]. 3 Type in the administrator password (default:12345678). " If the administrator password (default:12345678) is incorrectly entered three times, machine operations are locked. If this occurs, turn the machine off, then on again. 4 Press [OK]. [Machine Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Sleep Time Setting] Settings [5 min.] / [6 min.] / [7 min.] / [8 min.] / [9 min.] / [10 min.] / [11 min.] / [12 min.] / [13 min.] / [14 min.] / [15 min.] / [30 min.] / [1 Hour] / [3 Hours] Specify the length of time until the machine enters Power Save mode. [Date & Time Settings] Specify the date, time and time zone. [Date (XX.XX.XX)] Specify the current date. "The default setting is set in the order month, day, then year (MM.DD.YY) for 120V model, month, then year (DD.MM.YY) for 220V model (Europe), and year, month, then day (YY.MM.DD) for 220V model (Asia and China). [Time] Specify the current time. [Time Zone] Settings -12:00 to +13:00 (Default: 00:00) The time zone can be set between -12:00 and +13:00 (in 30-minute increments).3-42 [Admin Settings] [Daylight Saving Time] Specify settings for daylight saving time. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If [ON] is selected, the specified time offset from the current time appears. [Offset] Settings 1 to 150 (Default: 60) Specify the length of time applied for daylight saving time between 1 and 150 minutes (in 1-minute increments). [List/Counter] The machine settings can be printed. [Job Settings List] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the list of machine settings. [Report Input Tray] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Select the paper tray loaded with the paper used to print reports. [Auto Reset Settings] Specify settings to automatically reset copy settings after the specified time period has lapsed. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to reset after the specified time period has lapsed. [Auto Reset] Settings 1 to 9 (Default: 1) Specify the time required to reset. [Priority Mode] Settings [Home] / [Copy] / [E-mail] / [Folder] / [Fax] Select the function to be displayed on the screen after resetting.[Admin Settings] 3-43 [Administrator Registration] [Address Registration] Item Description [Administrator Registration] Specify administrator information. [Name] Specify the name of the administrator. [Extension No.] Specify the extension number for the administrator. [E-mail Address] Specify the E-mail address for the administrator. "This is the From address for E-mail messages sent from this machine and the address where machine status notifications will be sent. [Machine Settings] Specify machine information. [Device Name] Specify the name of the machine. The name specified for [Device Name] will be used as the file name for scan data. [Address] Specify the E-mail address for the machine. Item Description [Address Book] The destination lists for [Address Book], [Group] and [Program] can be printed or viewed. [Address Book] Specify settings for printing the list of address book destinations. [Fax]/[E-mail]/[FTP]/ [WebDAV]/[SMB]/ [Internet Fax] [Start Number]: Specify the starting address book destination number. [Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of address book destinations. [List Output]: Prints the list of address book destinations.3-44 [Admin Settings] [Authentication Setting] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Group] Specify settings for printing the list of group destinations. [Start Number]: Specify the starting group destination number. [Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of group destinations. [List Output]: Prints the list of group destinations. [Program] Specify settings for printing the list of program destinations. [Fax]/[E-mail]/[FTP]/ [WebDAV]/[SMB]/ [Internet Fax]/ [Address Book]/ [Group Address] [Start Number]: Specify the starting program destination number. [Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of program destinations. [List Output]: Prints the list of program destinations. Item Description [User List Display Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to display a user list. [Logout Confirmation Display] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a logoff confirmation message appears after the [Access] key is pressed. [Card Authentication] Displayed only when the authentication device is connected, and used to register IC card information for the user. For details, refer to “Authentication device (IC card type)” on page 15-1.[Admin Settings] 3-45 [Ethernet] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [TCP/IP] Specify network settings for the machine. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select the setting for connecting to this machine through a network. "If [OFF] is selected, the TCP/IP parameters do not appear. [IP Address] Settings [0.0.0.0] Specify the IP address used by this machine on the network. [Subnet Mask] Settings [0.0.0.0] Specify the subnet mask. [Gateway] Settings [0.0.0.0] Specify the gateway address. [DHCP] Settings [ON] / [OFF] If there is a DHCP server on the network, specify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by the DHCP server. [BOOTP] Settings [ON] / [OFF] If there is a BOOTP server on the network, specify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by the BOOTP server. [ARP/PING] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the ARP/PING command is used when the IP address is assigned. [HTTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable HTTP. [FTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable the FTP server.3-46 [Admin Settings] [Telnet] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable Telnet transmissions. [Bonjour] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable Bonjour. [Dynamic DNS] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable Dynamic DNS. [IPP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable IPP. [RAW Port] Specify the RAW port settings. [Enable] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not to enable the RAW port. [Bidirectional] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to enable RAW port bidirectional communication. [SLP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable SLP. [SMTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable E-mail transmission operations for this machine. [SNMP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable SNMP. [WSD Print] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable WSD printing. [IPSec] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable IPsec. [IP Address Filter] Specify IP address filtering settings. [Permit Access] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Specify access permissions for IP address filtering. [Deny Access] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Specify access blocking for IP address filtering.[Admin Settings] 3-47 [IPv6] Specify IPv6 settings. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to enable IPv6. [Auto Setting] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable the IPv6 auto setting. [Link Local] Displays the link-local address. [Global Address] Displays the global address. [Gateway Address] Displays the gateway address. [Netware] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable NetWare. [AppleTalk] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable AppleTalk. [Network Speed] Settings [Auto] / [10 Mbps Full Duplex] / [10 Mbps Half Duplex] / [100 Mbps Full Duplex] / [100 Mbps Half Duplex] / [1 Gbps Full Duplex] Specifies the transmission speed for the network and the transmission method for bidirectional transmission. [IEEE802.1X] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable IEEE802.1X. [Binary Division] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not transmission data is divided. [S/MIME Comm.Setting] Specify S/MIME communication settings. [S/MIME Enabled] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable S/MIME. [Digital Signature] Settings [Always add signature] / [Do not add signature] / [Select when sending] Select the setting for digital signatures. [Encryption Method] Settings [RC2-40] / [RC2-64] / [RC2-128] / [DES] / [3DES] / [AES-128] / [AES-192] / [AES-256] Select the encryption method for the body of E-mail messages.3-48 [Admin Settings] [External Memory Print] [Job Timeout] [Copy Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Auto. Obtain Certificates] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not to automatically obtain certificates. [Print S/MIME Information] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not to print S/MIME information. Description Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable the External Memory Print function. Description Settings 5 to 300(Default:15) Specify the length of time until a job timeout occurs. Item Description [Specify Tray When APS OFF] Settings [Tray Before APS ON] / [Default Tray] Select which paper tray is selected when the automatic tray-switching feature (APS) is disabled. [Paper Priority] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Specify the paper tray that is normally used. "[Tray3] and [Tray4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed.[Admin Settings] 3-49 [Print Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Startup Page Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the machine is turned on. [Auto Continue] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not printing continues when a size error occurs during printing.3-50 [Admin Settings] [Paper] Specify settings for the paper used for printing. [Default Paper] Specify settings for the paper that is normally used. [Paper Size] Settings [Letter] / [Legal] / [Executive] / [A4] / [A5] / [A6] / [B5 (JIS)] / [B6] / [Govt Letter] / [Statement] / [Folio] / [SP Folio] / [UK Quarto] / [Foolscap] / [Govt Legal] / [16K] / [4×6] / [Kai 16] / [Kai 32] / [Env C6] / [Env DL] / [Env Monarch] / [Env Chou#3] / [Env Chou#4] / [B5 (ISO)] / [Env#10] / [J Postcard] / [J Postcard-D] / [8 1/8×13 1/4] / [8 1/2×13 1/2] / [Custom Size] Select the paper size. "The default setting is [Letter] for USA and Canada, and [A4] for other countries. "Depending on the setting selected for [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Measurement Unit Setting], 4 × 6 may change to 10 × 15 cm. [Custom Size] Press [Width] and [Length], and then type in the paper size. Setting range for Width For inches: 3.63 to 8.50 inches For millimeters: 92 to 216 mm Setting range for Length For inches: 5.83 to 14.00 inches For millimeters: 148 to 256 mm "These settings can be specified if [Paper Size] is set to [Custom Size]. [Paper Type] Settings [Plain Paper] / [Recycled] / [Thick 1] / [Thick 2] / [Label] / [Envelope] / [Postcard] / [Letterhead] / [Glossy 1] / [Glossy 2] / [1 Side Only] / [Special Paper] Select the paper type.[Admin Settings] 3-51 [Measurement Unit Setting] Settings [Inch] / [mm] Select the measurement units. [Hold Job Timeout] Settings [Disable] / [1 Hour] / [4 Hours] / [1 Day] / [1 Week] Specify the length of time until print jobs saved on the hard disk are deleted. If [Disable] is selected, print jobs are not deleted at a specific time. [Quality Settings] Specify settings for the print quality. [Color Mode] Settings [Color Mode] / [Gray Scale] [Color Mode]: The pages are printed in full color. [Gray Scale]: The pages are printed in black and white. [Brightness] Settings -15 to 15% (Default: 0%) The brightness of the printed image can be adjusted. [Halftone] Select how halftones in images, text and graphics are reproduced. [Image Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth] Select how halftones in images are reproduced. [Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high precision. [Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail. [Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with smoothness. [Text Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth] Select how halftones in text are reproduced. [Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high precision. [Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail. [Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with smoothness.3-52 [Admin Settings] [Graphics Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth] Select how halftones in graphics are reproduced. [Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high precision. [Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail. [Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with smoothness. [Edge Enhancement] Select how edges in images, text and graphics are emphasized. [Image Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether image edges are emphasized. [ON]: The edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Text Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether text edges are emphasized. [ON]: The edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Graphics Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether graphics edges are emphasized. [ON]: The edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Edge Strength] Settings [OFF] / [Low] / [Middle] / [High] Select the desired amount that edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Low]: The edges are slightly emphasized. [Middle]: The edges are emphasized by an average amount. [High]: The edges are highly emphasized.[Admin Settings] 3-53 [Economy Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether to print graphics with a reduced density by reducing the amount of toner that is used. [ON]: The amount of toner used is reduced when printing. [OFF]: The amount of toner used is not reduced when printing. [PCL Settings] Specify settings for PCL printing. [Contrast] Settings -15 to 15%(Default: 0%) The contrast of the image can be adjusted. [Image Printing] Specify settings for RGB image data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] Select the color space for RGB image data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB image data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB image data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black.3-54 [Admin Settings] [Text Printing] Specify settings for RGB text data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] Select the color space for RGB text data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB text data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB text data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [Graphics Printing] Specify settings for RGB graphics data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] Select the color space for RGB graphics data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB graphics data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.[Admin Settings] 3-55 [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB graphics data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [PS Settings] Specify settings for PostScript printing. [Image Printing] Specify settings for RGB image data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] / [AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] / [ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB] Select the color space for RGB image data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB image data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile.3-56 [Admin Settings] [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB image data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [Destination Profile] Settings [Auto] Select the destination profile. [Auto]: A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching, halftones and other profiles. Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile. [Text Printing] Specify settings for RGB text data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] / [AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] / [ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB] Select the color space for RGB text data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source.[Admin Settings] 3-57 [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB text data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB text data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [Destination Profile] Settings [Auto] Select the destination profile. [Auto]: A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching, halftones and other profiles. Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile.3-58 [Admin Settings] [Graphics Printing] Specify settings for RGB graphics data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] / [AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] / [ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB] Select the color space for RGB graphics data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB graphics data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB graphics data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black.[Admin Settings] 3-59 [Destination Profile] Settings [Auto] Select the destination profile. [Auto]: A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching, halftones and other profiles. Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile. [Simulation] Specify settings for the simulation profile. [Simulation Profile] Settings [NONE] / [SWOP] / [Euroscale] / [CommercialPress] / [JapanColor] / [TOYO] / [DIC] Select the simulation profile. If [NONE] is selected, no simulation profile is specified. Simulation profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Simulation Profile. [Sim. Intent] Settings [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied to the simulation profile. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the simulation profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the simulation profile. [CMYK Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced using the four CMYK colors. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black.3-60 [Admin Settings] [Gradation Adjustment] Specify settings for gradation level adjustments. [Tone Calibration] Settings [ON] / [OFF] [ON]: Image adjustments are applied. [OFF]: Image adjustments are not applied. [AIDC Process] Settings [Execute] / [Cancel] [Execute]: Image adjustments are performed immediately. [Cancel]: Image adjustments are not performed. "AIDC processing consumes toner. [CMYK Density] Specify fine adjustment settings for cyan, magenta, yellow and black. [Cyan]/ [Magenta]/ [Yellow]/ [Black] Settings -3 to 3 (Default: 0) [Highlight]: The density of the highlight color in images can be adjusted. [Middle]: The density of the middle color in images can be adjusted. [Shadow]: The density of the shadow color in images can be adjusted. [Color Separation] Settings [ON] / [OFF] [ON]: Color separation is performed. The contents of a color page is separated into the color pages for yellow, magenta, cyan and black, and each is printed with black gradations as individual pages. The printing order is yellow, magenta, cyan, then black. [OFF]: Color separation is not performed. A normal color separation is performed. [Emulation] Specify the processing method for data received by this machine. [Default Emulation] Settings [Auto] / [PS] / [PCL] Select the machine emulation language. If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects the machine emulation language from the data stream.[Admin Settings] 3-61 [PS] Specify settings for PostScript errors and data transmissions. [Wait Timeout] Settings 0 to 300 (Default: 0) Specify the time until an error is determined to be a PostScript error. If [0] is selected, no timeout is performed. [Print PS Errors] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an error page is printed when a Postscript error occurs. [PS Protocol] Settings [Auto] / [Normal] / [Binary] Select the protocol for data transmissions with a PostScript data stream. If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects an applicable protocol from the data stream. [Auto Trapping] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not neighboring colors are printed superimposed in order to prevent white space around images. [Black Overprint] Settings [Text/Graphic] / [Text] / [OFF] Specify whether black objects are printed (superimposed) on a neighboring color in order to prevent white space around black characters or figures. If [Text/Graphic] is selected, superimposed printing is applied to text and graphics. If [Text] is selected, superimposed printing is applied to text. [PCL] Specify settings for the PCL language. [CR/LF Mapping] Settings [CR = CR LF = LF] / [CR = CRLF LF = LF] / [CR = CR LF = LFCR] / [CR = CRLF LF = LFCR] Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the PCL language. [Line/Page] Settings 5 to 128 (Default: 60) Specify the number of lines per page in the PCL language.3-62 [Admin Settings] [Font Setting] Specify font settings for the PCL language. [Font Number] Settings 0 to 102 (Default: 000) Specify the default font in the PCL language. The font numbers that appear correspond to the PCL font list. For details on printing the font list, refer to “[Print Settings]” on page 3-17. [Pitch Size] Settings 0.44 to 99.99 (Default: 10.00) Specify the font size in the PCL language. If the setting selected for [Font Number] is for a bitmap font, [Pitch Size] appears. If the setting selected for [Font Number] is for an outline font, [Point Size] appears. [Symbol Set] Settings [PC8] / [Desktop] / [IOS4] / [ISO6] / [ISO11] / [ISO15] / [ISO17] / [ISO21] / [ISO60] / [ISO69] / [ISOL1] / [ISOL2] / [ISOL5] / [ISOL6] / [ISOL9] / [Legal] / [Math8] / [MCText] / [MSPUBL] / [PC775] / [PC850] / [PC852] / [PC858] / [PC8DN] / [PC8TK] / [PC1004] / [Pi Font] / [PS math] / [PS Text] / [Roman 8] / [WIN30] / [WIN Balt] / [WINL1] / [WINL2] / [WINL5] / [ARABIC8] / [HPWARA] / [PC864ARA] / [HEBREW7] / [HEBREW8] / [ISOHEB] / [PC862HEB] / [ISOCYR] / [PC866CYR] / [WINCYR] / [PC866UKR] / [Greek 8] / [WINGRK] / [PC851GRK] / [PC8GRK] / [ISOGRK] Specify the symbol set used with the PCL language.[Admin Settings] 3-63 [Fax Settings] Specify the fax settings. For details on specifying the fax settings, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. [Maintenance Menu] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [XPS] Specify XPS settings. [Digital Signature] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable XPS digital signatures. [Enable]: XPS digital signatures are enabled. [Disable]: XPS digital signatures are disabled. [Print XPS Errors] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an error report is printed after an XPS error has occurred. [ON]: The error report is printed. [OFF]: The error report is not printed. Item Description [Print Menu] Specify settings for printing event logs and gradations. [Event Log] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the event log. [Halftone 64] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the halftone pattern using a 25% density for each CMYK color. [Cyan 64]/ [Magenta 64]/ [Yellow 64]/ [Black 64] [Halftone 128] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the halftone pattern using a 50% density for each CMYK color. [Cyan 128]/ [Magenta 128]/ [Yellow 128]/ [Black 128]3-64 [Admin Settings] [Halftone 256] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the halftone pattern using a 100% density for each CMYK color. [Cyan 256]/ [Magenta 256]/ [Yellow 256]/ [Black 256] [Gradation] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the gradation pattern. [Activity Report] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the communications activity report. [Scan Send Report Print] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the scanning operations activity report. [Scan Event Log] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the scanning event log. [Printer Adjustment] Specify various machine adjustments. [Leading Edge Adjustment] Adjust the top margin for various types of media. [Plain Paper] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of plain paper for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Thick 1] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of thick paper for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Thick 2] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of Thick 2 paper for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Envelope] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of envelopes for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Side Edge Adjustment] Adjust the left margin for media fed from each paper tray. [Tray1] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1 for simplex (single-sided) printing.[Admin Settings] 3-65 [Tray2] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2 for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Tray3] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3 for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Tray4] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4 for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Left ADJ Duplex] Adjust the left margin for media fed from each paper tray with duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray1] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray2] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray3] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray4] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [2nd Image Transfer Current] Adjust the 2nd image transfer current. [Simplex Pass] Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Plain Paper] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of plain paper. [Thick 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Thick 1 paper.3-66 [Admin Settings] [Thick 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Thick 2 paper. [Postcard] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of postcards. [Envelope] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of envelopes. [Label] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of labels. [Glossy 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Glossy 1 media. [Glossy 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Glossy 2 media. [Manual Duplex] Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Plain Paper] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of plain paper that has already been printed on. [Thick 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Thick 1 paper that has already been printed on. [Thick 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Thick 2 paper that has already been printed on.[Admin Settings] 3-67 [Postcard] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of postcards that has already been printed on. [Envelope] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of envelopes that has already been printed on. [Label] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of labels that has already been printed on. [Glossy 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Glossy 1 media that has already been printed on. [Glossy 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Glossy 2 media that has already been printed on. [Thick Paper Image Density] Adjust the density of images printed on thick paper. [Cyan] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of cyan for images printed on thick paper. [Magenta] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of magenta for images printed on thick paper. [Yellow] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of yellow for images printed on thick paper. [Black] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of black for images printed on thick paper. [Monochrome Density Adj.] Settings -2 to 2 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of printed images with grayscale printing.3-68 [Admin Settings] [Fine Line ADJ] Settings -3 to 2 (Default: 0) Adjust how fine lines are reproduced by changing the applied voltage (VC) to the electrostatic roller. [AIDC Mode] Settings [Mode 1] / [Mode 2] Select the AIDC operation mode. [Mode 1]: Standard mode [Mode 2]: Low mode [Thick Mode] Settings [Quality Mode] / [Speed Mode] In order to prevent toner from clogging within the developer unit as a result of it being driven at half-speed, select the timing for driving the developer unit at full speed for a fixed length of time when thick paper is being fed. [Quality Mode]: While printing on thick paper, printing is periodically paused, and the developer unit is driven at full speed for a fixed length of time. Since printing is paused, the quality is not affected; however, a standby time of approximately 70 seconds occurs every 400 seconds or so of half-speed operation. [Speed Mode]: While printing on thick paper, only the drive of the developer unit periodically switches to full speed for a fixed length of time. Since printing continues during full-speed drive, the print quality is slightly affected, however the standby time is short. [Engine DipSW] Change the DIP switches to control machine operation. [Engine DipSW 1] - [Engine DipSW 28] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Use to change engine settings. "Normally, there is no need to change the settings. If it becomes necessary to change the settings, do so according to the instructions from the service representative.[Admin Settings] 3-69 [Folder Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Main Scan Adjust] Adjust the scanning settings. [Main Scan Page] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Print the test pattern for fine adjustment of the color ratios in the main scanning direction. [Scan Adjust Value] Specify color adjustments for yellow, magenta and cyan. [Yellow] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the ratio of yellow in the main scanning direction. [Magenta] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the ratio of magenta in the main scanning direction. [Cyan] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the ratio of cyan in the main scanning direction. [Supplies] Reset the service life counters for various consumables. [Consumables Replace] [Transfer Belt Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No] Reset the transfer belt counter. [Transfer Roller Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No] Reset the transfer roller counter. [Fusing Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No] Reset the fuser unit counter. Item Description [Auto Del Interval] Settings [Erase Disabled] / [12 Hours] / [1 Day] / [2 Days] / [3 Days] / [7 Days] / [30 Days] Select the length of time until files saved on the hard disk are automatically deleted.3-70 [Admin Settings] [Security Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Auto Document Delete Time] Settings [Erase Disabled] / [12 Hours] / [1 Day] / [2 Days] / [3 Days] / [7 Days] / [30 Days] Select the length of time that files are saved on the hard disk. [Document Hold Setting] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not a file is deleted after it is retrieved. Item Description [Administrator Password] Settings [12345678] Change the administrator password. Specify the administrator password as a 0 to 8 digit number. "If password rules have been applied, an 8-digit password must be specified. "If the administrator password is incorrectly entered three times, machine operations are locked. If this occurs, turn the machine off, then on again. [Password] (top): Type in the current password. [Password] (bottom): Type in the new password. [Security Details] Specify detailed security settings to limit machine functions. Security can be enhanced if machine functions are limited. [Password Rules] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not password rules are applied. [Registering and Changing Addr.] Settings [Allow] / [Restrict] Select whether or not to prohibit editing of the address book. If [Restrict] is selected, the address book cannot be edited.[Admin Settings] 3-71 [Manual Destination Input] Settings [Allow] / [Restrict] Select whether or not to prohibit manual input of a destination. If [Restrict] is selected, destinations for fax and scan operations cannot be entered directly. [Hide Personal Data] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to display transmission destinations in the job log. If [ON] is selected, transmission destinations are not displayed. [Disable Job History Display] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to display the communication log. If [ON] is selected, the communication log is not displayed. [Restrict Scan to USB] Settings [Allow] / [Restrict] Select whether or not to prohibit the Scan to USB function. If [Restrict] is selected, the Scan to USB function cannot be used. [Enhanced Security Mode] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to apply enhanced security settings. If [ON] is selected, the enhanced security settings are applied. [HDD Settings] Check the capacity of the hard disk or delete data by overwriting. [Check HDD Capacity] Check the total capacity of the hard disk, the amount of space used and the amount of space available. [Overwrite All Data] Delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting it.3-72 [Admin Settings] [Mode] Settings [Mode 1] / [Mode 2] / [Mode 3] / [Mode 4] / [Mode 5] / [Mode 6] / [Mode 7] / [Mode 8] Select the method for overwriting the data on the hard disk. [Mode 1]: Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2]: Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 3]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Verified [Mode 4]: Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 5]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 6]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with specified 512-byte data [Mode 7]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa [Mode 8]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa Verified[Admin Settings] 3-73 [Execute] Press to delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting it, and then press [OK]. "Perform this operation when disposing of this machine. "While the data is being deleted by being overwritten, do not use the power switch to turn the machine off and on. "After the machine is restarted, all data is deleted by being overwritten. The following data is deleted. – Registered user and account data – Registered information for secured printing and saved files – Image files [SSD Low-level Format] Press to delete all data on the SSD by overwriting it, and then press [OK]. "Perform this operation when disposing of this machine. "While the data is being deleted by being overwritten, do not use the power switch to turn the machine off and on. "After the machine is restarted, all data is deleted by being overwritten. The following data is deleted. – Sent and received fax data – Address book (E-mail address and telephone number destination data) – S/MIME certificates – Image files3-74 [Admin Settings] Changing the administrator password The following procedure describes how to change the administrator password. 1 Press [Administrator Password]. 2 Press [Password] (top). 3 Type in the current administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Password] (bottom). 5 Type in the new administrator password, and then press [OK]. 6 Press [OK]. Limitations of the password rules If password rules have been applied, limitations are placed on certain passwords. Specified passwords must be changed to meet the conditions. Passwords regulated by the password rules – Administrator password – User passwords – Account passwords – Passwords for secure documents[Admin Settings] 3-75 Conditions of the password rules – Specify a password of 8 or more digits. – Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. – Half-width symbols are used. The use of symbols such as the quotation mark ("), plus sign (+) and spaces are limited with some settings. – A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be specified. – When changing the password, the same password as that before it is changed cannot be specified. Enhanced security settings If settings have been specified that are incompatible with the enhanced security settings, the enhanced security settings cannot be applied. The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after the enhanced security settings have been applied. Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to apply the enhanced security settings. Administrator mode parameters Required settings [Security Settings] - [Administrator Password] Specify a password that meets the conditions of the password rules. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [Authentication Setting] - [General Settings] - [User Authentication] Select [Device] or [External Server]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [PKI Settings] - [Device Certificate] Register a self-signed certificate in order to perform SSL communications. [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [SNMP Settings] - [SNMP v3 Settings] - [auth-password] Specify passwords for [auth-password] and [priv-password] that meet the conditions of the password rules. [SSL] in PageScope Web Connection Select [AES-256] or [AES-256, 3DES-168]. [S/MIME] in PageScope Web Connection Select [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192] or [AES-256].3-76 [Admin Settings] Changed settings For increased security, the following settings are set when enhanced security settings are applied. " A changed setting cannot be changed when [Enhanced Security Mode] is set to [OFF]. " If password rules have been applied, a password that does not meet the conditions of the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication. *1 Set to [AES/3DES] when [Enhanced Security Mode] is set to [OFF]. Administrator mode parameters Changed settings [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Password Rules] Set to [ON]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [Authentication Setting] - [General Settings] - [Public Access] Set to [Restrict]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [PKI Settings] - [SSL/ TLS Settings] - [SSL/TLS] Set to [Enable]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [PKI Settings] - [SSL/ TLS Settings] - [Encryption Strength] Set to [AES-256] or [AES-256, 3DES-168]. *1 [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [E-mail Settings] - [S/MIME] - [E-mail Text Encryption Method] Set to [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192] or [AES-256]. *1 [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [FTP Settings] - [FTP Server Settings] - [FTP Server] Set to [Disable]. [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [SNMP Settings] - [SNMP v1/v2c Settings] - [Write] Set to [Disable]. [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [SNMP Settings] - [SNMP v3 Settings] - [Write User Name] - [Security Level], [auth-password] and [priv-password] Set to [Auth-password/Priv-password]. [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Registering and Changing Addr.] Set to [Restrict].[Admin Settings] 3-77 [Restore Defaults] [HDD Format] Item Description [Restore Network] Resets the network settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the printer is automatically restarted. [Restore System] Resets the system settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the printer is automatically restarted. [Restore All] Resets all settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the printer is automatically restarted. Item Description [User Area (Print)] Initializes the user area (printing) of the hard disk. After the reformatting operation is finished, turn the machine off, then on again. [User Area (Scan)] Initializes the user area (scanning) of the hard disk. After the reformatting operation is finished, turn the machine off, then on again. [All] Initializes the hard disk. After the reformatting operation is finished, turn the machine off, then on again.3-78 [Admin Settings] [Paper Empty] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Restriction Code Settings] [Erase Job Log] Item Description [Tray 1] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 1 has run out of paper. [Tray 2] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 2 has run out of paper. [Tray 3] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 3 has run out of paper. [Tray 4] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 4 has run out of paper. Item Description Restriction Code Settings Displays the list of inhibited codes of the OpenAPI connection applications. [New]: Registers new inhibited codes for the Index Code, Vendor Code, and Application Code. Item Description Erase Job Log If [OK] is selected, Accounting Log, Counting Log and Audit Log are deleted.4Media Handling4-2 Print Media Print Media Specifications Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Copy Scan FAX Inch Millimeter Letter 8.5 × 11.0 215.9 × 279.4 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Letter Plus 8.5 × 12.69 215.9 × 322.3 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Government letter 8.0 × 10.5 203.2 × 266.7 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Legal 8.5 × 14.0 215.9 × 355.6 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Executive 7.25 × 10.5 184.2 × 266.7 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No Statement 5.5 × 8.5 139.7 × 215.9 1/2 No Yes Yes No 16 K 7.7 × 10.6 195.0 × 270.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No UK Quarto 8.0 × 10.0 203.2 × 254.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Foolscap 8.0 × 13.0 203.2 × 330.2 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Government Legal 8.5 × 13.0 215.9 × 330.2 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No Folio 8.25 × 13.0 210.0 × 330.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No 8 1/2 × 13 1/2 8.5 × 13.5 215.9 × 342.9 1/2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 1/8 × 13 1/4 8.125 × 13.25 206.4 × 336.6 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No A4 8.2 × 11.7 210.0 × 297.0 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 5.9 × 8.3 148.0 × 210.0 1/2 No Yes Yes No B5 (JIS) 7.2 × 10.1 182.0 × 257.0 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No A6 4.1 × 5.8 105.0 × 148.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No B6 5.0 × 7.2 128.0 × 182.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 4 × 6" 4.0 × 6.0 101.6 × 152.4 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 10 × 15 4.0 × 6.0 101.6 × 152.4 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Photo size E size 3.2 × 4.6 82.5 × 117.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size L size 3.5 × 5.0 89.0 × 127.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 9 × 13 3.5 × 5.1 90.0 × 130.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 13 × 18 5.1 × 7.1 130.0 × 180.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 3 × 5" 3.0 × 5.0 76.2 × 127.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 2 1/4 × 3 1/4" 2.25 × 3.29 57.1 × 82.5 - No Yes** Yes** No J-Postcard 3.9 × 5.8 100.0 × 148.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Double Postcard 5.8 × 7.9 148.0 × 200.0 1/2 No Yes Yes No B5 (ISO) 6.9 × 9.8 176.0 × 250.0 1 No Yes Yes No Envelope Com10 4.125 × 9.5 104.8 × 241.3 1 No No No No Envelope Monarch 7.5 × 3.875 190.5 × 98.4 1 No No No NoPrint Media 4-3 Envelope You #6 7.5 × 3.875 190.5 × 98.4 1 No No No No Envelope DL 8.7 × 4.3 220.0 × 110.0 1 No No No No Envelope C6 6.4 × 4.5 162.0 × 114.0 1 No No No No Envelope You #2 6.4 × 4.5 162.0 × 114.0 1 No No No No Envelope Chou #3 4.7 × 9.2 120.0 × 235.0 1 No No No No Envelope Chou #4 3.5 × 8.1 90.0 × 205.0 1 No No No No Kai 16 7.3 × 10.2 185.0 × 260.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Kai 32 5.1 × 7.3 130.0 × 185.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Custom, Minimum 3.6 - 8.5 × 5.8 - 14.0 92.0 - 216.0 × 148.0 - 356.0 1/2*** Yes**** Yes Yes Yes Custom, Maximum 7.2 - 8.5 × 10.0 - 14.0 182.0 - 216.0 × 254.0 - 356.0 1/2 Yes No No No Notes: *Tray 1 = Multipurpose Tray 3/4 = Plain paper only **Original glass only ***Numerical value input ****Only a size within the range 182.0 - 216.0 × 254.0 - 356.0 is allowed. Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Copy Scan FAX Inch Millimeter4-4 Print Media Types " Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. " Before printing a large number of copies on special paper (other than plain paper), perform a trial print to check the quality of the print result. Plain Paper (Recycled Paper) Use plain paper that is „ Suitable for plain paper printers and copiers, such as standard or recycled office paper. DO NOT use media that is „ Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper and colored paper that has been treated) „ Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-pressure paper, and heat-press transfer paper) „ Cold-water-transfer paper „ Pressure sensitive „ Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy film, and postcards) „ Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine „ Dusty „ Wet (or damp) Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the media weight Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the media weight Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the media weight Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2/3/4 Face up Driver Media Type Plain Paper (Recycled) Weight 60 to 90 g/m² Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.Print Media 4-5 " Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does not adhere well to moist or wet media. „ Layered „ Adhesive „ Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled „ Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn „ Too slick, too coarse, or too textured „ Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back „ Too thin or too thick „ Stuck together with static electricity „ Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous „ Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C [356°F]) „ Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles) „ Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons „ Acidic „ Any other media that is not approved Thick Stock Paper thicker than 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock. You can print continuously with thick stock. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Thick 1 (91–150 g/m²) Thick 2 (151–210 g/m²) Weight 91 to 210 g/m² Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.4-6 Print Media Envelope Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded. You can print continuously with envelope. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Use envelopes that are „ Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints, sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps " Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based glue avoids this problem. „ Approved for laser printing „ Dry DO NOT use envelopes that have „ Sticky flaps „ Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing „ Transparent windows „ Too rough of a surface „ Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes „ Been presealed Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2/3/4 Not supported Orientation Face down Driver Media Type Envelope Duplexing Not supportedPrint Media 4-7 Label A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and a carrier sheet: „ The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification. „ The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface. You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels. Use label sheets that are „ Recommended for laser printing DO NOT use label sheets that „ Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed „ Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive " Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media misfeeds to occur. Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Label Duplexing Not supported4-8 Print Media „ Are precut or perforated Letterhead You can print continuously with letterhead. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing letterhead. Postcard You can print continuously with postcard. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing postcards. Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their size and thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Letterhead Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Do not use OK to use Shiny backed paper Full-page labels (uncut)Print Media 4-9 Use postcards that are „ Approved for laser printing DO NOT use postcards that are „ Coated „ Designed for inkjet printers „ Precut or perforated „ Preprinted or multicolored " If the postcard is warped, press on the warped area before putting it in the tray 1/2. „ Folded or wrinkled Glossy Media You can print continuously with glossy media. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing glossy media. Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Postcard Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported4-10 Print Media Single Side Only Print on the single side only. You can print continuously with single side only paper. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Select this setting when paper that should not be used with double sided copying (for example, when on side has already been printed on) is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60–90 g/m². Use single side only paper that is „ Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office paper „ Plain paper that has been printed on with same printer DO NOT use single side only paper that is „ Not approved for use as plain paper Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Glossy 1 (100–128 g/m2 ) Glossy 2 (129–158 g/m2 ) Weight 100 to 158 g/m2 Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2/3/4 Face up Driver Media Type Single Side Only (60–90 g/m²) Weight 60–90 g/m² Duplexing Not supportedPrint Media 4-11 Special Paper You can print continuously with special paper. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Select this setting when special paper, for example, color high-quality paper (color paper), is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60–90 g/m². Use special paper that is „ Approved for laser printers DO NOT use special paper that is „ Not approved for use as plain paper Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2/3/4 Face up Driver Media Type Special Paper (60–90 g/m2 ) Weight 60–90 g/m² Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.4-12 Print Media Printable Area The printable area on all media sizes is up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges of the media. Each media size has a specific imageable area, the maximum area on which the printer can print clearly and without distortion. This area is subject to both hardware limits (the physical media size and the margins required by the printer) and software constraints (the amount of memory available for the full-page frame buffer). The guaranteed imageable (printable) area for all media sizes is the page size minus 4.2 mm (0.165") from all edges of the media. " When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations apply. z The printable area is 347.2 (13.7") mm from the leading edge of the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the leading edge.) z The bottom margin is 14.2 mm (0.56"). a a a a Printable Area a = 4.2 mm (0.165")Print Media 4-13 Envelopes Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs depending on the envelope type. " The envelope print orientation is determined by your application. Page Margins Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may lose part of your image (due to imageable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the imageable area for optimum results. a=4.2 mm (0.165") Non-printable area Non-guaranteed printable area Guaranteed printable area Front side (can be printed) Back side (cannot be printed) a a a a4-14 Loading Media Loading Media How do I load media? Note Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media misfeeds or machine trouble. Note Paper edges are sharp and may cause injuries. When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it with the new media, even the edges, then reload it. Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1, refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2. Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Open Tray 1.Loading Media 4-15 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 3 Press down on the center of the paper-lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs (white) lock into place. 4 Load the paper face down in the tray.4-16 Loading Media " Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the maximum limit guide. Up to 100 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5. Other Media When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (Envelope, Label, Letterhead, Thick 1, Thick 2, Glossy 1, Glossy 2, or Postcards) in the driver for optimum print quality.Loading Media 4-17 Loading Envelopes 1 Open Tray 1. 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 3 Press down on the center of the paper-lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs (white) lock into place.4-18 Loading Media 4 Load the envelopes flap side up in the tray. " Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a media misfeed may occur. " Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time. " For envelopes with the flap along the long edge (Envelope C6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope You #6, Envelope You #2, and Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap side up. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the envelopes.Loading Media 4-19 6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also. Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media 1 Open Tray 1. 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-20 Loading Media 3 Press down on the center of the paper-lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs (white) lock into place. 4 Load the media face down in the tray. " Up to 20 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the media. 6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.Loading Media 4-21 Tray 2 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Pull out Tray 2. 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-22 Loading Media 4 Turn the paper selection dial to select the size of paper to be loaded. 5 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load above the ▼ mark. Up to 250 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time.Loading Media 4-23 6 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 7 Close Tray 2. 8 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 2]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.4-24 Loading Media Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media 1 Pull out Tray 2. 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.Loading Media 4-25 4 Turn the paper selection dial to select the size of paper to be loaded. 5 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Up to 20 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time.4-26 Loading Media 6 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 7 Close Tray 2. 8 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 2]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.Loading Media 4-27 Tray 3/4 (Optional Lower Feeder Unit) Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Pull out Tray 3 or Tray 4. 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-28 Loading Media 4 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load above the ▼ mark. Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper.Loading Media 4-29 6 Close Tray 3 or Tray 4. 7 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 3]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.4-30 About Duplex Printing About Duplex Printing Duplex (double-sided) printing can be done with this printer, which has the duplex unit built in as a standard. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed data from one side of the page will show through to the other side. Check your application for margin information. For best results, print a small quantity to make sure the opacity is acceptable. Note Only plain paper, special paper and thick stock, 60–210 g/m2 can be autoduplexed. See “Types” on page 4-4. Duplexing envelopes, labels, letterheads, postcards, glossy media or single side only papers is not supported. How do I autoduplex? Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex (double-sided) printing. The following Binding Position settings are available. If [Long Edge (Left)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the left. If [Long Edge (Right)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the right. If [Short Edge (Top)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the top. 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 1 2 1About Duplex Printing 4-31 In addition, if [Booklet] is selected, autoduplex printing is performed. The following Order settings are available when [Booklet] is selected. 1 Load paper into the tray. 2 From the printer driver, specify duplex (double-sided) printing (Layout tab in Windows). 3 Click [OK]. " With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front side is printed. If [Long Edge (Bottom)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the bottom. If [Left Binding] is selected, the pages can be folded as a left-bound booklet. If [Right Binding] is selected, the pages can be folded as a right-bound booklet. 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1 1 24-32 Output Tray Output Tray All media is fed out facing down into the output tray of the machine. This tray has a capacity of approximately 250 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2 paper. " If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your machine may experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup. Media Storage 4-33 Media Storage „ Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up too much and cause misfeeding. „ If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface. „ Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat, and dust Store paper in a location with a temperature between 0 °C and 30 °C and humidity between 30% and 85%. „ Avoid leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position. Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 4-34 Original Media Original Media Specifications Documents that can be placed on the original glass The following types of documents can be placed on the original glass. Observe the following precautions when placing a document on the original glass. „ Do not place objects weighing more than 3 kg on the original glass; otherwise the glass may be damaged. „ Do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass; otherwise the original glass may be damaged. Documents that can be loaded into the ADF The following types of documents can be loaded into the ADF. Document type Sheets, books, three-dimensional object Document size Maximum size : Legal Copy and Scan : 30–216 × 30–356 mm Fax : 140–216 × 148–356 mm Weight Maximum weight : 3 kg Document media type / Weight Plain paper / 50 to 128 g/m² Document size Maximum size : Legal Mixed document sizes : Legal, Letter Copy and Scan : 140–216 × 148–356 mm (Single-sided/Double-sided) Fax : 140–216 × 148–1000 mm (Single-sided) 140–216 × 148–356 mm (Double-sided) Media capacity 50 sheets (media weight: 80 g/m2 )Original Media 4-35 Do not load the following types of documents into the ADF. „ Documents containing pages of different sizes „ Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn documents „ Highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper „ Coated documents such as carbon-backed paper „ Documents printed on paper thicker than 128 g/m² „ Documents with pages bound together with paper clips or staples „ Documents that are bound in a book or booklet „ Documents with pages bound together with glue „ Documents with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts „ Label sheets „ Offset printing masters „ Documents with binder holes4-36 Loading a Document Loading a Document Placing a document on the original glass 1 Lift to open the ADF cover. 2 Position the document on the original glass. " Align the document with the arrow on the left side toward the rear of the machine. DocumentLoading a Document 4-37 3 Gently close the ADF cover. Loading a document into the ADF 1 Put the document into the ADF document feed tray face up. " Before loading a document into the ADF, check that no document pages remain on the original glass. " Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Adjust the document guides to the document size. " For details on copying the loaded document, refer to “Performing Copy mode operations” on page 7-1. For details on scanning, refer to “Scanning From a Computer Application” on page 9-1. Document4-38 Loading a Document5Using the Printer Driver5-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you should “declare” the options in the driver. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000 1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows: – (Windows 7/Server 2008 R2) From the [Start] menu, choose [Devices and Printers] to display the [Devices and Printers] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Printer Properties]. – (Windows Vista/Server 2008) From the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], then [Hardware and Sound], and then click [Printers] to open the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Properties]. – (Windows XP/Server 2003) From the [Start] menu, choose [Printers and Faxes] to display the [Printers and Faxes] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Properties]. – (Windows 2000) From the [Start] menu, choose [Settings] and then [Printers] to display the [Printers] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Properties]. 2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip to step 9. 3 Select the [Configure] tab. 4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8. 5 Click the [Acquire Device Information] to automatically configure installed options.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 5-3 " The [Acquire Device Information] is available only if bi-directional communication is available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed out. If Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008 is being used, [Acquire Device Information] can also be clicked when the machine is connected via USB. 6 From the [Device Option] list, select an option, one at a time, and then select [Installed] or [None] from the [Setting] menu. 7 Click [Apply]. " Depending on the version of the operating system, [Apply] may not appear. If this is the case, continue with the next step. 8 Select the [General] tab. 9 Click [Printing Preferences]. Printing Preference dialog box appears. 10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, in the appropriate tabs. 11 Click [Apply]. 12 Click [OK] to exit from the Print preference dialog box. 13 Click [OK] to exit from the Properties dialog box.5-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000 1 Close all applications. 2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows: – (Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003) From the [Start] menu, choose [All programs], [KONICA MINOLTA], [bizhub C35], and then [Uninstall Printer Driver]. – (Windows 2000) From the [Start] menu, choose [Programs], [KONICA MINOLTA], [bizhub C35], and then [Uninstall Printer Driver]. 3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be deleted, and then click the [Uninstall] button. 4 Click [Uninstall]. 5 Click [OK], and restart your computer. 6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 5-5 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 1 From the [Start] menu, choose [Devices and Printers] to display the [Devices and Printers] directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Printing Preferences]. Windows Vista/Server 2008 1 From the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], then [Hardware and Sound], and then click [Printers] to open the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Printing Preferences]. Windows XP/Server 2003 1 From the [Start] menu, choose [Printers and Faxes] to display the [Printers and Faxes] directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Printing Preferences]. Windows 2000 1 From the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers] to display the [Printers] directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Printing Preferences].5-6 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver Common Buttons The buttons described below appear on each tab. [OK] Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made. [Cancel] Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made. [Apply] Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box. [Help] Click to view the help. [Favorite Setting] This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings, specify the desired settings, and then click [Add]. Specify the settings described below, and then click [OK]. „ [Name]: Type in the name of the settings to be saved. „ [Icon]: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings. The selected icon appears in the drop-down list. „ [Sharing]: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by other users logged onto the computer. „ [Comment]: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved. Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To change the registered setting, click [Edit]. In addition, predefined settings can be selected. The predefined settings are those for [2 in 1], [Photo] and [Gray Scale]. Select [Default Setting] from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all tabs to their default values.Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-7 [Printer View] Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Paper View] button (when a tab other than the [Quality] tab is selected) or the [Quality View] button (when the [Quality] tab is selected). " This button does not appear on the [Advanced] tab. [Paper View] Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Printer View] button. " This button does not appear on the [Quality] tab. [Quality View] Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the [Quality] tab. When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Printer View] button. " This button appears only when the [Quality] tab is selected. [Printer Information] Click this button to start up PageScope Web Connection. " This button is available only if a network connection has been established. [Default] Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults. " This button does not appear on the [Advanced] tab. " When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed. [Advanced] Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only) The [Advanced] Tab allows you to „ Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing functions (such as booklet printing)5-8 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver „ Specify the PostScript output method „ Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed „ Print a mirror image „ Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data [My Tab] [My Tab] allows you to „ Display the most frequently used functions (from each tab) whose settings are often changed „ Add or remove displayed functions by clicking [Edit My Tab]. In addition, functions can be added to [My Tab] by right-clicking them on their original tabs. [Basic] Tab The [Basic] Tab allows you to „ Specify the orientation of the media „ Specify the size of the original document „ Select the output media size „ Zoom (expand/reduce) documents „ Specify the paper tray „ Specify the type of media „ Specify the number of copies „ Turn on/off job collation „ Save a print job on the printer and print it later (Job Retention) „ Save a confidential job on the printer and protect it with a password „ Print a single copy for proofing „ Specify user authentication and account track settings „ Print on the back side of paper that has already been printed on " Use paper that has been printed on with this printer. In addition, the page printed with this setting is not guaranteed. " Do not use the following types of paper. - Paper that has been printed on with an inkjet printer - Paper that has been printed on with a monochrome/color laser printer/copier - Paper that has been printed on with any other printer or fax machineUsing the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-9 " To display a list of jobs saved with a [Job Retention] setting, press [USB/HDD] in the home screen, and then press [Proof Print]. Print the document by selecting the job in the list. The password must be entered if one has been specified for the job. [Layout] Tab The [Layout] Tab allows you to „ Print several pages of a document on the same page (N in 1 printing) „ Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer driver only) „ Rotate the print image 180 degrees „ Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Specify duplex (double-sided) printing „ Specify booklet printing „ Specify binding position „ Adjust the binding margin „ Specify the position on the paper where the document is to be printed (PCL printer driver only) [Cover Mode] Tab The [Cover Mode] Tab allows you to „ Print front and back cover pages and separator pages „ Specify the tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover pages and separator pages [Stamp/Composition] Tab " Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form. In addition, if settings have been specified for [N in 1] or [Booklet] in the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the specified settings. The settings in the Watermark function of the [Stamp/Composition] tab allows you to „ Select the watermark to be used „ Create, edit or delete watermarks „ Adjust the watermark position5-10 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver „ Print a frame around watermarks „ Print transparent (shaded) watermarks „ Print the watermark on only the first page „ Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages The [Copy Protect] function prevents unauthorized copying. „ The document is printed with the specified text or pattern in the background. The background pattern is normally inconspicuous, but becomes visible when the document is copied. (PCL printer driver only) The settings in the Overlay function of the [Stamp/Composition] tab allows you to „ Select the form to use „ Add or delete overlay files „ Launch Download Manager to download a form (PostScript printer driver only) " Download Manager Application should be installed earlier. „ Create a form (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Display the form information (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Print the form on [All Pages], [1st Page Only], [Even Page] and [Odd Page] „ Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL and XPS printer driver only) [Quality] Tab The [Quality] Tab allows you to „ Switch between color and grayscale printing „ Control the darkness of an image (Brightness) „ Specify the printer color settings „ Perform color separation „ Select whether or not economy printing is used „ Set the edge strength to [Low], [Middle] or [High] „ Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded (PCL and Postscript printer driver only)Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-11 „ Print using the printer’s fonts (PCL and Postscript printer driver only) „ Control the tones of an image (Contrast) (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only) „ Select whether or not Auto Trapping function is used (Postscript printer driver only) „ Specify the Black Over Print function (Postscript printer driver only) [Other] Tab The [Other] Tab allows you to „ Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing (32bit printer driver only) „ Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not hide overlay files (32bit PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Send a notification by E-mail when printing is finished „ Shows the version information for the printer driver „ Prevent loss when printing fine lines (PCL printer driver only) Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions. „ Server and client combinations Server: Windows Server 2008 R2/Server 2008/Server 2003 Client: Windows 7/Vista/XP/2000 „ Functions with limitations applied Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover, Back Cover, Separator Page, Create Overlay File, Print in Overlay, Watermark *JOBNAME, USERNAME, and HOSTNAME output of PJL5-12 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver6Proof Print, External memory and ID & Print functions6-2 Proof Print Proof Print Print jobs saved on hard disk can be printed or deleted. " If [Store Job], [Print and Hold], [Secured Job], [Secured Job(Encryption)] or [Proof then Print] was selected for [Job Retention] in the printer driver, the job file is saved on the hard disk. Printing a job saved on the hard disk 1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 2 Press [Proof Print]. 3 Select a user. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Select the job to be printed. 6 Press [Print]. " If the job was saved with the [Secured Job] or [Secured Job(Encryption)] setting, type in the password. 7 Type in the number of copies to be printed, and then press [OK]. Deleting a job saved on the hard disk 1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 2 Press [Proof Print]. 3 Select a user. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Select the job to be deleted. 6 Press [Delete]. " If the job was saved with the [Secured Job] or [Secured Job(Encryption)] setting, type in the password. 7 Press [Yes], and then press [OK].External Memory 6-3 External Memory PDF, XPS, JPEG and TIFF files saved on USB memory devices can be printed by plugging the USB memory device into the machine. Printing from a connected USB memory device 1 Plug the USB memory device into the USB HOST port. appears at the bottom of the screen. 2 In the home screen, press [USB/ HDD]. 3 Press [External Memory]. 4 Press [File List]. 5 Select the file to be printed. If the file to be printed is in a folder, select the folder, and then press [Open]. To return to the folder containing the one that is currently displayed, press [Up]. " At each folder level, a maximum of 99 folders and files can be displayed. " The names of folders are displayed given priority over the names of files. " A maximum of eight folder levels can be displayed. " If JPEG and TIFF files are not displayed, select the file type with [File Type]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Specify the print settings. 8 Press [Print]. " Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB HOST port during printing.6-4 ID & Print Selecting the type of files to be displayed 1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 2 Press [External Memory]. 3 Press [File Type]. 4 Select the type of files to be displayed. 5 Press [OK]. ID & Print If a job is printed on this machine with user authentication through the printer driver using the registered user or public user privilege, it is saved as an ID & Print job on the hard disk of this machine. " When using batch printing for an ID & Print job, the copying cannot be interrupted. Printing simultaneously with log-in 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Begin Printing]. 3 Press [Login]. The user is authenticated and printing starts. Specifying a job to print 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Access Basic Screen]. 3 Press [Login]. This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen. 4 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 5 Press [ID & Print]. 6 Select [Login User] or [Public User] as the user who sends a job. 7 Select the job to be printed. 8 Press [Print].ID & Print 6-5 Deleting a job 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Access Basic Screen]. 3 Press [Login]. This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen. 4 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 5 Press [ID & Print]. 6 Select [Login User] or [Public User] as the user who sends a job. 7 Select the job to be deleted. 8 Press [Delete]. 9 Press [Yes], and then press [OK].6-6 ID & Print7Performing Copy mode operations7-2 Basic copy operation Basic copy operation The general procedure for making copies is described below. 1 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 2 In the home screen, press [Copy]. " When the [Start (Color)] or [Start (B&W)] key is pressed in the home screen, the job can be copied with the defaults. 3 Specify the desired copy settings. " For details on specifying document size settings, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4. For details on specifying paper size settings, refer to “[Paper]” on page 7-5. For details on specifying zoom ratio settings, refer to “[Zoom]” on page 7-6. For details on specifying double-sided copy settings, refer to “[Duplex/ Combine]” on page 7-7. For details on specifying density settings, refer to “[Density]” on page 7-8. For details on specifying document type settings, refer to “[Original Basic copy operation 7-3 Type]” on page 7-9. For details on specifying color settings, refer to “[Color Mode]” on page 7-9. For details on specifying Finishing settings, refer to “[Finishing]” on page 7-10. For details on performing the Proof Copy operation, refer to “[Proof Copy]” on page 7-10. For details on performing the Separate Scan operation, refer to “[Separate Scan]” on page 7-11. For details on performing the ID Copy operation, refer to “[ID Copy]” on page 7-13. For details on specifying a binding margin, refer to “[Paper Margin]” on page 7-14. For details on adjusting the image quality, refer to “[Image Quality]” on page 7-15. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. " If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key, and then type in the correct number of copies. 5 To make a color copy, press the [Start (Color)] key. To make a black-and-white copy, press the [Start (B&W)] key. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4. " When sorting or making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, press [Finish] after all pages of the document have been scanned. " A screen showing the scanned document appears after the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key is pressed. Check that the document was scanned as desired. [Number Of Originals]: Number of scanned document pages [Number Of Sets]: Number of scanned copies/specified number of copies [Printed/TTL Pgs]: Number of copy pages printed/total number of pages to be printed (Does not appear during a Separate Scan operation.) " For details on interrupted printing (Interrupt Mode), refer to “Interrupting a copy job” on page 8-2.7-4 [Original Size] " For details on copying using stored settings, refer to “Copy programs” on page 8-3. " A document containing pages of different sizes can be loaded into the ADF. For details on copying documents with pages of different sizes, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4. [Original Size] The document size can be specified. Documents of mixed page sizes A document containing pages of different sizes (Letter and Legal) can be loaded into the ADF. Each document page will be copied onto paper of the same size as the original. " Load all document pages so that they are aligned on the left side of the ADF. Item Description [Standard Size] Select the size of the document. Select [Letter/Legal] to copy a document containing different page sizes. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches and 8.50 inches).[Paper] 7-5 [Paper] The size and type of the paper to be printed on can be selected, and the size and type settings for the paper loaded into each paper tray can be changed. The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document size or it can be specified manually. " For details on the paper types and sizes, refer to “Print Media” on page 4-2. " When paper is loaded in the bypass tray, the [Paper] screen appears while the bypass tray (tray 1) is selected automatically. Item Description [1]-[4] Manually select the paper tray. [3] and [4] are available if the optional lower feeder units have been installed. [Auto] The paper is selected automatically according to the size of the original document. [Change Tray Set] Specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the selected paper tray. [Paper Size] Specify the paper size. [Standard Size] Select the paper size. [Custom Size] Enter the size of the paper. [Paper Type] Select the paper type.7-6 [Zoom] [Zoom] The image size for the document can be enlarged or reduced. Item Description [+]/[-] Specify the zoom ratio of the copy (25.0% to 400.0%). With documents loaded into the ADF, the zoom ratio can be set between 25% and 200%. [Set Zoom] The various preset zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the [Minimal] setting can be changed. The zoom ratios can be set between 25.0% and 200.0%. Zoom settings Select a preset zoom ratio or a programmed zoom ratio. [Auto]: Select this setting for the most appropriate zoom ratio to be automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. [Full Size]: Select this setting to produce a copy that is the same size as the document (100.0%). [Manual]: Press [+] or [-] to enter a custom zoom ratio. [Minimal]: Select this setting to print a copy of the document image so that it is slightly smaller than the original document size.[Duplex/Combine] 7-7 [Duplex/Combine] Whether the scanned document and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides can be specified. In addition, document images of multiple pages (2 or 4 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page. Item Description [Duplex] Select whether simplex (single-sided) or duplex (double-sided) copies are to be printed. [1 > 1]: Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided documents. [1>2]: Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided documents. [2>1]: Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided document. [2 > 2]: Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided documents. [Combine] Select whether to make combined copies. [No]: Select this setting to not produce combined copies. [2 in 1]: Select this setting to copy two document pages onto one page. [4 in 1 Horizontal]: Select this setting to copy four document pages onto one page. The document images will be arranged horizontally. [4 in 1 Vertical]: Select this setting to copy four document pages onto one page. The document images will be arranged vertically.7-8 [Density] [Density] Specify the copy density. [Binding Position] Specify the binding positions for the document and the copies. [Orig. Binding Position] Select [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top Bind] or [Auto] as the binding position for the document. If the binding position for the document is set to [Auto], the binding position is set at the left or at the top. [Output Binding Position] Select [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top Bind] or [Auto] as the binding position for the copies. If the binding position for the copy is set to [Auto], the binding position is set at the left or at the top. [Original Direction] Select [Top], [Bottom], [Left] or [Right] as the orientation of the document loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass. Item Description [+]/[-] Adjust the copy density to one of nine levels. [Standard] Select this setting to return the copy density to the standard setting. Item Description[Original Type] 7-9 [Original Type] Select the document quality (text or image documents). [Color Mode] Specify the printing color used for copies. Copies will be printed with the specified Color setting when the [Start (Color)] key is pressed. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when copying documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when copying documents containing both text and photos. Black text, color text and shading are automatically recognized, and the most appropriate image processing is performed. In addition, processing appropriate for printed photo documents will be applied to any photos. [Photo] Select this setting when copying documents containing printed photos. Item Description [Auto] Select this setting to detect whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white, then automatically print copies in either color or black and white. [Full Color] Select this setting to print the copy in full color, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white.7-10 [Finishing] [Finishing] Specify any settings for finishing outputted copies. [Proof Copy] Before printing a large number of copies, a single finished proof copy can be printed in order to be checked. Select whether or not to print a proof copy. Proof Copy operation " When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Specify the copy settings. 4 Press [Proof Copy]. Item Description [Sort] Select this setting when making multiple copies of documents containing multiple pages so that they will be automatically separated into sets of the full document. [Group] Select this setting when making multiple copies of documents containing multiple pages so that they will be automatically separated into sets of each page. [Auto] Select this option to automatically switch between [Sort] and [Group] depending on the number of printable sheets per copy. [Group] is set when printing a single sheet in the 1-sided or 2-sided mode, and [Sort] is set when printing multiple sheets. Item Description [ON] Select this setting to print a proof copy. [OFF] Select this setting to not print a proof copy.[Separate Scan] 7-11 5 Press [ON]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. A single proof copy is printed. 8 Check the proof copy. If the proof copy was printed as desired, continue with step 9. " Using the keypad, the number of copies can be changed. " To print another proof copy, press [Proof Copy]. " To change the settings, press [Cancel], and then perform steps 2 through 8. 9 Press [Print]. The remaining number of copies is printed. [Separate Scan] The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF, and then the scanned pages can be treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. Item Description [ON] Select this setting to perform a Separate Scan operation. [OFF] Select this setting to not perform a Separate Scan operation.7-12 [Separate Scan] Scanning the document in separate batches " Do not load more pages into the ADF than the maximum number of pages allowed, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. " When sorting or making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, instead of using the Separate Scan operation, the document can be scanned as a multiple-page document. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Specify the copy settings. 4 Press [Separate Scan]. 5 Press [ON]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the document begins. " To change the scanning settings, press [Change Settings]. 8 Position the next document page or pages, and then press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the document begins. 9 Repeat step 7 until all document pages have been scanned. 10 After all document pages have been scanned, press [Finish].[ID Copy] 7-13 [ID Copy] The back and front of a card, such as an insurance card, driver’s license or business card, can be scanned separately and printed together on a single page. " With the ID Copy operation, the zoom ratio is set to 100%. " The paper sizes that are available for copying are Letter, Legal and A4. " The card can only be placed on the original glass. Position the card to be scanned aligned at the upper-left corner of the original glass. Since the image is printed 4 mm from the top and left side, reposition the card as necessary 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the card, front side down, on the original glass. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36. 3 Specify the copy settings. 4 Press [ID Copy]. 5 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the front side begins. 6 Position the card, back side down, at the same location on the original glass. " To copy only the front side, press [Print]. 7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the back side begins. The copy is fed out. A B7-14 [Paper Margin] [Paper Margin] Copies can be printed with a binding margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders. " If part of the image is lost due to the binding margin setting, reduce the zoom ratio before printing copies. Item Description [+]/[-] Specify the width of the binding margin between 0.1 mm and 20.0 mm (0.001 inches and 0.787 inches). [None] Select this setting to leave no binding margin.[Image Quality] 7-15 [Image Quality] The quality can be adjusted for the document to be scanned. Item Description [Background removal] Adjust the background density when copying documents with a colored background (such as newspapers or recycled paper) or thin documents where the back side is visible from the front side. Adjust the background density to one of nine levels. Select a setting in the + direction to darken the background, or select a setting in the - direction to lighten the background. Press [Standard] to return the density to the standard setting. [Contrast] The image can be adjusted to make it softer or sharper. Adjust the contrast to one of nine levels. Select a setting in the + direction to make the image sharper, or select a setting in the - direction to make the image softer. Press [Std.] to return the contrast to the standard setting. [Sharpness] The sharpness of text and image outlines can be adjusted. Adjust the sharpness to one of seven levels. Select a setting in the + direction to increase the sharpness, or select a setting in the - direction to decrease the sharpness. Press [Std.] to return the sharpness to the standard setting.7-16 [Image Quality]8Additional copy operations8-2 Interrupting a copy job Interrupting a copy job The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy. " The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while a document is being scanned. " When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, the copy settings return to their defaults. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green, and printing of the current job stops. 4 Specify the copy settings. 5 To make a color copy, press the [Start (Color)] key. To make a black-and-white copy, press the [Start (B&W)] key. 6 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off, and Interrupt mode is canceled. Printing of the job that was interrupted continues.Copy programs 8-3 Copy programs Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled later. Storing a copy program " A maximum of 15 copy programs can be stored. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Specify the copy settings. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The copy programs screen appear. 4 Press [Register]. 5 Press [Name]. 6 Type in the name of the copy program, and then press [OK]. " For details on entering text, refer to “Entering text” on page A-8. 7 Press [OK]. 8 Press [Cancel]. The initial Copy mode screen appears again. Deleting a copy program 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The copy programs screen appear. 3 Select the copy program to be deleted. 4 Press [Delete]. 5 Press [Yes]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Press [Cancel]. The initial Copy mode screen appears again.8-4 Copy programs Copying using stored settings (copy programs) 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The copy programs screen appear. 4 Select the copy program to be recalled. 5 Press [Detail]. The settings screen appears. 6 Check the copy settings stored with the selected copy program. 7 Press [Close]. 8 Press [OK]. The initial Copy mode screen appears again. 9 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.9Scanning From a Computer Application9-2 Basic Scanning Operation Basic Scanning Operation Documents can be scanned from a computer connected to this machine via a network. Scanning settings can be specified and the scanning operation can be performed from TWAIN- or WIA-compatible applications. From the scanner driver, a preview can be displayed and various adjustments, such as the size of the scan area, can be specified. " For details on the installation of the scanner driver or network TWAIN settings, refer to the Installation Guide on the Documentation CD/ DVD. 1 Position the document to be scanned. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 2 Start the application to be used for scanning. 3 Start the scanner driver according to the application settings. 4 Specify the necessary scanner driver settings. 5 Click the [Scan] button in the scanner driver.Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9-3 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings Mode settings „ [Mode Settings] Select [Basic Mode] for specifying basic settings, or select [Advanced Mode] for specifying detailed settings. The settings that can be specified differ for each mode. When [Basic Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Basic Mode] is selected. „ [Help] icon Click to display Help information. „ [About] icon Click to display the software version information. „ [Scan Objective] Specify the document type. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type. „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Auto Color Adjustment] Specify the auto color adjustment settings. „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. When scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.9-4 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected.) „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. When [Advanced Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Advanced Mode] is selected. „ [Load] Specify a saved settings file (dat file) for scanning. „ [Save] Save the current settings as a settings file (dat file). „ [Default] Return all settings to their defaults. „ [Help icon] Click to display the Help. „ [About icon] Click to display the software version information. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. With scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type.Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9-5 „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Scale] Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area. " If the resolution is set at 1200 × 1200dpi or higher, a setting larger than 100% cannot be specified. „ Scanning Mode Select [Auto] or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, a tab appears so that detailed settings can be specified, for example, for [Brightness/Contrast], [Filter], [Curves], [Levels], [Color Balance], and [Hue/Saturation]. " The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning mode that is selected. " The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting selected for [Scan Type]. " If [Auto] is selected as the scanning mode, scanning from the original glass is performed after a prescan is performed so that a preview image can be checked. „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned. " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected) „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [AutoCrop] icon Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview image.9-6 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings „ [Zoom Prescan] icon Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit the window. „ [Mirror] icon Click to display a mirror image of the preview image. „ [Tone Reversal] icon Click to reverse the colors of the preview image. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. „ [Preview] window Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area. „ [Before (RGB)]/[After] Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the pointer’s position before and after adjustments. „ [Width]/[Height] Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measurement units.Windows WIA Driver Settings 9-7 Windows WIA Driver Settings „ [Paper source] Select the paper source. „ [Color picture] Select this setting when scanning in color. „ [Grayscale picture] Select this setting when scanning in grayscale. „ [Black and white picture or text] Select this setting when scanning in black and white. „ [Custom Settings] Select this setting when scanning with [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture] settings applied. " If settings have been specified with [Adjust the quality of the canned picture], [Custom Settings] is automatically selected. „ [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture] Click this message to display the Advanced Properties dialog box. In the Advanced Properties dialog box, settings can be specified for [Brightness], [Contrast], [Resolution(DPI)], and [Picture type] (select from color, grayscale or black and white). " These settings are applied when [Custom Settings] is selected. „ [Page size] Specify the paper size when [Page source] is set to [Document Feeder]. „ Preview window Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area. „ [Preview] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [Cancel] Click to close the WIA driver window.9-8 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings Mode settings „ [Mode Settings] Select [Basic Mode] for specifying basic settings, or select [Advanced Mode] for specifying detailed settings. The settings that can be specified differ for each mode. When [Basic Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Basic Mode] is selected. „ [Help] icon Click to display Help information. „ [About] icon Click to display the software version information. „ [Scan Objective] Specify the document type. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type. „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Auto Color Adjustment] Specify the auto color adjustment settings. „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. When scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9-9 " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected.) „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. When [Advanced Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Advances Mode] is selected. „ [Load] Specify a saved settings file (dat file) for scanning. „ [Save] Save the current settings as a settings file (dat file). „ [Default] Return all settings to their defaults. „ Help icon Click to display the Help. „ About icon Click to display the software version information. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. With scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type.9-10 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Scale] Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area. " If the resolution is set at 1200 × 1200dpi or higher, a setting larger than 100% cannot be specified. „ [Scanning Mode] Select [Auto] or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, a tab appears so that detailed settings can be specified, for example, for [Brightness/Contrast], [Filter], [Curves], [Levels], [Color Balance], and [Hue/Saturation]. " The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning mode that is selected. " The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting selected for [Scan Type]. " If [Auto] is selected as the scanning mode, scanning from the original glass is performed after a prescan is performed so that a preview image can be checked. „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned. " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected) „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [AutoCrop] icon Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview image.Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9-11 „ [Zoom Prescan] icon Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit the window. „ [Mirror] icon Click to display a mirror image of the preview image. „ [Tone Reversal] icon Click to reverse the colors of the preview image. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. „ Preview window Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area. „ [Before (RGB)]/[After] Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the pointer’s position before and after adjustments. „ [Width]/[Height] Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measurement units.9-12 Using a Web Service Using a Web Service The scan command can be sent from a computer (Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008) on the network or this machine can scan using a specified operation, and the scan data can be sent to a computer. The settings that must be specified in advance on the computer are described below. Settings required to use a Web Service The following settings are required in order to use a Web Service. „ Install this machine on the computer. „ Specify settings on the machine for using a Web Service. " Specify the Web Service settings on the machine from the Admin Settings screen. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Installing this machine on the computer Confirmation before installation Before installation, make sure that “Network Discovery” (Network and Sharing Center in Control Panel) is enabled. Installation procedure 1 In the Start button menu, click “Network”. The devices connected to the network appear. 2 Right-click the scanner icon for this machine, and then click “Install”. – Depending on the settings specified on the computer, a UAC (User Account Control) message may appear. Check the information described in the message, and then continue with the procedure. – If both scanning and printing using a Web Service have been enabled on this machine, this machine appears as a printer icon. – The driver software is automatically installed. After a confirmation message appears, click [Close]. 3 From the control panel of the machine, select [Scan to Folder] - [Direct Input] - [Web Service Settings], and then check that a destination appears.Using a Web Service 9-13 Specifying the scan command from a computer (Web Service) A computer can send the scan command to this machine, then receive the scan data. As an example, the procedure for scanning from the Windows Photo Gallery is described below. " The scan command can also be sent from this machine, where the data will be saved. For details, refer to “With [Web Service Settings]” on page 10-32. Specifying the scan command from a computer 1 Start up the application used for scanning. 2 In the “File” menu, click “From Scanner or Camera”. 3 From the “Select Device” list, select this machine, and then click [OK]. The New Scan window appears. 4 Position the document on this machine. – Specify the scan settings, and then click [Scan]. Scanning begins, and the scan data is added to the list of image files.9-14 Using a Web Service10 1Scanning with the machine10-2 Initial settings Initial settings This machine is equipped with scanning functions for saving data on this machine’s hard disk or on a USB memory device, and with network scanning functions for sending scanned image data through the network with E-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions, WebDAV transmissions and Web Service transmissions. „ In order to perform an FTP transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [FTP] screens. „ In order to perform an SMB transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [SMB] screens. „ In order to perform a WebDAV transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [WebDAV] screens. „ In order to perform a Web Service transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [WSD Print] screens. „ In order to perform an E-mail transmission, a connection to the network is required, parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [SMTP] screens, and an E-mail address must be registered for [Administrator Registration]. „ For details on specifying network settings, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Useful functions „ The destinations (recipients) for scan data can be registered as address book destinations or group destinations. „ The destination and scan settings can be registered together as a single program. This is convenient for frequently scanning documents and sending data under the same conditions.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-3 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations Basic Scan to E-mail operation The basic procedure for the Scan to E-mail operation, which sends scan data with an E-mail transmission, is described below. 1 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. " If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON] so that the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-5. " To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send them as combined scan data, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON]. For details on [Separate Scan], refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-5. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 10-14. – In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Mode Check] to check or change the specified destinations. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Settings] screen. – For details on the [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 10-4. – For details on the [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 10-8. – For details on the [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings” on page 10-12.10-4 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 10-5. " If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned, scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. Specifying document settings The [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify document settings. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used. Item Description [1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided document. [2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document. [Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document with a cover page. Only the front side of the cover page will be scanned, and then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-5 [Original Size] Specify the size of the document that is to be sent. [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] A document can be divided and scanned separately. The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages, and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document. 1 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. 2 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen. 3 With [Original Settings] in the [Settings] screen, set [Separate Scan] to [ON]. 4 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned. 5 Place the next document page on the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned. 6 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish]. Item Description [Standard Size] Select the size of the document. Select [Letter/Legal] to scan a document containing different page sizes. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches and 8.50 inches).10-6 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations [Original Settings] - [Original Direction] Specify the orientation of the document. [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position] Specify the binding position when scanning a double-sided document using the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left. Item Description [Top] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the top. [Bottom] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the bottom. [Left] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the left (at the right when placed on the original glass). [Right] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the right (at the left when placed on the original glass). Item Description [Left Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the left. [Top Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the top. [Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position. If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm (11.69 inches), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-7 [Color Mode] Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white. " [Black] may not be available, depending on the setting selected for [File Type]. [Original Type] Select the appropriate image quality setting according to content of the document. Item Description [Color] [Auto] Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting. [Full Color] Select this setting to scan in full color. [Monochrome] [Gray Scale] Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos. [Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos.10-8 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations Specifying scan settings The [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify scan settings. [Background/Density] Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document. [Resolution] Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned. " A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. Item Description [Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned. Nine density levels are available for the background color. [Density] Select the density at which the document is to be scanned. Nine density levels are available. Select the appropriate density setting according to your document. [Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness, select a setting in the + direction. Seven sharpness levels are available. Item Description [150×150dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 150 × 150 dpi. [200×200dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 200 × 200 dpi. [300×300dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 300 × 300 dpi. [600×600dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 600 × 600 dpi.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-9 [File Settings] - [File Type] Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. " The [File Type] parameter may not be available, depending on the settings selected for [Color Mode] and [Resolution]. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. [File Settings] - [Scan Setting] Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi-page data is created when multiple pages are scanned. Item Description [PDF] Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. [Compact PDF] Select this setting to save the data compressed more than with the PDF format. [TIFF] Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. [JPEG] Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. [XPS] Select this setting to save data in the XPS format. Item Description [Single Page] Select this setting to save the data divided into individual pages. [Multi Page] Select this setting to save the scan as multi-page data.10-10 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt] Specify the encryption settings when [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected. Item Description [Encryption Level] [Yes] Select this setting to enable encryption. After selecting this setting, set the encryption level to [Low], [Middle] or [High]. [No] Select this setting to disable encryption. [Password] Type in the password required to open encrypted data. (up to 32 characters) [Document Permissions] Type in the password required to change the permissions for a document. (up to 32 characters)Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-11 [Details] If encryption has been enabled, detailed permission settings can be specified. "This appears only if [Encryption Level] is set to [Yes] and a password has been specified for [Document Permissions]. [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow the data to be printed ([Allow]), to prohibit printing ([Restrict]), or to allow printing only at a low resolution ([Low Resolution]). [Changes Allowed] Select whether to allow or prohibit document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data, and select the permission level if it is allowed. [Level 1]: Pages can be inserted, deleted and rotated. [Level 2]: Annotations can be created, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 3]: All operations, except page extracting, can be performed. [Level 4]: Data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 5]: The page layout can be changed, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. "Levels 1, 2, 3 and 5 appear only when [Encryption Level] is set to [Low]. Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 appear when [Encryption Level] is set to [Middle] or [High]. [Enable Copying] Select whether to allow text and images in a document to be copied ([Allow]) or to prohibit it ([Restrict]). Item Description10-12 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations Specifying communication settings The [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify settings for E-mail transmissions. [Binary Division] Select whether or not transmission data is divided. [E-mail Encryption] [Send Use Signature] Item Description [ON] Select this setting to divide transmission data. [OFF] Select this setting to not divide transmission data. [Admin. Setting] The setting specified with [Admin Settings] - [Ethernet] - [Binary Division] is given priority. Description Settings [ON] / [OFF] Specify settings for E-mail encryption. Description Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a digital signature is applied to E-mail messages.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-13 [E-mail] Specify the subject and address of E-mail messages. Item Description [File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data. [Subject] Type in the subject for E-mail messages. [From] Specify the sender’s address. Select [Administrator E-mail Addr.] or [User Address], or type it in directly. [Body] Type in the body text for the E-mail message.10-14 Specifying destinations Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations. „ “Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27 „ “Directly typing in the address” on page 10-29 „ “Selecting from the log” on page 10-32 Selecting from registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine. " In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 10-34. " In [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Scan to E-mail Default Tab], you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to E-mail mode screen. For details, refer to “[Machine Settings]” on page 3-13. Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites]. As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen is displayed. Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. " The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35.Specifying destinations 10-15 Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press . 2 Press the desired index tab to search for destinations. – If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the desired tab appears. – To select a group destination, press [Group]. 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press . 2 Press [Search]. 3 Select the method to search for destinations. – [Type]: Select the destination type (“Fax”, “E-mail”, etc.). – [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for. Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a list of the search results. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations, select all destinations where the data is to be sent. 5 Press [OK].10-16 Specifying destinations Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type in the address. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [E-mail]. 3 Type in the E-mail address. 4 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Log]. 2 Select the destination from the list, and then press the [Start] key. " Only one destination can be selected from the log. " The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after pressing [Direct Input]. In addition, destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not appear in the log. " When the machine is turned off, the log is cleared. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log.Specifying destinations 10-17 Selecting a program destination Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the machine. Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is frequently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings. " In order to select a program destination, the program destination must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 10-37. 1 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen” on page 2-9. 2 Position the document to be scanned. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK]. The settings and destination addresses are recalled. " Only one program destination can be selected. 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white.10-18 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Basic Scan to Folder operation The basic procedure for the Scan to Folder operation, which sends scan data to the machine’s hard disk, a USB memory device or to a folder on the network, is described below. 1 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. " If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON] so that the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-21. " To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send them as combined scan data, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON]. For details on “Separate Scan”, refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-21. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 10-27. – In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Mode Check] to check or change the specified destinations. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Settings] screen. – For details on the [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 10-20. – For details on the [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 10-23. – For details on the [File Name] parameter available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying the document name” on page 10-26. – For details on the [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings” on page 10-27.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-19 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 10-20. " If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned, scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. " To check a scan job, press [Job], and then press [Save] in the [Log] screen.10-20 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Specifying document settings The [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify document settings. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used. [Original Size] Specify the size of the document that is to be sent. Item Description [1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided document. [2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document. [Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document with a cover page. Only the front side of the cover page will be scanned, and then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned. Item Description [Standard Size] Select the size of the document. Select [Letter/Legal] to scan a document containing different page sizes. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches and 8.50 inches).Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-21 [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] A document can be divided and scanned separately. The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages, and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document. 1 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. 2 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen. 3 With [Original Settings] in the [Settings] screen, set [Separate Scan] to [Yes]. 4 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned. 5 Place the next document page on the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned. 6 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish]. [Original Settings] - [Original Direction] Specify the orientation of the document. Item Description [Top] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the top. [Bottom] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the bottom. [Left] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the left (at the right when placed on the original glass). [Right] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the right (at the left when placed on the original glass).10-22 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position] Specify the binding position when scanning a double-sided document using the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left. [Color Mode] Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white. " [Black] may not be available, depending on the setting selected for [File Type]. Item Description [Left Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the left. [Top Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the top. [Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position. If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm (11.69 inches), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. Item Description [Color] [Auto] Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting. [Full Color] Select this setting to scan in full color. [Monochrome] [GrayScale] Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-23 [Original Type] Select the appropriate image quality setting according to the content of the document. Specifying scan settings The [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify scan settings. [Background/Density] Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos. [Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos. Item Description [Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned. Nine density levels are available for the background color. [Density] Select the density at which the document is to be scanned. Nine density levels are available. Select the appropriate density setting according to your document. [Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness, select a setting in the + direction. Seven sharpness levels are available.10-24 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations [Resolution] Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned. " A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. [File Settings] - [File Type] Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. " The [File Type] parameter may not be available, depending on the settings selected for [Color Mode] and [Resolution]. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. Item Description [150×150dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 150 × 150 dpi. [200×200dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 200 × 200 dpi. [300×300dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 300 × 300 dpi. [600×600dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 600 × 600 dpi. Item Description [PDF] Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. [Compact PDF] Select this setting to save the data compressed more than with the PDF format. [TIFF] Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. [JPEG] Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. [XPS] Select this setting to save data in the XPS format.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-25 [File Settings] - [Scan Setting] Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi-page data is created when multiple pages are scanned. [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt] Specify the encryption settings when [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected. Item Description [Single Page] Select this setting to save the data divided into individual pages. [Multi Page] Select this setting to save the scan as multi-page data. Item Description [Encryption Level] [Yes] Select this setting to enable encryption. After selecting this setting, set the encryption level to [Low], [Middle] or [High]. [No] Select this setting to disable encryption. [Password] Type in the password required to open encrypted data. (up to 32 characters) [Document Permissions] Type in the password required to change the permissions for a document. (up to 32 characters)10-26 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Specifying the document name Specify the document name for the scan data. [Details] If encryption has been enabled, detailed permission settings can be specified. "This appears only if [Encryption Level] is set to [Yes] and a password has been specified for [Document Permissions]. [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow the data to be printed ([Allow]), to prohibit printing ([Restrict]), or to allow printing only at a low resolution ([Low Resolution]). [Changes Allowed] Select whether to allow or prohibit document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data, and select the permission level if it is allowed. [Level 1]: Pages can be inserted, deleted and rotated. [Level 2]: Annotations can be created, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 3]: All operations, except page extracting, can be performed. [Level 4]: Data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 5]: The page layout can be changed, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. "Levels 1, 2, 3 and 5 appear only when [Encryption Level] is set to [Low]. Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 appear when [Encryption Level] is set to [Middle] or [High]. [Enable Copying] Select whether to allow text and images in a document to be copied ([Allow]) or to prohibit it ([Restrict]). Item Description [File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data.Specifying destinations 10-27 Specifying communication settings The [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify settings for sending job completion notifications by E-mail. [URL Notification] [URL Notification Destination] Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations. „ “Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27 „ “Directly typing in the address” on page 10-29 „ “Selecting from the log” on page 10-32 Selecting from registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine. " In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 10-34. " In [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Scan to Folder Default Tab], you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to Folder mode screen. For details, refer to “[Machine Settings]” on page 3-13. Description Settings [ON] / [OFF] Specify whether or not notifications of completion of a job are to be sent by E-mail. Description Specify the E-mail address where notifications of completion of a job are to be sent.10-28 Specifying destinations Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites]. As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Scan to Folder mode screen is displayed. Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. " The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press . 2 Press the desired index tab to search for destinations. – If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the desired tab appears. – To select a group destination, press [Group]. 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press . 2 Press [Search]. 3 Select the method to search for destinations. – [Type]: Select the destination type (“FTP”, “SMB”, “WebDAV”, etc.). – [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for. Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a list of the search results. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations, select all destinations where the data is to be sent. 5 Press [OK].Specifying destinations 10-29 Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type in the address. With [FTP] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [FTP]. 3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Details] screen. – [Pasv]: Select whether or not the PASV mode is used. – [Proxy]: Select whether or not a proxy server is used. – [Port No.]: Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535) 5 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press [Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next FTP destination. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. With [PC(SMB)] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [PC(SMB)]. 3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. 4 If necessary, press [Browse], and then browse to a shared folder to specify it.10-30 Specifying destinations 5 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press [Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next SMB destination. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. With [WebDAV] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [WebDAV]. 3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Details] screen. – [Port No.]: Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535) – [Proxy]: Select whether or not a proxy server is used. – [SSL Setting]: Select whether or not SSL is used. 5 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press [Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next WebDAV destination. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. With [USB Memory] 1 Plug the USB memory device into the USB HOST port. 2 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 3 Press [USB Memory]. " If a USB memory device has not already been plugged in, [USB Memory] is not available. 4 Specify a setting for [Document Name].Specifying destinations 10-31 5 Press [OK]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Restrict Scan to USB] is set to [Restrict], [USB Memory] is not available. For details on [Restrict Scan to USB], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " With a USB Memory transmission, only one destination can be specified. With [HDD] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [HDD]. 3 Press [Save Document]. 4 If user authentication settings have been specified, select [Public] or [Private]. 5 Specify a setting for [Document Name]. 6 Press [OK]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " With an HDD transmission, only one destination can be specified. " Scan data saved on the hard disk can be saved to a computer by copying it with PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].10-32 Specifying destinations With [Web Service Settings] With a Web Service transmission, scan data can be sent to a previously registered network computer. Network computers where this machine is registered as a Web Service scanner appear as destinations. Select a destination. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [Web Service Settings]. 3 Select the destination. – If the desired destination is not displayed, press [Search], and then type in the destination name to be searched for. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " With a Web Service transmission, only one destination can be specified. " With WSD scanning on Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008, it may not be possible to specify a resolution or document size. Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Log]. 2 Select the destination from the list, and then press the [Start] key. " Only one destination can be selected from the log. " The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after pressing [Direct Input]. In addition, destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not appear in the log. " When the machine is turned off, the log is cleared. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log.Specifying destinations 10-33 Selecting a program destination Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the machine. Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is frequently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings. " In order to select a program destination, the program destination must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 10-37. 1 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen. 2 Position the document to be scanned. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK]. The settings and destination addresses are recalled. " Only one program destination can be selected. 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white.10-34 Registering destinations Registering destinations Destination registration By registering destinations where scan data is frequently sent, recipients can be recalled allowing a data to easily be sent. With this machine, address book destinations, group destinations and program destinations can be registered. Address Book The information for destinations (E-mail addresses and computer folders, etc.) where data is frequently sent can be registered. A destination can selected from the address book when scanning. A maximum of 2,000 address book destinations can be registered. E-mail and SMB address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. Computer folder FTP and WebDAV destinations are registered only from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Group Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group. This is useful when sending the same scan data to multiple destinations. A maximum of 100 group destinations (with a maximum of 500 address book destinations per group) can be registered. Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Program Destinations where scan data is frequently sent can be registered together with scan settings (scan settings, document settings, etc.). During scanning, a program destination can be recalled by pressing the [Mode Memory] key in the control panel. A maximum of 400 program destinations can be registered. For details on registering, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 10-37.Registering destinations 10-35 Registering an address book destination The procedure for registering an address book destination for scan data is described below. E-mail address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " FTP, SMB, and WebDAV destinations can be registered only from the PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " For details on specifying an address book destination to send scan data, refer to “Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Registering and Changing Addr.] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the control panel. Registering an address book destination (E-mail transmission) 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. 3 Press [E-mail]. 4 Press [New]. – To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Mode Check]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the [Mode Check] screen. 5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK]. Item Description [Name] Type in the registration name for the address book destination. (up to 72 bytes) [E-mail address] Type in the E-mail address of the recipient. (up to 320 characters)10-36 Registering destinations 6 Press [OK]. Registering Address Book (SMB transmission) 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. 3 Press [SMB]. 4 Press [New]. – To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Mode Check]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the [Mode Check] screen. 5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK]. 6 Press [OK]. [Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON]. This displays the destination in the [Favorites] list, allowing it to be found more easily. [Index] Select the index characters that will be used to search for the destination. Item Description [Name] Type in the registration name for the address book destination. (up to 72 bytes) [Connection] Specify [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. If necessary, use [Browse] to search for the shared folder. [Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON]. This displays the destination in the [Favorites] list, allowing it to be found more easily. [Index] Select the index characters that will be used to search for the destination.Registering destinations 10-37 Registering a program destination The procedure for registering a program destination for scan transmissions is described below. Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " For details on specifying a program destination to send scan data, refer to “Selecting a program destination” on page 10-33. 1 Press [Scan to E-mail] or [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to E-mail or Scan to Folder mode screen. 2 Specify settings for the various parameters available from the [Settings] screen. – For details on the parameters available from the Settings screen, refer to “Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations” on page 10-3 and “Performing Scan to Folder mode operations” on page 10-18. 3 In the control panel, press the [Mode Memory] key. The list of program destinations appears. 4 Press [Register]. 5 Specify settings for [Name] and [Dest.] for the program destination, and then press [OK]. – Press to display the address book screen. Select a registered destination. 6 Press [OK].10-38 Registering destinations11 Replacing Consumables11-2 Replacing Consumables Replacing Consumables Note Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in voiding your warranty. Note If the toner has run out or the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached, an error message appears. Refer to “Error messages” on page 13-39. When the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached, print a configuration page, and then check the status of the consumables. For details on printing the configuration page, refer to “Printing a configuration page” on page 13-2. About Toner Cartridges Your machine uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan. Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the machine or on yourself. " When replacing the toner cartridges, install only new cartridges. If a used toner cartridge is installed, the amount of remaining toner may not appear correctly. " Do not open the toner cartridge unnecessarily. If toner is spilled, avoid inhaling it or allowing it to come in contact with your skin. " If toner gets on your hands or clothes, immediately wash them with soap and water. " If toner was inhaled, move to an area with fresh air, and gargle thoroughly with a large quantity of water. If conditions such as coughing appear, seek professional medical attention. " If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water for at least 15 minutes. If any irritation persists, seek professional medical attention. " If toner gets in your mouth, thoroughly rinse it, and then drink 1 to 2 cups of water. If necessary, seek professional medical attention. " Store toner cartridges out of the reach of children.Replacing Consumables 11-3 " Refer to the following URL for recycling information. US: http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/content/environment/cleanplanetmcpp.html Europe: http://cleanplanet.konicaminolta.eu/ Other regions: konicaminolta.com Note The use of non-genuine toner cartridges may result in unstable performance. In addition, any damage caused by the use of non-genuine toner cartridges is not covered by the warranty, even if it occurs during the warranty period. (Although damage is not certain to result from using non-genuine toner cartridges, we strongly recommend that you use genuine toner cartridges.) Keep toner cartridges: „ In their packaging until you’re ready to install them. „ In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat). The maximum storage temperature is 35°C (95°F) and the maximum storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur, degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for about one hour before use. „ Level during handling and storage. Do not turn cartridges upside down; the toner inside the cartridges may become caked or unequally distributed. „ Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.11-4 Replacing Consumables Replacing a Toner Cartridge Note Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. When the toner is empty, the message [Replace Toner (x)] appears in the touch panel. Follow the instructions below to replace the toner cartridge. As an example, the procedure for replacing the yellow toner cartridge is described below. 1 Open the machine’s front cover.Replacing Consumables 11-5 2 Pull the front lever of the color toner cartridge indicated to the left. The replacement procedure for the toner cartridge is the same for all colors (yellow: Y, magenta: M, cyan: C, and black: K). The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge (Y). 3 Grab the handle of the toner cartridge to be replaced, and then pull out the cartridge. The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge(Y). Note Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the toner cartridge. For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 11-2. 4 Check the color of the new toner cartridge to be installed. Y M C K11-6 Replacing Consumables 5 Remove the toner cartridge from the bag. 6 Shake the cartridge to distribute the toner. 7 Peel off the protective film from the right side of the toner cartridge. 3 ×Replacing Consumables 11-7 8 Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the machine compartment, and then insert the toner cartridge into the machine. " Fully insert the toner cartridge. 9 Pull the lever to the right to lock it in place. " The front lever should be securely returned to its original position; otherwise, the front cover of the machine cannot be closed. " If it is difficult to operate the lever, push it in. 10 Make sure that the toner cartridge is securely installed, and then peel off the protective film.11-8 Replacing Consumables 11 Close the front cover. " When closing the front cover, press the area of the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-9 Replacing a Imaging Unit Note Do not touch the OPC drum surface. This could lower image quality. If the messages [Replace Imaging Unit] appear, replace the specified imaging unit. As an example, the procedure for replacing the black imaging unit is described below. 1 Check the message window to see which color imaging unit needs replacing.11-10 Replacing Consumables 2 Open the machine’s front cover. 3 Pull the front lever of the color toner cartridge indicated to the left. The replacement procedure for the imaging unit is the same for all colors (yellow: Y, magenta: M, cyan: C, and black: K). The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge (K). Y M C KReplacing Consumables 11-11 4 Grab the handle of the toner cartridge to be removed, and then pull out the cartridge. " Do not tilt removed toner cartridge, otherwise toner may spill. 5 Pull up the waste toner bottle to unlock it. 6 Grab the left and right handles of the waste toner bottle, and then slowly pull out the bottle. " Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill.11-12 Replacing Consumables 7 While pressing down the area marked “Push” on the imaging unit to be replaced, slide the unit completely out of the machine. The following instructions show the procedure to replace the imaging unit (K). Note Dispose of the used imaging unit according to your local regulations. Do not burn the imaging unit. 8 Check the color of the new imaging unit to be installed. " In order to prevent toner from spilling, leave the imaging unit in the bag until step 7 is being performed. 9 Remove the imaging unit from the bag.Replacing Consumables 11-13 10 Hold the imaging unit with both hands, and then shake it twice as shown in the illustration. " Do not grab the bottom of the bag; otherwise, the imaging unit may be damaged, resulting in decreased print quality. 11 Remove the protective cover from the imaging unit. Remove all packing tape from the imaging unit11-14 Replacing Consumables 12 Remove the paper from the imaging unit. Remove the protective cover from the imaging unit. 13 Make sure that the new imaging unit to be installed is the same color as the machine compartment, and then install the imaging unit in the machine. 14 Press in on the waste toner bottle until it locks into place.Replacing Consumables 11-15 15 Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the machine compartment, and then insert the toner cartridge into the machine. " Fully insert the toner cartridge. 16 Pull the lever to the right to lock it in place. " The front lever should be securely returned to its original position; otherwise, the front cover of the machine cannot be closed. " If it is difficult to operate the lever, push it in.11-16 Replacing Consumables 17 Close the front cover. " When closing the front cover, press the area of the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-17 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle When the waste toner bottle becomes full, the message [Waste Toner Box Full] appears in the message window. The machine stops and will not start again until the waste toner bottle is replaced. 1 Open the machine’s front cover. 2 Pull up the waste toner bottle to unlock it.11-18 Replacing Consumables 3 Grab the left and right handles of the waste toner bottle, and then slowly pull out the bottle. " Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill. 4 Remove the new waste toner bottle from its packaging. Insert the used waste toner bottle into the plastic bag included in the box, and then box it up. Note Dispose of the used waste toner bottle according to your local regulations. Do not burn the waste toner bottle. 5 Press in on the waste toner bottle until it locks into place.Replacing Consumables 11-19 6 Close the front cover. " When closing the front cover, press the area of the cover with small projections. " If the waste toner bottle is not fully inserted, the front cover cannot be closed.11-20 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Transfer Roller When the time to replace the transfer roller is reached, the message [Replace transfer roller unit.] appears. Printing can continue even after this message appears; however, since the print quality is reduced, the transfer roller should be replaced immediately. 1 Pull the lever, and then open the right door. " Before opening the right door, fold up Tray 1. 2 While pushing the levers to the inside, move the roller presser toward you. Replacing Consumables 11-21 3 While continuing to press the levers, remove the transfer roller. 4 Prepare a new transfer roller. 5 While pressing the levers, insert the shaft of the transfer roller into the bearings. 6 Move the levers away from you until it snaps into place.11-22 Replacing Consumables 7 Close the right door. 8 Reset the counter in the [Admin Settings]/[Maintenance Menu]/[Supplies]/ [Consumables Replace]/[Transfer Roller Unit] menu. Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit When the time to replace the transfer belt unit is reached, the message [Replace image transfer belt.] appears. Printing can continue even after this message appears; however, since the print quality is reduced, the transfer belt unit should be replaced immediately. 1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cover.Replacing Consumables 11-23 2 Open the machine’s front cover. 3 Remove the all toner cartridges, all imaging units and waste toner bottle. " For details on removing the toner cartridges, imaging units or waste toner bottle, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or “Replacing a Imaging Unit” on page 11-9. " Cover the removed imaging unit to protect it from direct sunlight. " Do not tilt removed toner cartridge, otherwise toner may spill. " Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill.11-24 Replacing Consumables 4 Pull the lever, and then open the right door. " Before opening the right door, fold up Tray 1. 5 Remove the top part of the right door. 6 Insert the protective sheet into the unit in the direction of the arrow until it stops.Replacing Consumables 11-25 7 Push down the guides. 8 Hold the handles, and then carefully pull out the transfer belt unit. " Be sure to keep the transfer belt level; otherwise, the transfer belt may be scratched. 9 Prepare a new transfer belt unit. " Be careful not to touch the surface of the belt. " Do not remove the blue lever.11-26 Replacing Consumables 10 Remove the protective cover from the new transfer belt unit. 11 Insert the new transfer belt unit along the rails. " Fully insert it until it locks into place. " Be sure to keep the transfer belt level; otherwise, the transfer belt may be scratched. 12 Push up the guides.Replacing Consumables 11-27 13 Pull out the protective sheet. 14 Install the top part of the right door. 15 Close the right door.11-28 Replacing Consumables 16 Install the all toner cartridges, all imaging units and waste toner bottle. " For details on installing the toner cartridges, imaging units or waste toner bottle, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or “Replacing a Imaging Unit” on page 11-9. 17 Close the front cover. " When closing the front cover, press the area of the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-29 18 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the machine. 19 Reset the counter in the [Admin Settings]/[Maintenance Menu]/[Supplies]/ [Consumables Replace]/[Transfer Belt Unit] menu.11-30 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Backup Battery When the backup battery is at its end of life, the machine’s date and time cannot be retained. Follow the procedure described below to replace the backup battery. Note Only use the coin-shaped 3V lithium battery CR2032. It’s very important to protect the machine controller board and any associated circuit boards from electrostatic damage. Before performing this procedure, review the antistatic caution on page 11-38. In addition, always handle circuit boards by the edges only. 1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Remove the cover.Replacing Consumables 11-31 3 Using a coin, remove a screw. 4 Open the cover. 5 Remove the hook, and then remove the backup battery.11-32 Replacing Consumables 6 Remove the hook, and then insert a new backup battery. " When inserting the new backup battery, be sure that the + side faces towerd the left. " Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations. Do not burn the backup battery. 7 Reinstall the panel and tighten a screw. 8 Install the cover. 9 Reconnect all interface cables. 10 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the machine. 11 Use [Date(XX. XX. XX)] on the [Admin Settings]/[Machine Settings]/ [Date & Time Settings] menu to set the date, and use [Time] on the [Admin Settings]/[Machine Settings]/[Date & Time Settings] menu to set the time.Replacing Consumables 11-33 Replacing the Fuser Unit When the time to replace the fuser unit is reached, the message [Replace fusing unit.] appears. Printing can continue even after this message appears; however, since the print quality is reduced, the fuser unit should be replaced immediately 1 Turn off the machine. Note There are extremely hot parts within the machine. Before replacing the fuser unit, wait about 20 minutes after turning off the machine, and then check that the fusing section has reached room temperature, otherwise, you may get burnt. 2 Pull the lever, and then open the right door. " Before opening the right door, fold up Tray 1. 3 Open the fuser unit cover.11-34 Replacing Consumables 4 Pull down the 2 levers. 5 Remove the fuser unit. 6 Prepare a new fuser unit. " Be careful not to touch the surface of the fuser roller.Replacing Consumables 11-35 7 Lift up the 2 levers. 8 Remove the packing material. 9 Push down the 2 levers.11-36 Replacing Consumables 10 Pull down the 2 levers of a new fuser unit. 11 Insert the fuser unit until it locks into place. 12 Lift up the 2 levers.Replacing Consumables 11-37 13 Close the fuser unit cover. 14 Close the right door. " If the door cannot be closed, check that the fuser unit is fully inserted. 15 Reset the counter in the [Admin Settings]/[Maintenance Menu]/[Supplies]/ [Consumables Replace]/[Fusing Unit] menu.11-38 Antistatic Protection Antistatic Protection Note It’s very important to protect the printer controller board from electrostatic damage while performing any task involving the controller board. Turn off all power switches first. If an antistatic wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit, attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to the bare metal chassis on the back of your printer. Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical current present. Plastic, rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not acceptable grounding points. If you don’t have an antistatic wrist strap, discharge your body’s static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you handle any printer boards or components. Also avoid walking around after grounding yourself.12 Maintenance12-2 Maintaining the machine Maintaining the machine CAUTION Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure to follow any instructions contained in them. These labels are located on the inside of the machine’s covers and the interior of the machine body. Handle the machine with care to preserve its life. Abuse handling may cause damage and void your warranty. If dust and paper scraps remain on the inside or outside of the machine, machine performance and print quality will suffer, so the machine should be cleaned periodically. Keep the following guidelines in mind. WARNING! Turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. Do not spill water or detergent into the machine; otherwise the machine will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. CAUTION The fuser unit is hot. When the right door is opened, the fuser unit temperature drops gradually (one hour wait time). „ Be careful when cleaning the inside of the machine or removing media misfeeds, as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot. „ Do not place anything on top of the machine. „ Use a soft cloth to clean the machine. „ Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the machine’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the machine and damage the internal circuits. „ Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain solvents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the machine. „ Always test any cleaning solution (such as mild detergent) on a small inconspicuous area of your machine to check the solution’s performance. „ Never use sharp or rough implements, such as wire or plastic cleaning pads. „ Always close the machine’s covers gently. Never subject the machine to vibration.Maintaining the machine 12-3 „ Do not cover the machine immediately after using it. Turn it off and wait until it cools down. „ Do not leave the machine’s covers open for any length of time, especially in well-lit places; light may damage the imaging units. „ Do not open the machine during printing. „ Do not tap media stacks on the machine. „ Do not lubricate or disassemble the machine. „ Do not tilt the machine. „ Do not touch the electrical contacts, gears, or laser devices. Doing so may damage the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate. „ Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level. If the media is stocked too high, your machine may experience media misfeeds and excessive media curl. „ Make sure two people are available to lift the machine when moving it. Keep the machine level to avoid toner spillage. „ When lifting the machine, fold up Tray 1, and then lift the machine as shown in the illustration at the right. If the optional lower feeder unit is installed, move it and the machine separately. Do not grasp the grip of Tray 3, or the right side cover; otherwise, the lower feeder unit may be damaged. „ If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. „ Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you plug in the machine. 39 kg 86 lbs12-4 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the machine CAUTION Be sure to turn off the machine and unplug the power cord before cleaning. Exterior Control Panel Ventilation Grill Machine Exterior Original Glass Original Cover PadCleaning the machine 12-5 Media Rollers The accumulation of paper dust and other debris on the media rollers can cause media-feeding problems. Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers (Manual Feed Tray) 1 Open Tray 1. 2 Press down on the center of the paper-lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs (white) lock into place.12-6 Cleaning the machine 3 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 4 Close the tray.Cleaning the machine 12-7 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2/3/4 1 Pull out the tray. 2 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 3 Close the tray.12-8 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the Media Transfer Rollers for Tray 3/4 1 Open the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4. " Before opening the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4, fold up Tray 1. 2 Clean the media transfer rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 3 Close the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4.Cleaning the machine 12-9 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the ADF 1 Open the ADF feed cover. 2 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 3 Close the ADF feed cover.12-10 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the Laser Lens This machine is constructed with four laser lenses. Clean all lenses as described below. The laser lens cleaning tool should be attached to the inside of the tray 2. 1 Pull out the tray 2. 2 Remove the cover. " Since the cover will be used later, do not return it to its original position. 3 Remove the cleaning tool from the tray 2. Cleaning the machine 12-11 4 Close the tray 2. 5 Open the machine’s front cover. 6 Remove the waste toner bottle and the toner cartridge and imaging unit for the color of laser lens to be cleaned. " For details on removing the toner cartridge, imaging unit or waste toner bottle, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or “Replacing a Imaging Unit” on page 11-9. " Do not tilt removed toner cartridge, otherwise toner may spill. " Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill. 7 Attach the cover to the removed imaging unit.12-12 Cleaning the machine 8 Insert the laser lens cleaning tool into the imaging unit opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back and forth movement 2 or 3 times. 9 Install the removed toner cartridge, imaging unit and waste toner bottle. " For details on installing the toner cartridge, imaging unit or waste toner bottle, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or “Replacing a Imaging Unit” on page 11-9. 10 Close the front cover. 11 Pull out the tray 2.Cleaning the machine 12-13 12 Return the laser lens cleaning tool to its holder on the inside of the tray 2. 13 Close the cover. 14 Close the tray 2. 15 Clean between each of the laser lenses in the same way. " The laser lens cleaning tool is included with the machine. Safely store the laser lens cleaning tool so that it will not be lost.12-14 Cleaning the machine13 Troubleshooting13-2 Introduction Introduction This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving machine problems you may encounter, or at least guide you to the proper sources for help. Printing a configuration page 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Print Settings]. 4 Press [Print Reports]. 5 Press [Configuration Page]. 6 Press [Print]. 7 Press [OK]. Printing the configuration page page 13-2 Unlocking the Scanner page 13-3 Preventing media misfeeds page 13-4 Understanding the media path page 13-5 Clearing media misfeeds page 13-6 Solving problems with media misfeeds page 13-23 Solving other problems page 13-26 Solving problems with printing quality page 13-31 Status, error, and service messages page 13-38Unlocking the Scanner 13-3 Unlocking the Scanner 1 Lift open the ADF cover. 2 Move the scanner lock lever to . 3 Close the ADF cover. 4 Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again.13-4 Preventing Media Misfeeds Preventing Media Misfeeds Make sure that... Media matches the machine specifications. Media is flat, especially on the leading edge. The machine is on a hard, flat, level surface. You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity. You always adjust the media guides in the tray after inserting the media (a guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, and machine damage). You load the media printing-side up in the tray (many manufacturers place an arrow on the end of the wrapper to indicate the printing side). Avoid... Media that is folded, wrinkled, or excessively curled. Double feeding (remove the media and fan the sheets—they may be sticking together). Loading more than one type/size/weight of media in a tray at the same time. Overfilling the trays. Allowing the output tray to overfill (the output tray has a 250-sheet capacity— misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 250 sheets of media to accumulate at one time).Understanding the Media Path 13-5 Understanding the Media Path Understanding media path will help you locate media misfeeds 4 Fuser unit 10 Print head unit 5 Duplex 11 Imaging unit 6 Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) 12 Transfer belt unit 7 Tray 4 (optional lower feeder unit) 13 Toner cartridge 8 Tray 3 (optional lower feeder unit) 14 Output tray 9 Tray 2 4 11 12 13 14 6 5 10 9 8 7 3 1 2 1 ADF media feed rollers 2 Document feed tray 3 Document output tray13-6 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing Media Misfeeds To avoid damage, always remove misfed media gently, without tearing it. Any piece of media left in the machine, whether large or small, can obstruct the media path and cause further misfeeds. Do not reload media that has misfed. Note The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process. If you touch the printed surface, the toner may stick to your hands, so be careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media. Make sure not to spill any toner inside the machine. CAUTION Unfused toner can dirty your hands, clothes, or anything else it gets on. If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off. If toner gets on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. If, after clearing the media misfeed, the misfeed message in the control panel window persists, open and close the engine cover. This should clear the misfeed message. Media misfeed indications If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message “Misfeed detected” appears and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen. Media misfeed locations Page reference Media misfeed in Tray 2 page 13-7 Media misfeed in Tray 3/Tray 4 page 13-11 Media misfeed in the ADF page 13-13 Media misfeed in the duplex unit page 13-15 Media misfeed in the fuser unit page 13-16 Media misfeed in Tray 1 (manual feed tray) page 13-20Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 2 1 Pull the lever, and then open the right door. " Before opening the right door, fold up Tray 1. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media.13-8 Clearing Media Misfeeds CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or transfer roller. Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-9 3 Close the right side door. 4 Pull out Tray 2, and then remove all media from the tray. 5 Fan the media you removed and then align it well.13-10 Clearing Media Misfeeds 6 Load the media face up in Tray 2. " Make sure that the media is flat. " Do not load paper above the ▼ mark. " Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 7 Close Tray 2.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-11 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 3/4 1 Open the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4. " Before opening the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4, fold up Tray 1. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. 3 Close the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4.13-12 Clearing Media Misfeeds 4 Pull out Tray 3 or Tray 4, and then remove all paper from the tray. 5 Fan the paper you removed and then align it well. 6 Load the paper face up in Tray 3 or Tray 4. " Make sure that the paper is flat. " Do not load paper above the ▼ mark. " Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 7 Close Tray 3 or Tray 4.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the ADF 1 Open the ADF feed cover. 2 Remove the document from the ADF document feed tray. 3 Lift to open the ADF cover.13-14 Clearing Media Misfeeds 4 Remove any misfed media. 5 Close the ADF cover. 6 Close the ADF feed cover.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-15 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex 1 Pull the lever, and then open the right door. " Before opening the right door, fold up Tray 1. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. 3 Close the right door.13-16 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Fuser Unit 1 Pull the lever, and then open the right door. " Before opening the right door, fold up Tray 1. 2 Lift up the 2 levers. 3 Open the fuser unit cover.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-17 4 Carefully pull out the misfed media. " If the misfed media cannot be removed by pulling it down, pull it from the top of the fuser unit.13-18 Clearing Media Misfeeds CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or transfer roller. Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-19 5 Close the fuser unit cover. 6 Push down the 2 levers. 7 Close the right door.13-20 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed from Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) and Transfer Roller 1 Pull the lever, and then open the right door. " Before opening the right door, fold up Tray 1. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-21 CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or transfer roller. 13-22 Clearing Media Misfeeds 3 Close the right door.Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 13-23 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds " Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked, repaired, or cleaned. Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you’re using unsupported print media or original media. Symptom Cause Solution Several sheets go through the machine together. The front edges of the media are not even. Remove the media and even up the front edges, then reload it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Media misfeed message stays on. Front cover needs to be opened and closed again to reset the machine. Open and close the front cover again. Some media remains misfed in the machine. Check the media path again to make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media. Duplex misfeeds. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Special Paper” on page 4-11. Also, refer to http://konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. Plain paper, recycled paper, special paper, Thick 1 and Thick 2 can be autoduplexed if the media type is set properly in the driver. See “Specifications” on page 4-2. Make sure that you have not mixed media types in the tray. Do not duplex, envelopes, labels, letter head, postcards, glossy media, or single side only paper. Media is still being misfed. Check the media path inside the duplex again to make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media.13-24 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds Media is misfed in the ADF. The loaded document does not meet the specifications. Load the correct document. For details on the documents that can be loaded, refer to “Documents that can be loaded into the ADF” on page 4-34. The loaded document exceeds the maximum capacity. Load the document so that it does not exceed the maximum capacity. For details on the documents that can be loaded, refer to “Documents that can be loaded into the ADF” on page 4-34. The document guides were not slid against the edges of the document. Slide the document guides against the edges of the document. For details on loading the document, refer to “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. Media is misfeeding. The media is not correctly positioned in the tray. Remove the misfed media and reposition the media properly in the tray. The number of sheets in the tray exceeds the maximum allowed. Remove the excess media and reload the correct number of sheets in the tray. The media guides are not correctly adjusted to the media size. Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1 to match the size of the media. Warped or wrinkled media is loaded in the tray. Remove the media, smooth it out, and reload it. If it still misfeeds, do not use that media. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Envelopes are loaded in Tray 2, 3, 4. Envelope must be loaded in Tray 1 only. Labels, letterhead, postcards, thick stock, or glossy are loaded in Tray 3, 4. Labels, letterhead, postcards, thick stock, or glossy must be loaded in Tray 1 or 2. Custom-sized media is loaded in Tray 3, 4. Custom-sized media can be loaded in Tray 1 or 2. See “Print Media” on page 4-2. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Media Misfeeds 13-25 The recommended label sheet is facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the label sheets according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Envelopes are facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the flaps facing up. If the flaps are on the long edge, load the envelopes with the flap edge toward the machine and the flap side facing up. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Specifications” on page 4-2. Also, refer to http://konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. The media feed roller is dirty. Clean the media feed roller. For more details, refer to “Media Rollers” on page 12-5. Symptom Cause Solution13-26 Solving Other Problems Solving Other Problems Symptom Cause Solution Machine power is not on. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the machine, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the machine. Something is wrong with the outlet connected to the machine. Plug another electrical appliance into the outlet and see whether it operates properly. The power switch is not correctly turned on (I position). Turn the power switch off (O position), then turn it back to the on (I position). The machine is connected to an outlet with a voltage or frequency that does not match the machine specifications. Use a power source with the specifications listed in appendix A, “Technical Specifications.” The control panel displays [Toner is low.] much sooner than expected. One of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Printed with heavy toner coverage. See specifications in Appendix A. Cannot print the machine status list. The tray is empty. Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded with media, in place, and secure. There is a media misfeed. Clear the media misfeed.Solving Other Problems 13-27 Printing from a USB memory device is not possible. [External Memory Print] is set to [Disable]. Press the [Utility/Counter] key, and then set [Admin Settings] - [External Memory Print] to [Enable]. The file format (file extension) is not one that can be printed. Only files with the format (extension) for JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF can be printed. Press [USB/HDD], and then, with [External Memory] - [File Type], select the type of files to be displayed. A public user is not specified for user authentication. Contact the administrator of this unit. Printing takes too much time. The machine is set to a slow printing mode (for example, thick stock). It takes more time to print with special media. When using regular paper, make sure that the media type is set properly in the driver. The machine is set to power saving mode. It takes time for printing to start in power saving mode. The job is very complex. Wait. No action needed. A toner cartridge for a different region or an unapproved toner cartridge is installed ([Incorrect toner cartridge]is displayed in the message window). Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridge approved for your specific machine. If an error has been detected during printing job transmission in the Copy mode, it takes a while to process the error and resume the printing operation. Wait. No action needed. Blank pages are printed. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or empty. Check the toner cartridges. The image will not print correctly or not at all, if the cartridges are empty. The wrong media is being used. Check that the media type. Symptom Cause Solution13-28 Solving Other Problems Not all pages print. A different user accidentally canceled the job. Try printing the remaining pages. The tray is empty. Check that the tray is loaded with media, in place, and secure. A document is printed with an overlay file which has been created by an unsuitable printer driver. Print the overlay file using a suitable printer driver. Machine resets or turns off frequently. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the machine, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the machine. A system error occurred. Contact Technical Support with the error information. You are experiencing duplex problems. Media or settings are not correct. Make sure that you are using correct media. „ See “Specifications” on page 4-2. Also, refer to http://konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. „ Do not duplex custom-sized media, envelopes, labels, postcards, letterhead, or glossy media. „ Make sure that you have not mixed media types in the tray. In the Windows printer driver ([Layout]/ [Print Type]), choose [2-Sided]." Set duplex (Double-Sided) copying. For details on setting duplex (Double-Sided) copying, refer to “About Duplex Printing” on page 4-30. For N-up on duplexed pages, choose Collate only in the printer driver’s [Basic] Tab. Do not set collation in the application. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 13-29 With N-up on multiple copies, the output is incorrect. Both the printer driver and the application have been set for collation. For N-up on multiple copies, choose Collate only in the printer driver’s Basic Tab. Do not set collation in the application. Booklet Left and Right Binding output is incorrect. Both the printer driver and the application have been set for collation. For Booklet Left Binding and Booklet Right Binding, choose Collate only in the printer driver’s Basic Tab. Do not set collation in the application. You hear unusual noises. The machine is not level. Place the machine on a flat, hard, level surface. The tray is not installed correctly. Remove the tray that you are printing from and reinsert it completely into the machine. There is a foreign object stuck inside the machine. Turn off the machine and remove the object. If you cannot remove it, contact Technical Support. Some areas of the scanned image are missing. Acrobat 8 (Macintosh version) is used for scanning the image. With the Acrobat Scan setting, turn off the OCR and Filtering functions. The web-based utility cannot be accessed. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator’s password is incorrect. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator password has a 0-character minimum and an 16-character maximum. For details of the PageScope Web Connection administrator password, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD. Media is wrinkled. The media is moist from humidity or having water spilled on it. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media feed roller or fuser unit is defective. Check them for damage. If necessary, contact Technical Support with the error information. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Specifications” on page 4-2. Symptom Cause Solution13-30 Solving Other Problems Data was sent to the machine, but it doesn’t print. An error message is displayed in the message window. Handle according to the message displayed. A job may be cancelled if user authentication setting is specified. Click the User Authentication button in the printer driver, and then type in the necessary information before printing. The hard disk was automatically formatted. The hard disk was full. When the control panel displays [HDD is low on disk space.], delete print jobs and resources (fonts, forms, etc.) which were saved on the hard disk using Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection. A network connection cannot be established with an IPv4 address. Duplicate detection of the IPv6 address failed. Set [Ethernet]/[TCP/IP]/[IPv6]/[Enable] in [Admin Settings] menu to [No]. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-31 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Symptom Cause Solution Nothing is printed, or there are blank spots on the printed page. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check if any is damaged. One or more of the imaging units may be defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity for media storage. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media set in the printer driver mismatches the media loaded in the machine. Load the correct media in the machine. Several sheets are being fed at the same time. Remove the media from the tray and check for static electricity. Fan plain paper or other media, and replace it in the tray. Entire sheet is printed in black or color. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. One or more of the imaging units may be defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.13-32 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Image is too light; there is low image density. Laser lens is dirty. Clean the laser lens. The copy density is set too light. Select a darker copy density. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace with new, dry media. There is not much toner left in the cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, letter head, postcards, thick stock, glossy media, single side only paper or special paper, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Image is too dark. The copy density is set too dark. Select a lighter copy density. The document was not pressed close enough against the original glass. Position the document so that it is pressed close enough against the original glass. For details on positioning the document on the original glass, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. One or more of the imaging units may be defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-33 Image is blurred; background is lightly stained; there is insufficient gloss of the printed image. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. One or more of the imaging units may be defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The original glass is dirty. Clean the original glass. For details, refer to “Cleaning the machine” on page 12-4. The original cover pad is dirty. Clean the original cover pad. For details, refer to “Cleaning the machine” on page 12-4. The print or color density is uneven. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective or low. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. One or more of the imaging units is defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The machine is not level. Place the machine on a flat, hard, level surface. Symptom Cause Solution13-34 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Irregular print or mottled image appears. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity in the media storage area. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Specifications” on page 4-2. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. One or more of the imaging units is defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. There is insufficient fusing or the image comes off when rubbed. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Specifications” on page 4-2. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, letter head, postcards, thick stock, single side only paper or special paper, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-35 There are toner smudges or residual images. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or installed incorrectly. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. There are toner smudges on the back side of the page (whether or not it has been duplexed). The media transfer roller is dirty. Clean the media transfer roller. If you think the transfer roller should be replaced, contact Technical Support with the error information. The media path is dirty with toner. Print several blank sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. One or more of the imaging units is defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Abnormal areas (white, black, or color) appear in a regular pattern. The laser lens is dirty. Clean the laser lens. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. One or more of the imaging units is defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause Solution13-36 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Image defects. The laser lens is dirty. Clean the laser lens. A toner cartridge may be leaking. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. One or more of the imaging units may be defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Lateral lines or bands appear on image. The machine is not level. Place the machine on a flat, hard, level surface. The media path is dirty with toner. Print several sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. One or more of the imaging units is defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Colors look drastically wrong. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and verify that the toner is distributed evenly on each cartridge roller, and reinstall the toner cartridges. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-37 If the problem is not resolved, even after all of the above have been performed, contact Technical Support with the error information. Colors are not registering properly; colors are mixed or have page-to-pag e variation. Gradations are not adjusted correctly. Set [Print Settings]/[Quality Settings]/ [Gradation Adjustment]/[Tone Calibration] in the [Admin Settings] menu to [ON], and then perform the AIDC color calibration. For details, refer to “[Print Settings]” on page 3-49. The front cover is opened during the calibration. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The color has a poor reproduction or has poor color density. One or more of the imaging units may be defective. Remove the imaging units and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause Solution13-38 Status, error and service messages Status, error and service messages Various status, error and service messages appear in the touch panel of the control panel. They provide information about the machine and help you locate problems that may have occurred. Check the message that appears, and then perform the necessary steps. Status messages Message Cause Solution [Initializing] The machine was turned on. No action is required. [Restarting] The machine is being restarted. [Enter Power Save mode] The machine is entering normal operation mode from Power Save mode. [Calibrating] The image is being adjusted. [Warming up] The machine is warming up or AIDC is being performed. [Check setting. Tray x] The paper specified from the touch panel was loaded in the paper tray. [TWAIN/WSD connecting] Computer scanning is being performed with TWAIN or a Web Service.Status, error and service messages 13-39 Error messages Warning messages Message Cause Solution [Unable to collate.] [Prints one set only.] There is not enough space available on the hard disk for collated printing. After one copy is printed, the error is canceled. [HDD is low on disk space.] [Delete unneeded file.] There is too little space available on the hard disk. Delete downloaded fonts. Otherwise, initialize the hard disk. [Replace imaging unit.] [Replace imaging unit.] [x] The time to replace the imaging unit has been reached. Replace the indicated imaging unit. [Replace toner (x)] [Toner empty. Replace toner and close front door. x] The time to replace the toner cartridge has been reached. Replace the indicated toner cartridge. [Replace image transfer belt.] [Replace transfer belt unit.] The time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached. Replace the transfer belt unit. After replacing the transfer belt unit, reset its counter. For details, refer to “[Maintenance Menu]” on page 3-63. [Replace fusing unit.] [Replace fusing unit.] The time to replace the fuser unit has been reached. Replace the fuser unit. After replacing the fuser unit, reset its counter. For details, refer to “[Maintenance Menu]” on page 3-63. [Replace waste toner box.] [Prepare new waste toner box.] The time to replace the waste toner bottle is near. Prepare the new waste toner bottle.13-40 Status, error and service messages [Toner is low.] [Prepare new toner cartridge.] [x] The time to replace the toner cartridge is near. Prepare the new toner cartridge. [Replace imaging unit soon.] [Prepare new imaging unit.] [x] The time to replace the imaging unit is near. Prepare the new imaging unit. [Replenish paper] [Replenish paper.] [Trayx] There is no paper in the paper tray. Appears when [Paper Empty] ([Admin Settings]) is set to [ON]. For details, refer to “[Paper Empty]” on page 3-78. Load paper into the paper tray. [Incorrect toner cartridge] [Install proper toner cartridge.] [x] A toner cartridge incompatible with the machine has been installed. Replace the indicated toner cartridge with a correct one. [Incorrect Imaging Unit] [Install proper imaging unit.] [x] An imaging unit incompatible with the machine has been installed. Replace the indicated imaging unit with a correct one. [Replace transfer roller unit.] [Replace transfer roller unit.] The time to replace the transfer roller has been reached. Replace the transfer roller. After replacing the transfer roller, reset its counter. For details, refer to “[Maintenance Menu]” on page 3-63. [USB hub is not supported.] [Disconnect USB hub.] A USB hub is connected to the USB HOST port. Disconnect the USB hub from the USB HOST port. Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-41 Operator messages [The USB device is invalid.] [Disconnect USB device.] An incompatible USB device is connected to the USB HOST port. Disconnect the USB device from the USB HOST port. [IEEE802.1x Auth. failed] [Please reboot.] IEEE 802.1X port authentication timed out. Turn the machine off, then on again. [IEEE802.1x Authenticating] [Please wait.] IEEE 802.1X port authentication is being performed. If authentication is successful, the message is cleared. If authentication times out, turn the machine off, then on again. Message Cause Solution [Configuration of Options Changed] [Configuration of Options Changed] [Power Off and ON.] An optional lower feeder unit was installed or removed while the machine is on. Turn the machine off, wait a few seconds, and then it on again. [Cover Open] [Cover is open.] [Close all covers properly.] The cover is open. Close the indicated cover. [Misfeed Detected] [Misfeed was detected.] [Remove the paper.] A media misfeed occurred. Open the indicated cover, and remove the misfed media. [Imaging Unit Missing] [Install imaging unit and close all doors.] No imaging unit is installed. Otherwise, an imaging unit incompatible with the machine has been installed. Install the correct imaging unit. Message Cause Solution13-42 Status, error and service messages [Toner Cartridge Missing] [install toner cartridge and close all doors.] No toner cartridge is installed. Otherwise, a toner cartridge incompatible with the machine has been installed. Install the correct toner cartridge. [Waste Toner Box Full] [Replace waste toner box by following the instruction.] The waste toner bottle is full. Replace the waste toner bottle. [Replace Imaging Unit] [Open front door and replace imaging unit by following the instruction.] The time to replace the imaging unit has been reached. Replace the appropriate imaging unit. [Replace Toner (x)] [Replace toner by following the instruction and close front door.] The time to replace the toner cartridge has been reached. Replace the appropriate toner cartridge. [Paper Size Mismatch] [Load xxx in Tray x or cancel job.] The paper size specified from the touch panel is different from the size of paper loaded in the paper tray. Load paper of the correct size into the indicated paper tray. Otherwise, cancel the job. [Paper Setting for Manual feed] [Load xx xxxx in bypass tray. Touch [Print].] Tray 1 has been selected for printing. Press [Print]. Otherwise, cancel the job. [Replenish paper] [Replenish paper or select other paper tray.] No other paper tray contains paper matching the specified type and size. (when [Auto Tray Switching] is set to [ON]) Load the specified paper into a paper tray. [Replenish paper] [Load paper in bypass tray or select other paper tray.] There is no paper in Tray 1 when printing with Tray 1 selected. (when [Auto Tray Switching] is set to [OFF]) Load paper into Tray 1. Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-43 [Replenish paper] [Replenish paper in Tray x or select other paper tray.] There is no paper in the paper tray selected for printing. (when [Auto Tray Switching] is set to [OFF]) Load paper into the specified paper tray. [Paper Size/Type Mismatch] [Load the following paper in tray x.] [Paper : xxxxx xxxxx] The type and size of the paper loaded into all of the paper trays are different. (when [Auto Tray Switching] is set to [ON]) Load the specified paper into a paper tray. [Output Tray Full] [Output tray full. Remove paper from the tray.] The output tray is full of paper. Remove the paper from the output tray. [Memory Full] [Insufficient memory Cancel the job.] The print data sent from the computer has caused the memory to become full. Cancel the job. [Stored Job Error] [Stored job specification not correct.] [Tray x] Tray 3/Tray 4 was specified for printing a stored job when Tray 3/Tray 4 is not installed on the machine. When trying to print a stored job, the installed memory had been changed since the job was stored. Install Tray 3/Tray 4, or install the memory that had been installed when the job was stored. [Job Registration Limit Over] [Registered jobs reached limit.] [Wait for job registration to complete.] Copy, scan or fax transmission operations were repeated while printing or transmissions could not be performed. Wait a while. The error is canceled. Message Cause Solution13-44 Status, error and service messages [Check Scanner Lock Lever] [Unlock the scanner lock lever.] The scanner is locked. Cancel the job. Unlock the scanner. For details, refer to “Unlocking the Scanner” on page 13-3. [Place Original on Glass] [Unable to scan from ADF with this original size.] The selected document size cannot be scanned from the ADF. Place the document on the original glass if it has a size that cannot be scanned from the ADF. [Place Original on ADF] [Place originals on the Document Feeder.] The document is not loaded into the ADF when scanning a document containing pages of different sizes. Load the document into ADF. [Matching Paper not Available] [Paper of matching size not available.] [xxxxx] Paper of the same size as the document cannot be selected with the [Auto] Paper setting selected in Copy mode. Load the paper tray with paper of the same size as the document. [Out of the Range of Auto Zoom] [Zoom ratio for paper size is outlying.] [Select other paper or zoom ratio.] An appropriate zoom ratio cannot be selected with the “Auto” Zoom setting selected. Specify a zoom ratio between 25% and 400%. [Place Original on Glass] [Unable to scan from ADF with this zoom ratio.] The selected zoom ratio (200% or more) cannot be used to scan from the ADF. Place the document on the original glass. [Duplex Copy Disabled] [Duplex copy disabled. Cancel it or select] [:A5-Legal/Plain Paper/ Thick 1-2] The selected paper type and size cannot be used with duplex (double-sided) printing. Cancel duplex (double-sided) printing, or change the paper type and size settings. Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-45 [Memory Full (Scan)] [Insufficient memory.] [The job is cancelled.] The memory capacity is insufficient. Otherwise, the SSD storage area is insufficient. Cancel the job. [HDD Capacity Over] [Insufficient HDD capacity.] [Delete unnecessary file.] [The job is cancelled.] There is not enough space available on the hard disk. Delete any unnecessary files. Cancel the job. [Document Registration Limit Over] [Saved documents in folder reached limit.] [The job is cancelled.] The number of image files on the hard disk has reached the maximum possible. Cancel the job. [Connection Failed] [Check if the destination is correct.] [The job is cancelled.] The machine failed to connect to the FTP server. Wait a while. The error is canceled. [Error Occurred during Writing] [Check whether it is write-protected or out of space.] The machine failed to write data to the USB memory device. Cancel the job. [Scan TX Failed] [Scan TX failed.] [Job is cancelled.] The scan transmission failed. (Does not appear with a broadcast transmission.) Wait a while. The error is canceled. [Counter reached its limit.] [The counter has reached its maximum allowance.] [Please delete the job.] The counter has reached the upper limit. Delete the job. Message Cause Solution13-46 Status, error and service messages [I-Fax RX failed] [Failed to complete the job due to an error while I-FAX RX.] [Check the log.] The job did not end normally because an error occurred during I-FAX RX. Check the log. [I-Fax TX failed] [I-FAX TX failed due to error.] [Redial will be attempted after predetermined time progress.] The job did not end normally because an error occurred during I-FAX TX. A document is sent again after the specified time period has lapsed. Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-47 Service messages These messages indicate a more serious problem that can only be corrected by a service representative. If one of these messages appears, turn the machine off, then on again. If the problem persists, contact your local vendor or authorized service provider. Message Cause Solution [Service Call] [Error occurred. Power OFF and ON, or contact Service with Trouble Code;xxxx] An error has been detected with the item indicated by “xxxx” in the service message. Restart the machine. This often clears the service message, and machine operation can resume. If the problem persists, contact the service representative.13-48 Status, error and service messages14 Installing Accessories14-2 Introduction Introduction Note Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty. " For details of accessories, visit our web site (http://konicaminolta.com) Lower Feeder Unit (Tray 3/Tray 4) 500-sheet tray included Working Table WT-P01 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or install an authentication device.Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 14-3 Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 You can install up to one optional lower feeder unit PF-P08 (Tray 3/4). The lower feeder unit PF-P08 increases your machine’s media feed capacity by 500 sheets. Kit Contents „ Lower feeder unit with a tray (500-sheet capacity)14-4 Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 Installing a Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 Note Since consumables are installed in the machine, be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills. 1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Prepare the lower feeder unit. " Be sure to place the lower feeder unit on a level surface. 3 Open the right side cover of the lower feeder unit. " The right side cover of the lower feeder must be opened before the feeder can be installed onto the machine.Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 14-5 4 With another person’s help, place the machine on top of the lower feeder unit, making sure that the positioning pins on the lower feeder unit correctly fit into the holes on the bottom of the machine. WARNING! This machine weighs approximately 39 kg (86 lbs) when it is fully loaded with consumables. The machine must be lifted by two people. 5 Close the right side cover of the lower feeder unit. 6 Reconnect all interface cables. 39 kg 86 lbs14-6 Working Table WT-P01 7 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the machine. 8 Declare Paper Source Unit 3/4 in the Windows printer driver [Properties]/ [Configure] tab. Working Table WT-P01 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is also used when the authentication device is installed. Kit Contents a—Working table b—Mounting plateWorking Table WT-P01 14-7 c—Four screws d—Two screws e—Two clamps " Use this part when installing the Authentication Device (IC card type). Store the part in a safe place for future use. Installing a Working Table WT-P01 1 Using a coin, turn the screws (c) to install the mounting plate. c b14-8 Working Table WT-P01 2 Tighten the screws (c) temporarily. 3 Install the working table. c 1 aWorking Table WT-P01 14-9 4 Using a coin, tighten the screws (c). 5 Using a coin, tighten the screws (d). d14-10 Working Table WT-P0115 Authentication device (IC card type)15-2 Using authentication device (IC card type) Using authentication device (IC card type) The authentication device (IC card type) is an IC card authentication system that reads the IC card to perform personal authentication. Using this system, you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this machine or execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. To use the authentication device, first register the card ID of the user in this machine. The registered user, who is authenticated with the card ID, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in to this machine with authentication. " Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication device. Doing so may cause the system to become unstable. " Do not leave the IC card within 40 mm of the card reader. Configuring this machine User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine. Configure the user authentication settings using PageScope Web Connection. " For details on using PageScope Web Connection, refer to "Reference Guide". 1 In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, click [Security] tab - [Authentication] - [General Settings].Configuring this machine 15-3 2 In [User Authentication], select [Device]. 3 Click [Apply] to save the settings. 4 In the [General Settings] page of [Authentication Device Settings], select [Authentication Type] and [IC Card Type]. – In [IC Card Type], specify the required IC card type. – For [Authentication Type], specify how to log in to this machine after registration. [Card Authentication]: Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card. [Card Authentication + Password]: Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password. – For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to “Logging in to this machine” on page 15-15.15-4 Registering a user 5 Click [Apply] to save the settings – If the card function setting page appears, specify the necessary settings. 6 Exit PageScope Web Connection. Then, proceed with the user registration. Registering a user Register a user using Data Administrator. The following two methods can be used. „ Connect the authentication device to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user and card at a time. „ Connect the authentication device to this machine, and associate the user, who has been registered using Data Administrator, with an IC card. Registering a user using Data Administrator To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication device, and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. " Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide. Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator 1 From the [Help] menu of Data Administrator, select [Version Information]. " This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x". If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed. 2 Click [Plug-in version].Registering a user 15-5 3 In [Plug-in information list], confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator. – This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x". Setup 1 Turn the Main Power Switch of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication device from this machine. 2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver). Connect the authentication device to the USB port of your computer. The [Found New Hardware] dialog box appears.15-6 Registering a user 3 Select [Locate and install driver software (recommended)]. 4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication device into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. 5 Click the [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].Registering a user 15-7 6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click [Next]. – When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click [Browse]. Select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder in the CD-ROM, and click [OK].15-8 Registering a user – Installation starts. 7 Click [Close]. Installation of the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe.Registering a user 15-9 9 Select a language, and then click [OK]. The installation program starts. 10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation. 11 Click [Next]. 12 Select [I accept the terms in the license agreement], and then click [Next].15-10 Registering a user 13 Click [Install]. 14 Click [Finish]. Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed, which completes the setup. User registration To register a user with Data Administrator, the computer and this machine must be connected via network. Also, to proceed to register a card with Data Administrator, the authentication device must be connected to the USB port of the computer. When registering a user, you can only enter the card ID and associate the user with card using the authentication device unit connected to this machine. 1 Turn the main power switch on.Registering a user 15-11 2 To register a user and card with Data Administrator at a time, connect the authentication device to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator. " Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication device. Doing so reduces the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure. " To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more. " Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication device. 3 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported. The Device Information window appears. – For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.15-12 Registering a user 4 In Select Function, select [Authentication settings] - [User authentication settings], and then click [Add]. 5 Select the desired template, and then click [OK]. The User settings window appears. 6 Enter the user name and password, and select the [IC card authentication] tab.Registering a user 15-13 – Enter the E-mail address and other information as required. 7 Place the IC card on the authentication device, and click [Start reading]. – To skip the card registration with Data Administrator, but to associate the card with user using the authentication device connected to this machine, select [Input the card ID directly] and enter the card ID number corresponding to the registered user. 8 Click [OK]. – Repeat steps 4 to 7 to register all users. 9 Click [Export to the device]15-14 Registering a user – Select the user name and click [Edit] to change the registered data. 10 Click [Write]. – Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentication device enabled. The registered user data is configured in this machine. 11 Click [OK]Logging in to this machine 15-15 12 If the authentication device is already connected to the computer, remove it, turn the main power of this machine off, and then connect the authentication device to this machine. " To turn the power switch of this machine off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. " When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged. If you only enter the card ID when registering a user, associate the user with card using the authentication device connected to this machine. Associating the user with card using authentication device When a user and card ID have been registered using Data Administrator, the user must be associated with the card in the Administrator Settings of the machine. 1 Press [Utility/Counter] key on the control panel of this machine to switch to the [Admin Settings] screen. 2 Press [Authentication Setting]. 3 Press [Card Authentication]. 4 Select a user to be registered, and press [OK]. – Press [All] to display all users. Press [Search] to extract target users with search characters. 5 Press [Edit]. – Press [Delete] to cancel the registration when IC card information is already registered. 6 Place the IC card on the authentication device, and press [OK]. – This associates the user with the IC card and registers the IC card for the user. Logging in to this machine The following explains how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication. „ To perform IC card authentication, register the information recorded in the IC card in advance.15-16 Logging in to this machine „ If an authentication failure recurs, the problem may be due to incorrect registration of IC card information. Register IC card information again. „ When [Card Authentication] is specified for [Authentication Type], a registered user is authenticated by simply placing the IC card. When [Card Authentication + Password] is specified, a registered user is authenticated by placing the IC card and entering the password. „ Press [User Name] and [Password] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication device. „ IC card authentication cannot be performed while the machine is in Power Save mode. After pressing the [Power Save] key to cancel Power Save mode, place the IC card on the authentication device and complete the authentication procedure. When [Card Authentication] is enabled 1 Press [Card Authentication]. " When using the ID & Print function with IC card authentication, select [Begin Printing] or [Access Basic Screen] as necessary. For details on the ID & Print function, refer to “ID & Print” on page 6-4. 2 Place the IC card on the authentication device. When [Card Authentication + Password] is enabled 1 Press [Card Authentication]. " When using the ID & Print function with IC card authentication, select [Begin Printing] or [Access Basic Screen] as necessary. For details on the ID & Print function, refer to “ID & Print” on page 6-4. 2 Place the IC card on the authentication device. 3 Press [Password] and enter the password. 4 Press [Login].AppendixA-2 Technical specifications Technical specifications Type Desktop integrated flatbed ADF printer Document holder Stationary (unit scanning) Photoconductor OPC Luminous source CCFL Dual Printing system Semiconductor laser beam scanning + dry-type electrophotographic method Developing system Dry mono-component SMT developing system Fusing system Lower free belt fusing system Resolution Scanning 600 dpi × 600 dpi (standard), 600 dpi × 1200 dpi (max.), 600 dpi × 300 dpi (when using ADF) Printing 600 dpi×600 dpi Document Type Sheets, books, and other three-dimensional objects Size Maximum Legal Weight Maximum 3 kg First print Black and white/color: 12.9 seconds or less (with plain A4 paper), 12.8 seconds or less (with plain Letter paper) First copy Black and white 10.1 seconds or less (with plain Letter/ A4 paper) Color 12 seconds or less (with plain Letter/A4 paper) Print speed/copy speed Simples (single-sided) Plain paper A4: 30.0 pages/minute (black and white/color) Letter: 31.6 pages/minute (black and white/color) Thick paper A4: 15.0 pages/minute (black and white/color) Letter: 15.8 pages/minute (black and white/color) Duplex (double-sided) Plain paper A4: 30.0 sides/minute (black and white/color) Letter: 31.6 sides/minute (black and white/color)Technical specifications A-3 Warm-up Time Time until the machine is ready to begin printing after being turned on (at room temperature (23°C)) 120 V: Avg. 45 seconds 220 V: Avg. 45 seconds 240 V: Avg. 45 seconds Paper sizes Tray 1 (manual feed tray)/ Tray 2 Paper width *1 : 92 to 216 mm Paper length: 148 to 356 mm *1 Envelopes with a width of 220 mm can be printed from Tray 1 (manual feed tray). Tray 3/ Tray4 (optional) A4, B5, Executive, Letter, Government Legal, Legal Paper types „ Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 ) „ Recycled (60 to 90 g/m2 ) „ Envelopes „ Letterhead „ Label „ Thick 1 (91 to 150 g/m2 ) „ Thick 2 (151 to 210 g/m2 ) „ Postcard „ Glossy 1 (100 to 128 g/m2 ) „ Glossy 2 (129 to 158 g/m2 ) „ Single side only (60 to 90 g/m2 ) „ Special paper (60 to 90 g/m2 )A-4 Technical specifications Paper capacity Tray 1 (manual feed tray) Plain/Recycled/Single side only/Special paper: 100 sheets Envelope: 10 envelopes Label/Postcard/Thick 1/Thick 2/Glossy 1/Glossy 2/Letterhead: 20 sheets Tray 2 Plain/Recycled/Single side only/Special paper: 250 sheets Label/Postcard/Thick 1/Thick 2/Glossy 1/Glossy 2/Letterhead: 20 sheets Tray 3/ Tray 4 (optional) Plain/Recycled/Single side only/Special paper: 500 sheets Image loss width Printing Leading edge/trailing edge/right edge/ left edge: 4.2 mm or less Copying Leading edge/trailing edge/right edge/ left edge: 4.0 mm or less Output capacity 250 sheets Operating temperature 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F) "Fluctuations of no more than 10°C (18°F) within an hour. Operating humidity 15 to 85% "Fluctuations of no more than 10% within an hour. Power supply 120 V, 60 Hz 220 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz Power consumption 120 V: 1200 W or less 220 to 240 V: 1300 W or less Power Save mode: 34 W or less Amperage 120 V: 10.9 A or less 220 to 240 V: 4.8 A or less Acoustic Noise Printing: 55 dB or less Copying: 57 dB or less Standby: 39 dB or lessTechnical specifications A-5 External dimensions Height: 550 mm (21.7") Width: 530 mm (20.9") Depth: 508 mm (20") "Excluding some protruding parts and the manual feed tray. Weight Approximately 34.6 kg (76.3 lb) (without consumables) Approximately 39.0 kg (86.0 lb) (with consumables) Interface USB 2.0 (High Speed) compliant, 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet, Host USB (USB device printing) Standard memory 1536 MB Hard disk 120 GB Machine life Maximum 400,000 pages and no more than 5 yearsA-6 Technical specifications Consumable Life Expectancy Chart User-Replaceable " The values shown above indicate the number of pages for simplex printing using A4/Letter-size media with 5% coverage. The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.), differences in the printing method, such as continuous printing or intermittent printing (when print jobs of one page are often printed), or the type of paper used, for example, thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and humidity of the operating environment. " Whether printing in color or black and white, color printers consume a small amount of each toner during the initialization operation when the machine is turned on or off and during automatic adjustments to maintain print quality. Even if an operating error occurred during black-and white printing, color toner is consumed and may need to be replaced. Item Average Life Expectancy Toner cartridge Standard in-box Cartridge: 6,000 pages or more (continuous) Replacement Cartridge (High-Capacity): 6,000 pages or more (continuous) Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/ IEC 19798. "The toner cartridge life will be shorter when using intermittent printing. Imaging unit 30,000 pages (continuous) 20,000 pages (2 pages per job) Waste toner bottle 36,000 pages (monochrome) (continuous) 9,000 pages (full color) (continuous) Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/ IEC 19798. Transfer roller 100,000 pages Transfer belt unit 100,000 pages (continuous) Fuser unit 100,000 pages (continuous)Technical specifications A-7 Service-Replaceable Item Average Life Expectancy Media feed roller 300,000 pagesA-8 Text input Text input The procedure for using the keyboard screen is described below. Entering text In the keyboard screen, press the character that you want to enter. „ To enter uppercase letters, press [ ]. „ To enter symbols, press [ ]. „ To enter special characters, such as accented characters, press [ ]. „ To delete the character to the right of the cursor, press [Delete]. „ To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ]. " Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad in the control panel. " To clear all entered text, press the [C] key.Our Concern for Environmental Protection A-9 Our Concern for Environmental Protection As an ENERGY STAR ® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR product? An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment.A-10 Our Concern for Environmental ProtectionIndex Index A-11 Numerics 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet Interface port ..........1-4 A Accessibility .................................3-2 Account track ....................2-15, 2-16 Address Book ...........................10-34 Address Registration ........3-8, 10-35 ADF ................................................1-4 ADF feed cover .............................1-4 Admin Settings ...........................3-21 Address Registration ................3-43 Administrator Registration .........3-43 Authentication Setting ...............3-44 Copy Settings ...........................3-48 Ethernet ....................................3-45 External Memory Print ..............3-48 Fax Settings ..............................3-63 Folder Settings ......................... 3-69 HDD Format ............................. 3-77 Job Timeout ............................. 3-48 Machine Settings ...................... 3-41 Maintenance Menu ................... 3-63 Paper Empty ............................ 3-78 Print Settings ............................ 3-49 Restore Defaults ...................... 3-77 Security Settings ...................... 3-70 Associating the user with card using authentication device ....... 15-15 C Configuring this machine ......... 15-2 Consumables Backup Battery ....................... 11-30 Fuser Unit ............................... 11-33 Imaging Unit ............................. 11-9 Toner Cartridge ........................ 11-2 Transfer Belt Unit ................... 11-22A-12 Index Transfer Roller ........................11-20 Waste Toner Bottle .................11-17 Control panel .........................1-4, 2-2 Copy mode ....................................7-2 Color Mode .................................7-9 Density ........................................7-8 Duplex/Combine .........................7-7 Finishing ...................................7-10 ID Copy .....................................7-13 Image Quality ............................7-15 Original Size ...............................7-4 Original Type ..............................7-9 Paper ..........................................7-5 Paper Margin ............................7-14 Proof Copy ................................7-10 Separate Scan ..........................7-11 Zoom ...........................................7-6 D Document feed tray ......................1-4 Document guide ...........................1-4 Document output tray ..................1-4 Document stopper ........................1-4 E External Memory ..........................6-3 F Front cover ....................................1-4 Fuser unit ......................................1-4 G Group .........................................10-34 I Imaging unit ..................................1-4 Interrupt .........................................8-2 L LINE (telephone line) jack ............1-4 Loading Media ............................4-14 Logging in to this machine ......15-15 Lower feeder unit ................ 1-4, 14-3 M Maintenance ............................... 12-2 Media Clearing misfeeds .................... 13-6 Loading .................................... 4-14 Path .......................................... 13-5 Preventing misfeeds ................. 13-4 Media Misfeed ADF ........................................ 13-13 Duplex .................................... 13-15 Fuser Unit ............................... 13-16 Transfer Roller ....................... 13-20 Tray 1 ..................................... 13-20 Tray 2 ....................................... 13-7 Tray 3/4 .................................. 13-11 Media Path .................................. 13-5 Messages Error messages ...................... 13-39 Operator messages ................ 13-41 Service messages .................. 13-47 Status messages .................... 13-38 Warning messages ................ 13-39 Meter Count .................................. 3-7 Misfeed problems .................... 13-23 Mode Memory ............................... 8-3 O Original cover pad ....................... 1-4 Original glass ............................... 1-4 Original Media Loading .................................... 4-36 Output tray .......................... 1-4, 4-32 P Page Margins ............................. 4-13 Part Names ................................... 1-4 Power connection ........................ 1-4 Power switch ................................ 1-4 Print Media ................................... 4-2 Envelopes ................................ 4-13 Storage ..................................... 4-33Index A-13 Print media type Envelope .....................................4-6 Glossy Media ..............................4-9 Label ...........................................4-7 Letterhead ...................................4-8 Plain Paper (Recycled Paper) .....4-4 Postcard ......................................4-8 Single Side Only .......................4-10 Special Paper ...........................4-11 Thick Stock .................................4-5 Print quality ...............................13-31 Print Setting Copy Settings ...........................3-15 Fax Settings ..............................3-20 Machine Settings ......................3-13 Print Settings ............................3-17 Scan Settings ............................3-16 Printable Area .............................4-12 Printer driver Advanced Tab .............................5-7 Basic Tab ....................................5-8 Cover Mode Tab .........................5-9 Displaying ...................................5-5 Layout Tab ..................................5-9 My Tab ........................................5-8 Other Tab ..................................5-11 Quality Tab ...............................5-10 Uninstalling .................................5-4 Watermark/Overlay Tab ..............5-9 Program .....................................10-34 Program Address .....................10-37 Proof Print .....................................6-2 R Rear cover .....................................1-4 Registering a user ......................15-4 Right door .....................................1-4 S Scan mode ....................................9-2 Scan to E-mail mode ..................10-3 Background/Density ..................10-8 Binary Division ........................10-12 Color Mode ...............................10-7 E-mail ......................................10-13 E-mail Encryption ................... 10-12 File Setting .................... 10-9, 10-10 Original Settings .............. 10-5, 10-6 Original Size ............................. 10-5 Original Type ............................ 10-7 Resolution ................................ 10-8 Send Use Signature ............... 10-12 Simplex/Duplex ........................ 10-4 Scan to Folder mode ............... 10-18 Background/Density ............... 10-23 Color Mode ............................. 10-22 File Setting .................. 10-24, 10-25 FTP ........................................ 10-29 HDD ....................................... 10-31 Original Settings .......... 10-21, 10-22 Original Size ........................... 10-20 Original Type .......................... 10-23 PC(SMB) ................................ 10-29 Resolution .............................. 10-24 Simplex/Duplex ...................... 10-20 URL Notification ..................... 10-27 URL Notification Destination ................................................ 10-27 USB Memory .......................... 10-30 Web Service Settings ............. 10-32 WebDAV ................................ 10-30 Scanner lock lever ....................... 1-4 Scanner unit ................................. 1-4 Service messages .................... 13-47 System Requirements ............... 1-13 T TEL (telephone) jack .................... 1-4 Text input ...................................... A-8 Toner cartridge ............................ 1-4 Touch panel .................................. 2-5 Transfer belt unit ......................... 1-4 Transfer roller .............................. 1-4 Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) ............ 1-4 Tray 2 ............................................ 1-4 Tray 3 ............................................ 1-4 Tray 4 ............................................ 1-4 Troubleshooting ........................ 13-1 Media Misfeeds ...................... 13-23 Status, error and service messages .................. 13-38A-14 Index TWAIN Driver .........................9-3, 9-8 U USB HOST port .............................1-4 USB port ........................................1-4 User authentication ....................2-15 Device authentication ...............2-15 External server authentication ...................................................2-15 User Settings ..............................3-10 Using authentication device (IC card type) .......................15-2 Utility Setting ................................3-1 W Waste toner bottle ........................1-4 When [Card Authentication + Password] is enabled .......15-16 When [Card Authentication] is enabled ...............................15-16 WIA Driver .....................................9-7 Working Table ......................1-4, 14-6Copyright A121-9561-13A 2009 2011. 1 http://konicaminolta.com User’s Guide [Facsimile]x-1 Thank You Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35. You have made an excellent choice. This User’s Guide describes operating procedures and precautions for the use of the Fax functions. Be sure to read this User’s Guide before starting any machine operations. In order to ensure correct use of the Fax functions, read this User’s Guide, and then store it where it can immediately be referred to when necessary. Trademarks KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright Notice Copyright © 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100- 0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.x-2 Manual Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.Contents Contents x-3 1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine Parts ................................................................................................ 1-2 Front View................................................................................................... 1-2 Rear View.................................................................................................... 1-2 About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 1-3 Touch panel .................................................................................................... 1-6 Home screen............................................................................................... 1-6 Initial Fax screen......................................................................................... 1-8 Keys and icons that appear in the screens ................................................. 1-9 User authentication and account track ..................................................... 1-11 With user authentication............................................................................ 1-11 Device authentication.......................................................................... 1-11 External server authentication ............................................................ 1-11 With account track..................................................................................... 1-12 Initial settings ............................................................................................... 1-13 G3 fax settings .......................................................................................... 1-13 [Date & Time Settings] ........................................................................ 1-13 [Fax Target]......................................................................................... 1-13 [Sender Settings] ................................................................................ 1-13 [Comm. Settings] ................................................................................ 1-13x-4 Contents Internet fax settings................................................................................... 1-14 [TCP/IP Settings] ................................................................................ 1-14 [Network Fax Functions Settings] ....................................................... 1-14 [E-mail TX (SMTP)]............................................................................. 1-14 [E-mail RX (POP)]............................................................................... 1-14 [Subject] .............................................................................................. 1-14 [Text] ................................................................................................... 1-14 Useful functions ........................................................................................... 1-15 2 Fax Settings screen ....................................................................................... 2-1 [Fax Settings] (User Settings) ...................................................................... 2-2 Settings ....................................................................................................... 2-2 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) ................................................................... 2-4 Settings ....................................................................................................... 2-8 [Sender Settings]......................................................................................... 2-8 [Header/Footer Settings]............................................................................. 2-9 [Comm. Settings]....................................................................................... 2-10 [Function Settings] .................................................................................... 2-12 [Fax Function Settings] ............................................................................. 2-13 [Memory RX] ............................................................................................. 2-15 [Closed Network RX Password]................................................................ 2-15 [Forward TX Settings] ............................................................................... 2-15 [Remote RX Settings]................................................................................ 2-16 [PC-Fax RX Settings]................................................................................ 2-16 [Nighttime RX Settings]............................................................................. 2-17 [PBX Connection Settings]........................................................................ 2-17 [Fax Report] .............................................................................................. 2-18 [List Print] .................................................................................................. 2-19 [Fax Target]............................................................................................... 2-20 [Fax Factory Default]................................................................................. 2-20 [Fax Image Initialized] ............................................................................... 2-20 3 Sending faxes ................................................................................................ 3-1 General operation .......................................................................................... 3-2 Positioning the original document ............................................................... 3-4 Using the ADF............................................................................................. 3-4 Using the original glass............................................................................... 3-5 Specifying destinations ................................................................................ 3-7 Selecting from the registered destinations.................................................. 3-7 Selecting from the Favorites list............................................................ 3-7 Selecting with an index search ............................................................. 3-7 Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ......................... 3-8 Directly typing in the address...................................................................... 3-8 G3 fax ................................................................................................... 3-8 Internet fax ............................................................................................ 3-9 Selecting from the log ................................................................................. 3-9Contents x-5 Selecting with an LDAP search................................................................. 3-10 Specifying scan settings ............................................................................. 3-11 [Original Type]........................................................................................... 3-11 [Resolution] ............................................................................................... 3-11 [Separate Scan] ........................................................................................ 3-11 Procedure ........................................................................................... 3-12 [Density] .................................................................................................... 3-12 [Background Removal].............................................................................. 3-12 [Sharpness]............................................................................................... 3-12 Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) ............................................ 3-13 [ECM OFF]................................................................................................ 3-13 [V34 OFF].................................................................................................. 3-13 [Check Dest. & Send]................................................................................ 3-13 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) ..................................................... 3-14 [Timer TX] ................................................................................................. 3-14 [Password TX]........................................................................................... 3-15 [F-Code TX]............................................................................................... 3-15 Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings .................................................... 3-17 Specifying document settings .................................................................... 3-18 [Original Size]............................................................................................ 3-18 [Long Original]........................................................................................... 3-18 [Simplex/Duplex] ....................................................................................... 3-18 [Binding Position] ...................................................................................... 3-19 Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions) ................. 3-20 Selecting a program destination ................................................................ 3-21 Faxing manually (G3 fax) ............................................................................ 3-22 If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) ........................... 3-23 Canceling a queued transmission ............................................................. 3-23 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification ................................... 3-24 G3 fax........................................................................................................ 3-24 Internet fax ................................................................................................ 3-24 4 Receiving faxes .............................................................................................. 4-1 Receiving G3 faxes ........................................................................................ 4-2 Automatic reception .................................................................................... 4-2 Manual reception......................................................................................... 4-3 With the control panel ........................................................................... 4-3 With an external telephone ................................................................... 4-3 DRPD.......................................................................................................... 4-4 [Ring Pattern] ........................................................................................ 4-4 Receiving Internet faxes ............................................................................... 4-5 Useful reception functions ........................................................................... 4-6 Polling reception (G3 fax)............................................................................ 4-6 Performing a polling reception .............................................................. 4-6 Memory reception (G3 fax/Internet fax) ...................................................... 4-7 Using received documents.................................................................... 4-7x-6 Contents Closed network reception (G3 fax).............................................................. 4-7 Fax forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) ........................................................... 4-8 E-mail forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) ....................................................... 4-8 Remote reception (G3 fax).......................................................................... 4-9 Giving the reception command from an external telephone ................. 4-9 Night reception (G3 fax/Internet fax)......................................................... 4-10 Printing received faxes ............................................................................... 4-11 Determining the paper size ....................................................................... 4-11 Step 1: Determining the most suitable paper size .............................. 4-11 Step 2: Determining the actual paper size used for printing ............... 4-12 Reducing and splitting............................................................................... 4-12 When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer............ 4-12 When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%] .......................... 4-13 When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF]............................... 4-13 When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]................................. 4-13 Adding reception information .................................................................... 4-14 5 Sending/receiving a PC fax ........................................................................... 5-1 Sending a PC fax ........................................................................................... 5-2 Transmission operation............................................................................... 5-2 Selecting a recipient from the phone book.................................................. 5-3 Selecting a recipient from the address book............................................... 5-4 Specifying transmission conditions ............................................................. 5-4 Creating a fax cover sheet .......................................................................... 5-5 [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box................................................. 5-5 [Basic] tab ............................................................................................. 5-6 [Recipient] tab ....................................................................................... 5-6 [Sender] tab .......................................................................................... 5-7 [Image] tab ............................................................................................ 5-7 Fax driver settings ......................................................................................... 5-8 [Printing Preferences] dialog box ................................................................ 5-8 [Properties] dialog box ................................................................................ 5-8 Common Settings........................................................................................ 5-9 [FAX] tab ................................................................................................... 5-10 [Basic] tab ................................................................................................. 5-11 [Authentication/Account Track] dialog box.......................................... 5-12 [Layout] tab ............................................................................................... 5-12 [Configure] tab........................................................................................... 5-13 [Settings] tab ............................................................................................. 5-13 Saving fax driver settings.......................................................................... 5-14 Saving the settings.............................................................................. 5-14 Editing settings.................................................................................... 5-14 Using the phone book ................................................................................. 5-15 Adding recipients to a phone book............................................................ 5-15 Editing a phone book ................................................................................ 5-16 Changing personal information ........................................................... 5-16Contents x-7 Changing group membership.............................................................. 5-17 Changing a group name ..................................................................... 5-17 Creating a folder ................................................................................. 5-17 Searching for personal information ..................................................... 5-17 Receiving a PC fax ....................................................................................... 5-18 Using received documents........................................................................ 5-18 Uninstalling the fax driver ........................................................................... 5-19 6 Registering destinations ............................................................................... 6-1 Destination registration ................................................................................ 6-2 Address Book.............................................................................................. 6-2 Group .......................................................................................................... 6-2 Program ...................................................................................................... 6-2 Registering an address book destination ................................................... 6-3 G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 6-3 Settings ................................................................................................. 6-4 Internet fax .................................................................................................. 6-5 Registering a program destination .............................................................. 6-6 7 Communication management ...................................................................... 7-1 Checking a job ............................................................................................... 7-2 Checking jobs being performed .................................................................. 7-2 Transmission jobs ................................................................................. 7-2 Reception jobs ...................................................................................... 7-2 Checking the job log.................................................................................... 7-3 Transmission jobs ................................................................................. 7-3 Reception jobs ...................................................................................... 7-3 Printing reports/lists ...................................................................................... 7-4 Types of reports .......................................................................................... 7-4 Types of lists ............................................................................................... 7-5 Activity Report............................................................................................. 7-6 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-6 TX Result Report......................................................................................... 7-7 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-7 Reservation TX Report................................................................................ 7-8 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-8 Broadcast Result Report............................................................................. 7-9 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-9 Broadcast Reservation Report.................................................................. 7-10 Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-10 PC-Fax TX Error Report............................................................................ 7-11 Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-11 I-Fax RX Error Report ............................................................................... 7-11 Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-11 Address Book List/Group List/Program List .............................................. 7-12 Fax Setup Information list ......................................................................... 7-12x-8 Contents 8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1 Problems when sending faxes ..................................................................... 8-2 G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 8-2 Internet fax .................................................................................................. 8-4 PC fax ......................................................................................................... 8-4 Problems when receiving faxes ................................................................... 8-6 G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 8-6 Internet fax .................................................................................................. 8-7 Other problems .............................................................................................. 8-8 Error messages .............................................................................................. 8-9 9 Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1 Technical specifications ...............................................................................A-2 G3 fax..........................................................................................................A-2 Internet fax ..................................................................................................A-2 PC fax (Fax driver)......................................................................................A-3 Text input ........................................................................................................A-4 Entering text................................................................................................A-4Introduction1-2 Machine Parts Machine Parts The parts of the machine referred to throughout this manual are illustrated below. Please take some time to become familiar with them. Front View 1: Control panel 2: Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 2-a: ADF feed cover 2-b: Document guide 2-c: Document feed tray 2-d: Document output tray 2-e: Document stopper 3: USB HOST port 4: Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) 5: Tray 2 6: Output tray 7: Scanner lock lever 8: Original glass 9: Original cover pad 10: Scanner unit Rear View 1: Power switch 2: Rear cover 3: Power connection 4: LINE (telephone line) jack 5: TEL (telephone) jack 6: 10Base-T/100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3) Ethernet interface port 7: USB port 4 3 2-e 2 2-c 2-d 5 1 2-a 2-b 10 9 6 7 8 1 3 2 4 6 5 7About the Control Panel 1-3 About the Control Panel No. Name Function 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 [Power Save] key/ indicator Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 3 [Fax] key/indicator Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key lights up in green. 4 [E-mail] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. While the machine is in Scan to E-mail mode, the indicator on the [E-mail] key lights up in green. 5 [Folder] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. While the machine is in Scan to Folder mode, the indicator on the [Folder] key lights up in green. 6 [Copy] key/indicator Press to enter Copy mode. While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 191817 16 14 15 13 1211101-4 About the Control Panel 7 [Reset] key Press to clear the settings (except programmed settings) of all displayed functions. 8 [Interrupt] key/indicator Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 9 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 10 [Start (Color)] key Press to start color copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 11 [Start] indicator Lights up in blue when copying, scanning or faxing can be performed. Lights up in orange when copying, scanning or faxing cannot be performed. 12 [Start (B&W)] key Press to start black-and-white copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies, a fax number, an e-mail address or a name. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [C] (clear) key Press to erase numbers or text. 15 [Error] indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred. Lights up in orange when the service representative is being called. 16 [Data] indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue while printing or when a print job is queued. 17 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the [Utility Settings] screen. In the [Utility Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the parameters in the [Accessibility], [Meter Count], [Address Registration], [User Settings] and [Admin Settings] screens. No. Name FunctionAbout the Control Panel 1-5 18 [Mode Memory] key Press to store the desired settings for copy, fax or scan operations. In addition, stored settings can be recalled. 19 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the [Access] key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to log on to this machine. While logged on, press the [Access] key to log off. No. Name Function1-6 Touch panel Touch panel Home screen No. Indication Description 1 Status Displays messages about the current operating status. 2 [Fax] Press to enter Fax mode. 3 [Scan to E-mail] Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. 4 [Scan to Folder] Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. 5 [Copy] Press to enter Copy mode. For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. 6 Date/time Shows the current date and time. 7 [USB/HDD] Press to print files on a USB memory device. Press to print a print job saved on hard disk. 1 10 6 9 7 8 2 3 4 5Touch panel 1-7 8 [Status] Press to view information on consumables and devices. 9 [Job] Press to check a print, transmission, reception or storing job. 10 Toner supply indicators Shows the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K). No. Indication Description1-8 Touch panel Initial Fax screen No. Indication Description 1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter a destination address. 3 [Others] Press to select a destination from the log. Documents saved on the machine’s memory can also be used. 4 [Off-Hook] Press to send or receive a fax manually. 5 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified destinations and settings. From this screen, specified destinations can also be deleted. 6 [Settings] Press to specify fax settings. 7 Press to return to the home screen. 7 5 6 1 2 3 4Touch panel 1-9 Keys and icons that appear in the screens Icon Description If the screen has multiple pages, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different page. If values appear between [ ] and [ ], the current page number/total number of pages is indicated. If there are tabs that are not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different tab. Press to adjust the image quality during a copy, scan or fax operation. Press [+] or [-] to change the entered value. Press when an error occurs to view the error message. Press to display descriptions of the various functions. A description of the current screen will be displayed. Press to display the address book. From this screen, you can select single destinations and group destinations registered in the address book. Appears while scanning and printing when making copies. Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning operations. Appears while printing with PC printing, received fax printing and report printing.1-10 Touch panel Appears when using a G3 fax connection. Appears when there are documents queued for a timer transmission. Appears when there are fax documents received with memory reception or PC faxing. Appears when data or documents are being sent from this unit. Appears when this unit is receiving data or documents. Appears when enhanced security settings have been applied. Appears when a USB memory device is connected. Icon DescriptionUser authentication and account track 1-11 User authentication and account track If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine, the user name or account name and the password must be entered in the Login screen in order to log on. The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or account track setting have been specified. " User authentication and account track settings are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. With user authentication Device authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. External server authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Specify a server for [Server]. 3 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. " If account track settings have been applied, account track will be performed after [Login] is pressed. However, if the machine has been set to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account had been specified for the user who is logging on, account track will not be performed. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].1-12 User authentication and account track With account track 1 Specify an account and password for [Account] and [Password]. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used.Initial settings 1-13 Initial settings After installation, settings must be specified for the following in order to use the fax functions. Be sure to specify these settings correctly, otherwise fax transmissions cannot be performed. G3 fax settings [Date & Time Settings] Specify the current date and time. For details on the settings, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. [Fax Target] Select the country where this machine is installed. For details on the settings, refer to “[Fax Target]” on page 2-20. [Sender Settings] Specify the name and fax number of the sender (this machine). For details on the settings, refer to “[Sender Settings]” on page 2-8. [Comm. Settings] Specify settings for the fax operating environment, such as the dialing method and reception mode. For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.1-14 Initial settings Internet fax settings " Settings for using Internet fax functions are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details on the settings, refer to the [Reference Guide]. [TCP/IP Settings] Specify the necessary settings in order to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment. [Network Fax Functions Settings] Enable Internet fax functions. [E-mail TX (SMTP)] Enable the e-mail (Internet fax) transmission function. In addition, specify the IP address of the SMTP server and the e-mail address of this machine. " When sending Internet faxes, [Binary Division] is always set to [OFF]. [E-mail RX (POP)] Enable the e-mail (Internet fax) reception function. In addition, specify the address, login name and password for the POP server. [Subject] Register a subject for the e-mail (Internet fax). The subject can also be specified from the control panel before an Internet fax is sent. For details, refer to “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17. [Text] Register the message text for the e-mail (Internet fax). The message text can also be specified from the control panel before an Internet fax is sent. For details, refer to “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17.Useful functions 1-15 Useful functions By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent, recipients can be recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent. „ Address Book Register information of destinations (fax numbers and e-mail addresses, etc.) where data is frequently sent. „ Group Register multiple address book destinations together in a group. „ Program Register destinations where faxes are frequently sent together with fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens). " For details on registering destinations, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1.1-16 Useful functionsFax Settings screen2-2 [Fax Settings] (User Settings) [Fax Settings] (User Settings) The parameters available on the [Fax Settings] screen ([User Settings]) are described below. Settings 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Fax Settings]. The Fax Settings screen appears. " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Remote RX Enabled] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the remote reception function is used. [Remote RX No.] Type in the number (2 digits) for performing remote reception. Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. Print Settings Machine Settings Scan Settings Copy Settings User Settings Default Fax Settings Fax Settings Display Fax Activity[Fax Settings] (User Settings) 2-3 [Default Fax Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting] Select the default settings for the parameters on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens that are selected when the machine is turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. [Factory Default]: The default settings are the manufacturer’s default settings. [Current Setting]: The default settings are the current settings. [Display Fax Activity] Select whether or not transmission/reception information is displayed in the control panel while sending/receiving G3 faxes. [Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the number of originals, address, ID and number of destinations are displayed while G3 faxes are being sent. [Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the number of originals and ID are displayed while G3 faxes are being received. Item Description2-4 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) The parameters available on the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) are described below. Machine Settings Sender Settings Sender Administrator Registration Authentication Setting Admin Settings Address Registration Ethernet Sender Fax No. External Memory Print Job Timeout Copy Settings Fax Settings Security Settings Folder Settings Restore Defaults Print Settings Header/Footer Settings Header Position Footer Position Fax TX Header Name Maintenance Menu[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-5 Paper Empty HDD Format Comm. Settings PB/DP Number of RX Call Rings RX Mode Redial Interval Redial Line Monitor Volume Line Monitor Manual RX V.34 OFF Ring Pattern Function Settings Inch Paper Priority Print Paper Size Paper Priority Min. Reduction for RX Print Tray Selection for RX Print Duplex Print (RX) Print Separate Fax Pages Restriction Code Settings2-6 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) Fax Function Settings F-Code TX Confirm Addr (TX) Dest. Check Display Func. Restrict Fax TX Confirm Addr (Register) Restrict PC-Fax TX Restrict Fax RX Memory RX Memory RX Password Forward TX Settings Forward TX Setting Forward & Print Forwarding Address Closed Network RX Password Enable Password Restrict Internet Fax TX Restrict Internet Fax RX[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-7 Remote RX Settings Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. Nighttime RX Settings Night Fax RX Print Night RX End Time Night RX Start Time PC-Fax RX Settings PC-Fax RX Setting PC-Fax RX Print PBX Connection Settings PBX Function PBX Number Fax Report Activity Report TX Result Report Image TX Result Report PC-Fax TX Error Report TX Reserve Broadcast Result Report Broadcast Report TX Result Report Screen2-8 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) Settings 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Admin Settings]. 3 Type in the administrator password (Default: 12345678), and then press [OK]. The Admin Settings screen appears. 4 Press [Fax Settings]. The Fax Settings screen appears. " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Sender Settings] Item Description [Sender] Type in the sender’s (this machine’s) name. (up to 30 bytes) The information specified here is printed as the transmitting subscriber identification in the header of sent documents. [Sender Fax No.] Type in the fax number of this machine. (up to 20 characters) The information specified here is printed as the transmitting subscriber identification in the header of sent documents. List Print Fax Setup Pg Fax Image Initialized Fax Factory Default Fax Target I-Fax RX Error Report[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-9 [Header/Footer Settings] Item Description [Header Position] Settings [Inside Body Text] / [Outside Body Text] / [OFF] Select the position for the transmitting subscriber identification added to documents sent from this machine. The added transmitting subscriber identification is printed as a part of the image in the received document. If [OFF] is selected, the transmitting subscriber information is not added. (For 120V model, [OFF] is not available.) "When transmitting subscriber identification is added while sending Internet faxes, the information is added inside the document regardless of the selected setting. [Fax TX Header Name] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select the information added as the transmitting subscriber identification. [ON]: Adds the sender’s name, recipient’s fax number (To: xxxxx), date/time that transmission begins, communication number and page number/total number of pages as the transmitting subscriber identification. [OFF]: Adds the sender’s name, sender’s fax number, date/time that transmission begins, communication number and page number/total number of pages as the transmitting subscriber identification. "The recipient's address will not be added when sending Internet faxes, even if [ON] is selected.2-10 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Comm. Settings] [Footer Position] Settings [Inside Body Text] / [Outside Body Text] / [RX Ft. OFF] Select the position for the reception information (reception time and reception number) printed in documents received by this machine. If [RX Ft. OFF] is selected, the reception information is not printed. Item Description [PB/DP] Settings [PB] / [10pps] / [20pps] Select the dialing method according to the operating environment being used. "The default setting differs depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. If [Fax Target] is set to a country that is not compatible with [20pps], [20pps] does not appear. [RX Mode] Settings [Auto RX] / [Manual RX] / [DRPD] Select the reception method. [Auto RX]: Automatic reception [Manual RX]: Manual reception; Select this setting if an external telephone is connected and the phone line is often busy, or if remote reception is to be used. [DRPD]: If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns available, the incoming call is automatically received as a fax. If [DRPD] is selected, select the ring pattern for faxing with [Ring Pattern]. [Number of RX Call Rings] Settings [1] - [15] ([2]) Specify how many rings are produced until the machine begins receiving the fax when it is set for automatic reception. "The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-11 [Redial] Settings [0] - [10] ([1]) Specify the number of times this machine automatically redials when a fax could not be sent correctly, for example, if the line is busy or a communication error occurred. "The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. [Redial Interval] Settings [2] - [15] ([2]) Select the length of the interval (in minutes) between redial attempts when the machine automatically redials. "The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. [Line Monitor] Settings [OFF] / [Until Connection Complete] / [Until Transmission Complete] Select whether the line monitoring tone is produced during communication. [OFF]: No line monitoring tone is produced. [Until Connection Complete]: The line monitoring tone is produced until the connection with the destination has been completed after dialing. [Until Transmission Complete]: The line monitoring tone is produced until the fax transmission has been completed after dialing. [Line Monitor Volume] Settings [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select the volume of the line monitoring tone. [Ring Pattern] Settings [Normal Ring] / [Double] / [Triple 1] / [Triple 2] Select the ring pattern for faxing when [RX Mode] is set to [DRPD]. "For details on the settings, refer to “[Ring Pattern]” on page 4-4. Item Description2-12 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Function Settings] [Manual RX V.34 OFF] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not V.34 is automatically turned off during manual reception. Item Description [Inch Paper Priority] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not paper sizes in inches are given priority when printing received documents. "The default setting is [ON] for 120V model, and [OFF] for other models. [Paper Priority] Settings [Auto Select] / [Fixed Size] / [Size Priority] Specify the priority for the paper drawers when printing received documents. [Auto Select]: Selects the paper automatically. [Fixed Size]: Prints only on paper of the specified size. [Size Priority]: Prints on paper with the size given priority. If no paper size has been given priority, paper with the closest size is used for printing. [Print Paper Size] Settings [Letter] / [Legal] / [Oficio] / [A4] Select the size of paper used for printing received documents. In order for this parameter to be available, [Tray Selection for RX Print] must be set to [Auto]. "The default setting is [Letter] for 120V model, and [A4] for other models. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-13 [Fax Function Settings] [Tray Selection for RX Print] Settings [Auto] / [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Select the paper drawer to be used when a specific paper drawer is used for printing received documents. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed. [Min. Reduction for RX Print] Settings [87%] - [96%] / [100%] Specify the reduction ratio (%) used for printing received documents. [Print Separate Fax Pages] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not pages are split when the received document is longer than the standard paper size. When [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON], this parameter does not appear. [Duplex Print (RX)] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not received documents are printed on both sides of paper. When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON], this parameter does not appear. Item Description [F-Code TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not F-code transmissions are used. [Dest. Check Display Func.] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the list of specified destinations is printed before the fax is sent. Item Description2-14 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Cofirm Addr (TX)] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the destination address must be entered a second time for confirmation when directly typing in the address. Requiring that the address be entered twice reduces misdirected faxes caused by the address being mistyped. [Cofirm Addr (Register)] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the destination address must be entered a second time for confirmation when registering destinations. Requiring that the address be entered twice prevents incorrect programming caused by the address being mistyped. [Restrict Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax transmissions. [Restrict Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax receptions. [Restrict PC-Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit PC fax transmissions. [Restrict Internet Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit transmission of Internet faxes. [Restrict Internet Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit reception of Internet faxes. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-15 [Memory RX] " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [PC-Fax RX Settings], [Forward TX Settings] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens. [Closed Network RX Password] [Forward TX Settings] Item Description [Memory RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the memory reception function is used. If [ON] is selected, received documents are saved in the machine’s memory and are not automatically printed. [Password] Specify the password (up to 8 digits) for allowing documents saved in the memory to be used. Item Description [Enable] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not the closed network reception function is used. [Password] Specify the password (4 digits) for allowing the machine to be used with closed network receptions. Item Description [Forward TX Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the memory reception function is used. [Forwarding Address] Type in the fax number of the forwarding destination. Press to select a registered destination. "A received document can also be forwarded to an e-mail address. To forward documents to an e-mail address, select the forwarding destination from the address book.2-16 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [PC-Fax RX Settings], [Memory RX] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens. [Remote RX Settings] [PC-Fax RX Settings] " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [Forward TX Settings], [Memory RX] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens. [Forward & Print] Settings [Forward & Print] / [Forward & Print (If TX Fails)] Select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded. [Forward & Print]: Normally prints the fax at the same time that is forwarded. [Forward & Print (If TX Fails)]: Prints the fax if forwarding failed. Item Description [Remote RX Enabled] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the remote reception function is used. [Remote RX No.] Type in the remote reception number (2 digits) for performing remote reception. Item Description [PC-Fax RX Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the PC fax reception function is used. [PC-Fax RX Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a PC fax is printed automatically after it is received. However, if the fax is saved with the memory reception function, it is not automatically printed. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-17 [Nighttime RX Settings] " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [Forward TX Settings], [Memory RX] and [PC-Fax RX Settings] screens. [PBX Connection Settings] Item Description [Night Fax RX Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit printing of documents received during the night. [Night RX Start Time] Specify the start time for the night. [Night RX End Time] Specify the end time for the night. Item Description [PBX Function] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a PBX line is connected. [PBX Number] Specify the outside line access number. The outside line access number specified here will be dialed before the fax numbers registered with address book destinations and program destinations.2-18 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Fax Report] Item Description [Activity Report] Specify the settings for printing activity reports. [Output Settings] Settings [Every 100 comm.] / [Every Day] / [100/Daily] / [No] Select the conditions for printing. [Every 100 comm.]: Prints after every 100 communication jobs. [Every Day]: Prints at the specified time every day. [100/Daily]: Prints at the specified time every day and after every 100 communication jobs. [No]: Is not printed. [Output Time Setting] Specify the time for printing the report when [Output Settings] is set to [Every day] or [100/ Daily]. [Activity Report] Settings [Journal 100] / [Within 24 Hours] Select a setting when [Output Settings] is set to [Every day] or [100/Daily]. [Journal 100]: Prints the information for the 100 most recent communication jobs. [Within 24 Hours]: Prints the information for a maximum 100 communication jobs within the past 24 hours. [TX Result Report] Settings [Always] / [If TX Fails] / [No] Select the conditions for printing the transmission results report. [TX Result Report Image] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an image of the first page of the document is printed in the transmission results report. [TX Reserve] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a report is printed with timer transmissions.[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-19 [List Print] [PC-Fax TX Error Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an error report is printed with PC fax transmissions. [Broadcast Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a results report is printed with broadcast transmissions. [Broadcast Result Report] Settings [All Dest.] / [Mode Once] Select the conditions for printing the results report for broadcast transmissions. [All Dest.]: Prints the report if transmission to all destinations was completed. [Mode Once]: Prints a report for each destination if transmission could not be completed, even after redialing. [TX Result Report Screen] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to request confirmation for printing a transmission results report before beginning the transmission. [I-Fax RX Error Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to print a reception error report when reception of an Internet fax fails. Item Description [Fax Setup Pg] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] A list of fax-related settings will be printed. To print, press [Print], and then press [OK].2-20 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Fax Target] [Fax Factory Default] " The address book is not initialized. [Fax Image Initialized] " The address book is not initialized. Description Settings [U.S.A.] / [Canada] / [Mexico] / [Austria] / [Belgium] / [Denmark] / [Finland] / [France] / [Germany] / [Greece] / [Ireland] / [Italy] / [The Netherlands] / [Norway] / [Poland] / [Portugal] / [Spain] / [Sweden] / [Switzerland] / [The U.K.] / [Russia] / [Argentina] / [Brazil] / [South Africa] / [Australia] / [New Zealand] / [China] / [Hong Kong] / [Malaysia] / [Singapore] / [Korea] / [Taiwan] / [Israel] / [Japan] / [Saudi Arabia] / [Turkey] / [Hungary] / [Slovakia] / [Vietnam] / [The Czech Republic] / [The Philippines] / [Europe] Select the country where this machine is installed. Select the setting when installing the machine. Description Settings [Yes] / [No] The fax settings are reset to those specified when the machine was shipped from the manufacturer. To return all settings to their factory default, press [Yes], and then press [OK]. Description Settings [Yes] / [No] All saved fax data (jobs) is initialized. To initialize, press [Yes], and then press [OK]. The machine is automatically restarted.Sending faxes3-2 General operation General operation The general procedure for sending G3 faxes and Internet faxes is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on page 1-8. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the original document” on page 3-4. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 3-7. – In the initial Fax screen, press [Mode Check] to check or change the specified destinations. 4 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens. – For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 3-11. – For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13, “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14 and “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17.General operation 3-3 – For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18. 5 Press the [Start] key. – The fax is sent in black and white regardless of whether the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key is pressed. After all document pages have been scanned, the fax is sent. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 3-18. " If the G3 fax cannot be sent, for example, because the recipient’s line is busy, the machine will redial the fax number and try again to send the fax. For details on redialing, refer to “If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax)” on page 3-23. " If the fax could not be sent, a transmission results report is printed (if the machine has been set to print the transmission results report). For details on the transmission results report, refer to “Printing reports/ lists” on page 7-4. " To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax transmission queued for redialing, delete the job from the Job screen. For details, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23. " If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned, scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. " Internet fax documents will be scanned and sent with the following attributes. · File type: Monochrome (TIFF) · Coding method: TIFF-S (MH) 3-4 Positioning the original document Positioning the original document With this machine, the document can be placed in the ADF or on the original glass. Using the ADF If the ADF is used, documents containing multiple pages can be automatically scanned and faxed. In addition, double-sided documents can also be faxed. 1 Place the document face up in the ADF. 2 Slide the document guides against the edges of the document. " Lower the document stopper when scanning Legal-size paper with the ADF. " If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF, the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Separate Scan]” on page 3-11. " A document containing a combination of Letter- and Legal-size pages can be scanned with the ADF. When scanning a document containing a combination of Letter- and Legal-size pages, select “Legal” as the size of the document to be scanned. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 3-18. " Do not load original documents that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples.Positioning the original document 3-5 " Do not load more than 50 sheets; otherwise an original document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. " If the original document is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight, or an original document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. " Do not open the ADF cover while documents loaded into the ADF are being scanned. Using the original glass If the original glass is used, documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF (thick documents, such as a book, or a document on thin paper) can be scanned and faxed. With the original glass, only one document page at a time can be scanned. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Place the document face down on the original glass, aligning the document with the document scales.3-6 Positioning the original document 3 Carefully close the ADF. " When using the original glass to scan a document containing multiple pages, the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Separate Scan]” on page 3-11.Specifying destinations 3-7 Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations. „ “Selecting from the registered destinations” on page 3-7 „ “Directly typing in the address” on page 3-8 „ “Selecting from the log” on page 3-9 „ “Selecting with an LDAP search” on page 3-10 Selecting from the registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine. " In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites]. As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Fax screen is displayed. Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent. " The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press . 2 Press the desired index tab to search the destinations. – If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the desired tab appears. – To select a group destination, press [Group].3-8 Specifying destinations 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent. Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press . 2 Press [Search]. 3 Select the search method. – [Type]: Select the destination type (Fax, E-mail, etc.). – [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for. Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a list of the search results. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent. 5 Press [OK]. Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type in the address. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Direct Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. G3 fax 1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [Fax]. 3 Type in the fax number. – [Tone]: Press to send push-button tones when pulse dialing is being used. [T] appears in the screen. – [Pause]: Press to insert a pause when dialing. [P] appears in the screen. – [-]: Press to insert a dash as a separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the dialing.Specifying destinations 3-9 4 Press [OK]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], the fax number must be entered again after [OK] is pressed. " To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, press [Next Dest.] after the fax number was entered, and then type in the next fax number. " If the machine is being used with a PBX, press [Pause] after the outside line access number (for example, [0]) for reliable dialing when transmitting from an inside line to an outside line. Internet fax 1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [Internet Fax]. 3 Type in the E-mail address. 4 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Others]. 2 Press [Log]. 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. " Only addresses that have been directly typed in remain in the log. " Selecting destinations from the log is possible only for jobs with a single destination. " When the machine is turned off, the transmission log is cleared. " If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log.3-10 Specifying destinations " The following types of transmissions are not recorded in the log. · PC faxing · Fax forwarding and E-mail forwarding · Transmissions recovered after the machine is turned off, then on again · Transmissions where the address is directly typed in while the machine is off-hook Selecting with an LDAP search Destinations can be selected after searching an LDAP server. This can be used if the network contains an LDAP server, for example, for user management. " In order to perform an LDAP search, the LDAP server must be registered with the machine. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP server. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press . 2 Press [LDAP]. 3 Select the search method, and then perform the search. – [Search]: Type in the keyword to be searched for. Press [OK] to begin searching. – [Advanced Search]: Select the appropriate conditions, and then type in the keyword to be searched for. Press [OK] to begin searching. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To register an address in the address book, select the address from the address list, and then press [Save]. – To view the details of an address, select the address from the address list, and then press [Details]. – To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent.Specifying scan settings 3-11 Specifying scan settings From the [Scan Settings] screen, settings for scanning the document can be specified. [Original Type] Select the appropriate image quality setting according to your document. [Resolution] Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned. " A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. " Only [Standard] and [Fine] are available for sending Internet faxes. If [Super Fine] was selected, the setting will change to [Fine] before the Internet fax is sent. [Separate Scan] A document can be divided and scanned separately. The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages, and then all scanned pages can be faxed as a single document. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos. [Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos. Item Description [Standard] The document will be scanned at 200 × 100 dpi. [Fine] The document will be scanned at 200 × 200 dpi. [Super Fine] (G3 fax only) The document will be scanned at 400 × 400 dpi.3-12 Specifying scan settings Procedure 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Press [Settings]. 5 Press [Scan Settings]. 6 Set [Separate Scan] to [ON]. 7 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned. 8 Load the next batch of document pages, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this operation until all document pages have been scanned. – Press [Change Settings] to change the scan settings. 9 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish]. [Density] Select the density at which the document is to be scanned. Nine density levels are available. Select the appropriate density setting according to your document. [Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned. Nine density levels are available for the background color. [Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness, select a setting toward “+”. Seven sharpness levels are available.Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) 3-13 Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) With [Line Settings] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, settings for the transmission line can be specified. [ECM OFF] The error correction mode (ECM) is turned off when data is being sent. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other while confirming that the sent data is free of errors. Therefore, communication can be free of disturbances caused by telephone line noise, etc. If noise frequently occurs, it may take a slightly longer time to complete a communication, compared with when ECM is turned off. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on ECM. " This setting cannot be used together with polling reception. " If [V34 OFF] is set to [No], [ECM OFF] cannot be set to [Yes]. [V34 OFF] V.34 is a communication mode used with super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line through a PBX, it may not be possible to establish communication in super G3 mode due to the condition of the telephone line. In this case, it is recommended that V.34 be turned off before sending data. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on the V.34 mode. " This setting cannot be used together with polling reception. [Check Dest. & Send] The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI), and the data is sent only if the fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail, resulting in a transmission error. " In order to use this function, the recipient’s fax number must be specified on their fax machine.3-14 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) With [Comm. Method] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, useful transmission functions can be specified. " For details on [Polling RX], refer to “Polling reception (G3 fax)” on page 4-6. [Timer TX] A timer transmission can be specified. Timer transmission is the function for sending a fax at a specified time. Multiple destinations can be specified. A maximum of 16 timer transmissions (including transmissions being redialed) can be queued. To send a timer transmission, press [Yes], and then use the keypad to type in the transmission time. The time can be set in hours and minutes. The day cannot be specified. " In order to send a timer transmission, the date and time must first be specified on the machine. For details on the date and time settings, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. " This function cannot be used together with Internet fax transmissions or polling reception. " If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information. " If the machine is off at the specified TX Start Time, the fax will be sent the next time that the machine is turned on. " For details on canceling a queued transmission job, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23.Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) 3-15 [Password TX] A password transmission can be specified. Password transmission is the function for sending a fax with a password applied. This function can be used if the recipient’s fax machine is compatible with closed network receptions. If the recipient’s fax machine is set for closed network receptions, this machine must transmit with the same password as the closed network reception password specified on the recipient’s machine. To send a password transmission, press [Yes], and then use the keypad to type in the closed network reception password specified on the recipient’s fax machine. " If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information. " This function cannot be used together with F-code transmissions or polling reception. [F-Code TX] An F-code transmission can be specified. F-code transmissions are the function for sending a fax to a specific recipient’s box with a specified Sub address and password. To send an F-code transmission, press [Yes]. Press [Sub Address] or [Password], and then use the keypad to type in the corresponding settings. The following types of recipient boxes are available. „ Confidential TX The fax will be sent to a confidential box on the recipient’s machine. Type in the box number for [Sub Address], and type in the communication password for [Password]. „ Relay TX The fax will be sent to a relay box if the recipient’s machine is equipped with a relay transmission function. Type in the relay box number for [Sub Address], and type in the relay password for [Password]. " This function can be used if the recipient’s fax machine is compatible with F-codes. " Confidential communication is the function for using a confidential box to receive a document to be sent to a specific person. In order to send a confidential transmission from this machine, a confidential box and password must be specified on the recipient’s fax machine.3-16 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) " Relay transmission is the function for sending a document to a relay station, which then broadcasts the document to the recipients. In order to send a relay transmission, a relay box number, relay password and destination group number must be specified on the recipient’s machine used as a relay station. This machine cannot be used as a relay station. " This function cannot be used together with password transmissions or polling reception. " If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information.Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings 3-17 Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings With [E-mail Settings] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, specify the file name, subject, From address and body text for sending Internet fax (e-mail) messages. " For details on registering information from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Item Description [File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data. [Subject] Type in the subject for e-mail messages. Subject text registered with PageScope Web Connection can also be selected. [From] Specify the sender's address. Select [Administrator E-mail Addr.] or [User Address], or type it in directly. [Administrator E-mail Addr.] can be selected if the administrator e-mail address has been registered. [User Address] can be selected if an e-mail address has been registered for the currently authenticated user. [Body] Type in the body text for the e-mail message. Body text registered with PageScope Web Connection can also be selected.3-18 Specifying document settings Specifying document settings From the [Original Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the document to be faxed. [Original Size] Specify the size of the document that is to be faxed. [Long Original] Select whether or not a long original document is to be sent. A document with a maximum length of 1,000 mm can be sent. To send a long document, press [ON]. " Long documents can only be scanned using the ADF. Double-sided long documents cannot be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used. Item Description [Standard Size] When sending a document of a standard size, press [Standard Size], and then select the document size. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 148 mm and 356 mm (5.83 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 140 mm and 216 mm (5.51 inches and 8.50 inches). Item Description [1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided document. [2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a double-sided document.Specifying document settings 3-19 [Binding Position] Specify the binding position when sending a double-sided document using the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left. [Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a double-sided document with a cover page. Only the front side of the first page will be scanned, and then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned. Item Description [Left Bind] Select this setting for binding at the left. [Top Bind] Select this setting for binding at the top. [Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position. If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm (11.69 inches), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.3-20 Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions) Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions) The same document can be sent to multiple destinations with a single operation. If all of the desired destinations are selected when sending the fax, the same document will be sent to each of the specified destinations. A broadcast transmission can be specified as a timer transmission. Use any of the following methods to specify destinations for broadcast transmissions. „ Selecting from registered destinations (up to 500 destinations) (page 3-7) „ Directly typing in the address (up to 100 destinations, including the destinations with an LDAP search) (page 3-8) „ Selecting with an LDAP search (up to 100 destinations, including the destinations with direct input) (page 3-10) „ Selecting a group destination (page 3-7) „ Selecting a program destination (page 3-21) " For details on destination types and their registration procedures, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. " The results of the broadcast transmission can be viewed in the Broadcast Result Report. For details, refer to “Broadcast Result Report” on page 7-9. " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the document cannot be sent with the [Super Fine] Resolution setting (400 × 400 dpi). " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the timer transmission function cannot be used. " Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP server.Selecting a program destination 3-21 Selecting a program destination A fax can be sent with a program destination registered on the machine. Program destinations are registered with destinations where faxes are frequently sent together with fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens) allowing a fax to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on page 1-8. 2 Position the document to be faxed. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the original document” on page 3-4. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK]. The settings and destination addresses are recalled. 5 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned and transmission begins. " In order to select a program destination, the program destination must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 6-6. " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the document cannot be sent with the [Super Fine] Resolution setting (400 × 400 dpi). " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the timer transmission function cannot be used.3-22 Faxing manually (G3 fax) Faxing manually (G3 fax) If a fax is sent manually, the status of the recipient can be confirmed before the fax is sent. In order to send a fax manually, the following requirements must be met. „ The document cannot be divided and scanned separately. If the original glass is being used, the document being sent can contain only one page. „ F-code transmissions, timer transmissions, password transmissions and polling reception are not being performed. „ Automatic redialing cannot be used. „ Multiple destinations cannot be specified. The procedure for a manual transmission with [Off-Hook] pressed is described below. " If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], [Off-Hook] cannot be used. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on page 1-8. 2 Position the document to be faxed. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the original document” on page 3-4. 3 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens. – For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 3-11. – For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13 and “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14. – For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18. 4 Press [Off-Hook]. 5 Make sure that [Send] is selected. 6 Specify the destination. – Press to select a registered destination. – Press the [Mode Memory] key to select a program destination. 7 After the fax answer tone is heard, press [Start] or press the [Start] key. The document is scanned and transmission begins.If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) 3-23 If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) If the fax could not be sent correctly, for example, if the line is busy or a communication error occurred, a message appears, informing that the number will be redialed after a certain length of time. A fax that could not be sent becomes a queued transmission, and the machine automatically redials the number after a certain length of time has passed. If necessary, the number of redial attempts and the interval between them can be specified. For details, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. " Automatic redialing cannot be used if the fax is being sent manually. " For details on canceling a transmission being redialed, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23. " For details on problems that may occur during transmission, refer to “Problems when sending faxes” on page 8-2. Canceling a queued transmission To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax transmission queued for redialing, delete the job from the Job screen. 1 In the home screen, press [Job]. – For details on the home screen, refer to “Home screen” on page 1-6. 2 Press [Send]. A list of queued transmission jobs appears. 3 Select the job to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. 4 Press [Yes], and then press [OK]. The job is deleted. " For details on the Job screen, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide].3-24 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification Adding the transmitting subscriber identification The transmitting subscriber identification can be added to documents sent from this machine. This information is printed in the header of the received document as a part of the image. " For details on the settings for specifying where to print the transmitting subscriber identification and for printing the recipient information in the transmitting subscriber identification, refer to “[Header/Footer Settings]” on page 2-9. G3 fax The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identification. „ Sender’s name „ Fax numbers of the sender or recipient „ Date/time that transmission begins „ Communication number „ Page number/total number of pages " For details on the registering the name and fax number of the sender (this machine), refer to “[Sender Settings]” on page 2-8. " During a manual transmission, the total number of pages is not printed in the transmitting subscriber identification. Internet fax The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identification. „ From address of the Internet fax (E-mail) „ Date/time that transmission begins „ Communication number „ Page number/total number of pages " When sending Internet faxes, transmitting subscriber identification is added inside the document.Receiving faxes4-2 Receiving G3 faxes Receiving G3 faxes The following reception modes are available with this machine. Select the one that fits your environment. „ “Automatic reception” on page 4-2 „ “Manual reception” on page 4-3 „ “DRPD” on page 4-4 " When the machine is turned off, faxes cannot be received. Therefore, be sure to leave the machine turned on. Automatic reception Select this mode when using the telephone line as a dedicated fax line. When the specified number of rings is detected, fax reception begins automatically. In order to receive faxes automatically, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Auto RX]. „ With [Comm. Settings] - [Number of RX Call Rings] to specify how many rings are produced before the machine begins receiving the fax. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.Receiving G3 faxes 4-3 Manual reception Select this mode if an external telephone is connected and it is frequently used to make phone calls. Manual reception can be performed either with the control panel of this machine or with an external telephone. In order to receive faxes manually, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Manual RX]. „ With [Comm. Settings] - [Manual RX V.34 OFF], specify that V.34 is automatically turned off during manual reception. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. With the control panel The procedure for manually receiving a fax from the control panel is described below. 1 When the external telephone rings, press [Off-Hook] in the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Receive]. 3 Press [Start] or press the [Start] key. The machine starts receiving the fax. With an external telephone For details on the procedure using the external telephone, refer to “Remote reception (G3 fax)” on page 4-9.4-4 Receiving G3 faxes DRPD Select this mode when using DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns available, the incoming call is automatically received as a fax. In order to use DRPD, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [DRPD]. „ With [Comm. Settings] - [Ring Pattern], select the ring pattern for faxing. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. [Ring Pattern] Refer to the following table and select the ring pattern. S-ON (Short-ON): On for 150 ms to 600 ms L-ON (Long-ON): On for more than 600 ms S-OFF (Short-OFF): Off for 100 ms to 1,200 ms L-OFF (Long-OFF): Off for more than 1,200 ms Settings Ring Pattern [Normal Ring] L-ON + L-OFF [Double] L-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + L-OFF [Triple 1] S-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + S-OFF + S-ON + L-OFF [Triple 2] S-ON + S-OFF + S-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + L-OFFReceiving Internet faxes 4-5 Receiving Internet faxes Settings for receiving Internet faxes (e-mail) must first be specified from the [E-mail RX (POP)] page of PageScope Web Connection. For details of the settings on the [E-mail RX (POP)] page, refer to the [Reference Guide]. This machine connects to the POP server at a fixed interval to check if an Internet fax has arrived. If an Internet fax has been received, the attached file will automatically be printed. " If data is received with a resolution not supported by this machine, a reception error occurs. For the resolution of data that can be received by this machine, refer to “Technical specifications” on page A-2. " The subject and body text of received Internet faxes are not printed. " If the memory reception or PC fax reception function is being used, the data for a received Internet fax is saved in the memory. For details on using data saved in the memory, refer to “Memory reception (G3 fax/ Internet fax)” on page 4-7 or “Receiving a PC fax” on page 5-18. " Settings can be specified for printing a reception error report when reception of an Internet fax fails. For details on the report, refer to “Printing reports/lists” on page 7-4.4-6 Useful reception functions Useful reception functions The various useful reception functions available with this machine are described below. Polling reception (G3 fax) Polling reception is the function where a document queued for polling transmission by the sender or a document saved on the sender’s bulletin board is sent with a command from the recipient. This is useful when the recipient is to incur the cost of the call. Polling reception can be performed to receive a normal fax or to receive a fax by specifying the sender’s bulletin board. " This function cannot be used together with ECM OFF, V34 OFF, password transmissions, timer transmissions, F-code transmissions or Internet fax transmissions. " Multiple destinations cannot be specified. Performing a polling reception The procedure for using polling reception is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Specify the destination. 3 Press [Settings]. 4 Press [Comm. Settings]. 5 Press [Comm. Method]. 6 Press [Polling RX]. 7 Press [Yes], and then select the reception method. – To perform normal polling reception, press [Polling RX]. – To specify a sender’s bulletin board for polling reception, press [Bulletin], and then use the keypad to type in the sender’s bulletin board number. – If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information. 8 Press [OK]. 9 Press the [Start] key. Polling reception begins.Useful reception functions 4-7 Memory reception (G3 fax/Internet fax) Memory reception is the function for saving received documents in the machine’s memory. Documents saved in the memory can be printed or retrieved. In order to use memory reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Memory RX] - [Memory RX] to [ON]. „ With [Memory RX] - [Password], specify the password for allowing documents saved in the memory to be used. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Memory RX]” on page 2-15. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, fax forwarding, E-mail forwarding or night reception. Using received documents The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Others]. 3 Press [Memory RX]. 4 Type in the password, and then press [OK]. The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed, and then press [Print]. – To delete the selected document, press [Delete]. The document is printed. " Received documents can be retrieved by using PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Closed network reception (G3 fax) Closed network reception is the function for accepting only transmissions from sender’s machines with a matching password. This function can only be used if the sender’s fax machine is equipped with a password transmission function. If this machine is set for closed network receptions, the sender’s fax machine must transmit with the same password as the closed network reception password specified on this machine. In order to use closed network reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.4-8 Useful reception functions „ Set [Closed Network RX Password] - [Enable] to [Yes]. „ With [Closed Network RX Password] - [Password], specify the password for allowing the machine to be used with closed network receptions. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Closed Network RX Password]” on page 2-15. Fax forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) Fax forwarding is the function for forwarding received documents to the previously specified destination. In order to use fax forwarding, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward TX Setting] to [ON]. „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forwarding Address], specify the fax number of the forwarding destination. „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward & Print], select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Forward TX Settings]” on page 2-15. " An Internet fax destination cannot be specified as the forwarding destination. " If a document with a resolution of 300 × 300 dpi is received as an Internet fax, this machine prints the document without forwarding it. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory reception or night reception. E-mail forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) E-mail forwarding is the function for forwarding received documents to the previously specified destination. In order to use e-mail forwarding, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward TX Setting] to [ON]. „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forwarding Address], press , and then specify the e-mail address of the forwarding destination.Useful reception functions 4-9 „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward & Print], select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Forward TX Settings]” on page 2-15. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory reception or night reception. Remote reception (G3 fax) Remote reception is the function for giving this machine the command to receive a fax by entering a remote reception number from an external telephone. In order to use remote reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Manual RX]. „ Set [Remote RX Settings] - [Remote RX Enabled] to [Yes]. „ With [Remote RX Settings] - [Remote RX No.], specify the remote reception number for giving the command to receive a fax. " For details on the parameters in the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. " For details on the parameters in the [Remote RX Settings] screen, refer to “[Remote RX Settings]” on page 2-16. Giving the reception command from an external telephone The procedure for using remote reception is described below. 1 When the external telephone rings, pick up the receiver, and then check that a fax is being sent. 2 With the external telephone, type in the remote reception number (2 digits). The machine starts receiving the fax. 3 Replace the telephone receiver. " When using remote reception with pulse dialing, the telephone must be switched to pulse dialing. For details on switching to pulse dialing, refer to the instruction manual for the telephone.4-10 Useful reception functions Night reception (G3 fax/Internet fax) Night reception is the function for prohibiting printing of received documents during the specified night times. Documents received during the time that printing is prohibited are all printed when the machine is finally able to print. In order to use night reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night Fax RX Print] to [ON]. „ With [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night RX Start Time], specify the start time for the night. „ With [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night RX End Time], specify the end time for the night. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Nighttime RX Settings]” on page 2-17. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory reception, fax forwarding or E-mail forwarding.Printing received faxes 4-11 Printing received faxes This section describes how received faxes are printed. Determining the paper size The following describes the guidelines for determining the most suitable paper size and the size of paper that will be printed on. " For details on the paper settings for printing received documents, refer to “[Function Settings]” on page 2-12. Step 1: Determining the most suitable paper size Based on the following rules, the most suitable paper size is automatically determined from the width and length of the received document. Width of received document (fixed at A4) Inch Paper Priority Footer Position Length of received document (mm) Paper size that was determined (most suitable paper size) A4-width [OFF] [RX Ft. OFF] or [Inside Body Text] 1,000 or less A4 [Outside Body Text] 1,000 or less A4 [ON] [RX Ft. OFF] or [Inside Body Text] 292 or less Letter 293 - 1000 Legal [Outside Body Text] 284 or less Letter 285 - 1000 Legal4-12 Printing received faxes Step 2: Determining the actual paper size used for printing The machine checks if paper of the most suitable size determined in step 1 is loaded. „ If paper of the most suitable size is loaded, printing begins. „ If paper of the most suitable size is not loaded, or if the Auto Tray Switch function is disabled, the machine checks for paper of the next most suitable size in the order listed in the following table, starting from the top. " If no paper suitable for printing is loaded in a paper drawer, a message appears, instructing that paper be loaded. " For details on the Auto Tray Switch function, refer to the [Printer/ Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. Reducing and splitting The following four reducing and splitting operations are performed when a received document is printed, depending on the selected settings. " For details on the reducing and splitting settings for printing received documents, refer to “[Function Settings]” on page 2-12. When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer „ If the received document is the same size or is shorter than the paper loaded in the drawer, the image is printed reduced by the specified reduction ratio (between 87% and 96%). „ If the received document is longer than the paper loaded in the drawer, the image is automatically reduced (between 75% and 96%) and printed. If the received document still does not fit within the paper, even after being reduced up to 75%, any part of the image that does not fit within the paper will be lost. „ The pages cannot be split. Most suitable paper size A4 Letter Legal Order for selecting paper (from top to bottom) A4 Letter Legal A4 Letter Legal A4Printing received faxes 4-13 When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%] „ The pages cannot be split. „ The image is not reduced. „ [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to [Auto]. „ Received documents are printed at full size on paper that fits the length of the received image minus 20 mm. As a result, up to 20 mm of the trailing edge of the image may be cut off. If the length of the received image is more than 20 mm longer than the paper size, the image is printed on the next larger paper size (most suitable paper size). When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF] „ The received document is automatically reduced (between 75% and 96%) and printed. If the received document still does not fit within a single page, even after being reduced up to 75%, any part of the image that does not fit within the paper will be lost. „ The image is reduced in both the main scanning direction and the sub-scanning direction while maintaining the original height-to-width ratio. „ If the orientation of the paper to be printed on is different from the orientation of the paper that was automatically selected, the image will not be automatically rotated 90°. When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON] „ The received document is reduced by the specified reduction ratio (between 87% and 96%). If the document does not fit within a single page, the document is split and the remainder is printed on the next page. „ There is no overlapping section on split pages. " Pages are not split when the following settings have been specified, even if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]. ·When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer for printing ·When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%] ·When [Paper Priority] is set to [Fixed Size] or [Size Priority] ·When [Duplex Print] is set to [ON]4-14 Adding reception information Adding reception information Reception information can be added to documents received at this machine. This information is printed in the footer of the received document. The following information can be printed as the reception information. „ Reception date/time „ Communication number „ Page number/total number of pages " For details on the settings for specifying whether or not reception information is printed and where to print the reception information, refer to “[Header/Footer Settings]” on page 2-9.Sending/ receiving a PC fax5-2 Sending a PC fax Sending a PC fax Using the fax driver, a G3 fax can be sent from this machine through operations performed on the computer without using any paper. " In order to perform a PC-Fax operation, the fax driver must be installed. For details on installing the driver, refer to the [Installation Guide]. " The fax driver is not compatible with IPP (Internet Printing Protocol). Transmission operation The procedure for sending a PC fax is described below. 1 Using a computer application, create the data to be sent. 2 On the [File] menu, click [Print]. 3 From the [Printer Name] box, select the installed printer (appears with a name such as “xxxxxxx FAX”). 4 If necessary, click [Properties] (or [Preferences]), and then change the fax driver settings. – For details, refer to “Fax driver settings” on page 5-8. 5 Click [Print]. The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears. 6 In the [Name] and [FAX Number] boxes, type the appropriate information. – Up to 80 characters can be entered in the [Name] box. – Up to 38 characters, including numbers between 0 and 9, hyphens (-), #, *, P, and T, can be entered in the [FAX Number] box. To send a fax overseas, enter the country code at the beginning of the fax number. – [ECM]: Select this check box to use ECM (error correction mode). If the [V.34 Mode] check box is selected, this check box cannot be cleared. – [V.34 Mode]: Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmission mode. Select this check box for ordinary operation; clear this check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode of the recipient’s machine. – To specify a fax number registered in the address book of this machine, click [Add from Address Book]. For details, refer to “Selecting a recipient from the address book” on page 5-4. – To specify a fax number registered in the phone book, click [Add From Phone Book]. For details, refer to “Selecting a recipient from the phone book” on page 5-3.Sending a PC fax 5-3 – To add the entered name and fax number to the [Simple Entry] folder of the phone book, click [Register To Phone Book]. 7 Click [Add Recipients]. – To send a fax to multiple recipients, repeat steps 6 and 7. Up to 100 recipients can be registered. – To remove a registered recipient, click [Delete From List]. 8 To change the fax mode settings, click [Fax Mode Setting Details]. To specify a fax cover sheet, select the [FAX Cover Sheet] check box. – For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4 and “Creating a fax cover sheet” on page 5-5. 9 Click [OK]. The fax data is sent via this machine. Selecting a recipient from the phone book By clicking [Add From Phone Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the phone book. " Before using the phone book, register the name and fax number of the recipient. For details, refer to “Using the phone book” on page 5-15. 1 When sending a fax, click [Add From Phone Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box. 2 Select [Personal List] or [Group] from the list on the left side of the phone book to display the desired recipient under [Personal Information]. – To search for recipients by specifying conditions, click [Find]. 3 Select a recipient name under [Personal Information], and then click [Add Recipients]. – To send a fax to multiple recipients, continue adding them in the same way. Up to 100 recipients can be registered. – To delete a recipient added under [Recipient List], select the name of the recipient to be deleted, and then click [Delete]. – If recipients have been registered as a group, select the name of the group, and then click [Add Recipients]. All members of the group are added under [Recipient List] (broadcast transmission). 4 Click [OK]. The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears again with the specified names added under [Recipient List].5-4 Sending a PC fax Selecting a recipient from the address book By clicking [Add from Address Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the address book destinations registered on this machine. " In order to select recipients from the address book of this machine, your computer must be connected to this machine and be able to communicate with it. " Before a recipient can be selected from the address book of this machine, the name and fax number of the recipient must be added to the address book. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. 1 When sending a fax, click [Add from Address Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box. 2 Select [Address Book List] from the list on the left side of the dialog box to display the desired recipient under [Address Book]. – To start communicating with this machine and read the information from the address book, click [Get Addr. Info]. – To search for recipients by specifying conditions, click [Find]. 3 Select the name of a recipient name under [Address Book], and then click [Add Recipients]. – To send a fax to multiple recipients, continue adding them in the same way. Up to 100 recipients can be registered. – To delete a recipient added under [Recipient List], select the name of the recipient to be deleted, and then click [Delete From List]. 4 Click [OK]. The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears again with the specified names added under [Recipient List]. Specifying transmission conditions By clicking [Fax Mode Setting Details] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the transmission conditions for the PC fax can be specified. Item Description [Print Recipient File] Select this check box to print the original document after a fax is sent. [Timer Send] Specify the transmission time. Click [Reflect Current Time] to add the current time set on the computer to the [Send Time] box.Sending a PC fax 5-5 " When faxing with a timer transmission, make sure that the time set on the computer matches the time set on this machine. If the specified transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine, the fax will be sent on the following day. Creating a fax cover sheet By selecting the [FAX Cover Sheet] check box in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the PC fax can be sent with a cover sheet attached. In addition, click [Settings] to display the [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box in order to change the settings for cover sheets. In the [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box, change the desired settings by switching between the [Basic], [Recipient], [Sender] and [Image] tabs. [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box [SUB Address] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the SUB address. (up to 20 digits) [Sender ID] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the sender ID. (up to 20 digits, including numbers, # and *) Item Description [Cover Sheet Settings] Select a set of cover sheet settings. To change the settings for the selected cover sheet, click [Edit]. To save the selected cover sheet settings so they can be recalled later, click [Add] after specifying the new settings. [Check] Click to display an enlarged image of the layout. [Cover Size] Specify the size of the cover sheet. [Basic] tab Specify settings such as the style and usage conditions. [Recipient] tab Specify recipient information. [Sender] tab Specify sender information. [Image] tab Specify the file for the image added to the cover sheet. Item Description5-6 Sending a PC fax [Basic] tab [Recipient] tab Item Description [Style] Select the desired cover sheet design. [Subject] Enter the subject of the fax to be sent. (up to 64 characters) [Date] Specify the date. Select a specific format, or enter the date as desired. (up to 20 characters) [Pages] Specify the number of pages to be sent. [Comment] Enter the text that will appear in the comment box. (up to 640 characters) A line break is counted as two characters. Item Description [Standard] Select this to use the preset text. [Details] Select this to specify details under [Recipient Setting Details] at the bottom of the dialog box. [Load with Joint Name] Select this to add the individual recipients in a group destination. The contents of [Recipient List] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box are added. [Change Each Recipient] Select this to change the information for the recipients. The information for the contents of [Recipient List] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box are changed. [Load Set Information] Select this to add the information entered in the [Company], [Department], [Name] and [FAX Number] boxes. (up to 80 characters) Click [Read] to import the information for the first recipient into the boxes.Sending a PC fax 5-7 [Sender] tab [Image] tab Item Description [Sender Information Settings] Enter the appropriate sender information in the [Company], [Department], [Name], [Phone], [FAX Number] and [E-mail] boxes. Select the check boxes for the items to be added, and then type in the text. (up to 80 characters) Item Description [Paste Image] To add an image to the cover sheet, select the [Paste Image] check box, and then specify the image file. Only files in the BMP format can be selected. [Zoom] Specify the zoom ratio for the added image. [Position] In the [X:] and [Y:] boxes, specify the position of the added image.5-8 Fax driver settings Fax driver settings This section describes the settings and buttons common to tabs of the [Printing Preferences] or [Properties] dialog box of the fax driver. " For details on installing the driver, refer to the [Installation Guide]. [Printing Preferences] dialog box Settings for machine-specific functions can be specified. To display the [Printing Preferences] dialog box, click [Properties] (or [Preferences]) in the [Print] dialog box, or right-click the printer icon in the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, then click [Printing Preferences]. [Properties] dialog box Settings concerning the installed options and the default settings for displaying confirmation messages and authentication dialog boxes can be changed. To display the [Properties] dialog box, right-click the printer icon in the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, and then click [Properties]. Item Description [FAX] tab Specify the transmission conditions for PC faxes. For details, refer to “[FAX] tab” on page 5-10. [Basic] tab Specify settings for the paper and original document to be sent. If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine, specify the user or account information. For details, refer to “[Basic] tab” on page 5-11. [Layout] tab Specify settings for the page layout. For details, refer to “[Layout] tab” on page 5-12. [Version Information] tab View the driver version information. Item Description [Configure] tab Specify settings concerning the installed options. For details, refer to “[Configure] tab” on page 5-13. [Settings] tab Change the default settings for displaying confirmation messages and authentication dialog boxes. For details, refer to “[Settings] tab” on page 5-13.Fax driver settings 5-9 Common Settings The buttons described below appear on all tabs. Item Description [OK] Click this button to apply changes to the settings and close the dialog box. [Cancel] Click this button to cancel changes to the settings and close the dialog box. [Help] Click this button to display the Help for the items in the displayed dialog box. [Add] (Favorite Setting) Click this button to save the current settings so they can be recalled later. For details, refer to “Saving fax driver settings” on page 5-14. [Edit] (Favorite Setting) Click this button to change the saved settings. For details, refer to “Saving fax driver settings” on page 5-14. [Default] Click this button to return the settings to those specified when the driver was installed. View Displays a sample page layout based on the current settings so the transmission result image can be checked. Icons for the specified functions appear at the bottom. [Printer Information] Click this button to start Web Connection and check the printer information. This button is available only when your computer can communicate with this machine.5-10 Fax driver settings [FAX] tab The settings available on the [FAX] tab are described below. Item Description [Resolution] Select a resolution for the fax. Selecting a higher resolution may increase the communication time. [Print Recipient File] Select this check box to print the original document after a fax is sent. This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [Timer Send] Specify the transmission time. Click [Reflect Current Time] to add the current time set on the computer to the [Send Time] box. This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [SUB Address] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the SUB address. (up to 20 digits) This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [Sender ID] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the sender ID. (up to 20 digits, including numbers, # and *) This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [Cover Sheet] Select this check box to specify cover sheet settings. This can also be specified when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Creating a fax cover sheet” on page 5-5. [Phone Book Entry] Click this button to edit the phone book. For details, refer to “Using the phone book” on page 5-15.Fax driver settings 5-11 " When faxing with a timer transmission, make sure that the time set on the computer matches the time set on this machine. If the specified transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine, the fax will be sent on the following day. [Basic] tab The settings available on the [Basic] tab are described below. " To fax an original document of a custom size, select [Custom Size] from the [Original Size] list. In the [Custom Size Settings] dialog box, specify the length and width of the original document. " If user authentication is not enabled in the [Configure] tab, user authentication will not be performed. If user authentication is being used, be sure to enable it in the [Device Option] list. For details, refer to “[Configure] tab” on page 5-13. Item Description [Original Orientation] Select the orientation of the original document to be sent. [Original Size] Select the paper size of the original document to be sent. [Paper Size] Select the size of the paper to be sent. If it is different from the original document size, the output image will be automatically enlarged or reduced. [Zoom] Select an enlargement or reduction ratio. [Authentication/Account Track] Click this button to specify the user name and password when [User Authentication] has been enabled on this machine, or the account name and password when [Account Track] has been enabled on this machine.5-12 Fax driver settings [Authentication/Account Track] dialog box " If a fax is sent using a user name and password or account name and password that are not registered on the machine, or if a fax is sent without the [User Authentication] or [Account Track] settings specified in the driver, the fax is deleted without being authenticated by the machine. " Even if the user or account has been registered on the machine, the PC fax may not be sent if use of the fax function is not permitted. [Layout] tab The settings available on the [Layout] tab are described below. " Sending documents containing pages of different sizes or orientations in one job may cause some images to be partially lost or to overlap. Item Description [User Authentication] If user authentication settings have been specified on this machine, select [Recipient User], and then specify in the [User Name] and [Password] boxes the settings specified on the machine. (up to 64 characters) If public user access is allowed on this machine, the printer can be used when [Public User] is selected. Server settings must be specified if user authentication is performed with a server. Click [Server Setting], and then select a server. [Account Track] If account track settings have been specified on this machine, specify in the [Department Name] and [Password] boxes the settings specified on the machine. (up to 8 characters) Item Description [Combination] Select this check box to combine the pages of a multi-page document into a single sheet, or divide a single document page into multiple sheets when faxing. Click [Combination Details] to specify various details.Fax driver settings 5-13 [Configure] tab The settings available on the [Configure] tab are described below. " Click [Acquire Device Information] to communicate with this machine and read the machine status. This feature is not available if the computer cannot establish a connection and communicate with this machine. [Settings] tab The settings available on the [Settings] tab are described below. Item Description [Device Option] Specify the status of the options installed on this machine and user authentication/account track settings. Select the status of each item in the [Setting] box. [Acquire Device Information] Click this button to communicate with this machine and read the status of the installed options. [Acquire Settings] Click this button to specify the conditions, such as the destination, that are acquired from the device information. Item Description [Display Constraint Message] Select this check box to display a message when functions that cannot be used together have been enabled from the driver. [Verify Authentication settings before printing] Select this check box to verify authentication settings for this machine before printing, and display a message if they do not match. [Popup Authentication Dialog when printing] Select this check box to display the [User Authentication/Account Track] dialog box when printing so that the user name and account name can be entered. [Reconfirm FAX number entered directly] Select this check box to display a dialog box for entering the fax number again for confirmation when [Add Recipients] is clicked after information has been entered in the [FAX Number] box of the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box.5-14 Fax driver settings Saving fax driver settings The settings specified in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box of the fax driver can be saved as favorite settings. Saved settings can be recalled at any time by selecting them from the [Favorite Setting] list in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box. Saving the settings After changing the fax driver settings, click [Add] in the [Favorite Setting] box. Then, specify settings for the following. " Up to 30 shared driver settings and up to 20 private driver settings can be saved. Editing settings To edit saved favorite settings, click [Edit] in the [Favorite Setting] box. Select the name of the favorite settings to be edited, and then edit the settings. " To select the items to be recalled when favorite settings are selected, click [Option]. Selected settings are applied to the current settings when the favorite settings are recalled. " The settings for fax driver functions cannot be changed. " To save the favorite settings as a file, click [Export]. To import exported favorite settings into the fax driver, click [Import]. This is useful when using the same settings on a different computer. Item Description [Name] Enter a name for the settings. (up to 30 characters) [Icon] Select an icon. Settings can be saved without an icon selected. [Sharing] Select this check box to share the setting file with other users, or clear this check box to register it for private use. Only the administrator can select the [Sharing] check box. [Comment] Enter a detailed description of the setting file, if necessary. (up to 255 characters)Using the phone book 5-15 Using the phone book Adding frequently used recipients to a phone book allows you to recall them when sending faxes. Use the [FAX] tab of the fax driver to add recipients to a phone book. Adding recipients to a phone book The procedure for adding recipients to the phone book is described below. 1 In the [FAX] tab of the fax driver, click [Phone Book Entry]. The [Phone Book Entry] dialog box appears. 2 Select [Personal List] from the list on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Add New]. The [Personal Information\\Personal List] dialog box appears. 3 In the [Name], [FAX Number], [Company] and [Department] boxes, type the appropriate information. – When the entered name is printed on the fax cover sheet, a title will not be included. To provide the name with a title on the fax cover sheet, enter the name with a title in the [Name] box. – Up to 80 characters can be entered in the [Name], [Company] and [Department] boxes. – Up to 38 characters, including numbers between 0 and 9, hyphens (-), spaces, #, *, P, and T, can be entered in the [FAX Number] box. To send a fax overseas, enter the country code at the beginning of the fax number. – [ECM]: Select this check box to use ECM (error correction mode). If the [V.34 Mode] check box is selected, this check box cannot be cleared. – [V.34 Mode]: Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmission mode. Select this check box for ordinary operation; clear this check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode of the recipient’s machine. 4 To add the recipient to groups, select the check boxes for the groups. – When a recipient is added to a group, a fax can be sent to the recipient by selecting the group as the destination (broadcast transmission). If faxes will frequently be sent to certain destinations, it is useful to add them to a group. – The recipient can be added to multiple groups.5-16 Using the phone book 5 Click [OK]. The personal information is registered and displayed under [Personal List]. If groups have been selected for the recipient, the recipient will appear in the list for those groups. 6 Click [OK]. If recipients have already been added to the phone book, editing of the phone book is finished. If this is the first time that a recipient is being added to the phone book, a dialog box appears, requesting confirmation to save the phone book. 7 Click [Yes]. The [Save As] dialog box appears. 8 Browse to the folder where the file is to be saved, type in the file name, and then click [Save]. The phone book is saved as a new file. " The [Save As] dialog box appears only the first time that a recipient is being added to the phone book. When the phone book is subsequently edited, the [Save As] dialog box does not appear, and the existing file is automatically overwritten. " The saved phone book file automatically appears the next time that the phone book is opened. To open a different phone book file, click the [File] menu in the [Phone Book Entry] dialog box, and then click [Open]. If multiple phone book files have been saved, you can switch between these files to locate the desired one. " To create a new phone book file, click the [File] menu in the [Phone Book Entry] dialog box, and then click [New]. On the [File] menu, click [Save As] to save the file with a different name. " The phone book file is saved with the .csv extension. Editing a phone book Editing or organizing a phone book, for example, by changing the registered personal information or group name, enhances its usability. Changing personal information Select the name of the recipient to be edited under [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Edit]. The [Personal Information] dialog box appears, which is the same as that for adding a recipient, so that the information can be changed.Using the phone book 5-17 To delete a recipient, select the name of the recipient under [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Delete]. At the same time, that recipient is deleted from all groups it belongs to. " Names and fax numbers that have been added using [Register To Phone Book] when sending faxes appear in the [Simple Entry] folder of the phone book. Changing group membership Select the name of the recipient to be edited under [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then select or clear the check boxes in the group list on the right. Up to 100 recipients can be added to a single group. Changing a group name Select the group name to be changed under [Group] on the left side of the phone book, click the [Edit] menu, and then click [Rename Group]. Creating a folder Select [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Add Folder] to create a folder. A folder can also be created by clicking [Add Folder] in the [Edit] menu. A recipient can be moved from the [Personal List] to the new folder by dragging the name to the folder. To edit a folder, select the folder to be changed, and then click [Edit]. To delete a folder, select the folder to be deleted, and then click [Delete]. Searching for personal information Clicking [Find] on the right side of the phone book displays the [Find] dialog box, where various search conditions can be specified.5-18 Receiving a PC fax Receiving a PC fax When this machine receives a PC fax, the received document is saved in the machine’s memory in the TIFF format. Documents saved in the memory can be printed or retrieved. In order to use PC fax reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Setting] to [ON]. „ With [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Print], select whether or not a PC fax is printed automatically after it is received. " For details, refer to “[PC-Fax RX Settings]” on page 2-16. " This function cannot be used together with fax forwarding, E-mail forwarding, memory reception or night reception. " If faxes are saved with the memory reception function, a PC fax is not automatically printed after it is received. Using received documents The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Others]. 3 Press [Memory RX]. 4 Type in the password, and then press [OK]. The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed, and then press [Print]. – To delete the selected document, press [Delete]. The document is printed. " With [Memory RX], specify the password that allows documents saved in the memory to be used. For details, refer to “[Memory RX]” on page 2-15. " Received PC fax documents can be retrieved by using PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].Uninstalling the fax driver 5-19 Uninstalling the fax driver If the fax driver must be removed, for example, when reinstallation of the driver is necessary, remove the driver using the following procedure. 1 Click [Start], and then click [All Programs] (or [Programs]) - [KONICA MINOLTA] - [xxxxx (model name)] - [Uninstall Printer Driver]. 2 Select the components to be removed, and then click [Uninstall]. Continue by following the instructions that appear. 3 If a dialog box appears, instructing you to restart the computer, click [OK].5-20 Uninstalling the fax driverRegistering destinations6-2 Destination registration Destination registration By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent, recipients can be recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent. With this machine, address book destinations (Address Book), group destinations (Group) and program destinations (Program) can be registered. Address Book The information for destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be registered. A destination can selected from the address book when a fax is being sent. A maximum of 2,000 address book destinations can be registered. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 6-3. Group Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group. This is useful when sending the same fax to multiple destinations in a broadcast transmission. A maximum of 100 group destinations (with a maximum of 500 address book destinations per group) can be registered. Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Program Destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be registered together with fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens). A registered program destination can be recalled by pressing the [Mode Memory] key in the control panel. A maximum of 400 program destinations can be registered. For details on registering, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 6-6.Registering an address book destination 6-3 Registering an address book destination The procedure for registering an address book destination is described below. G3 fax Address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the control panel and the user mode of PageScope Web Connection. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. 3 Press [Fax]. 4 Press [New]. – To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Details]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the Details screen. 5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK].6-4 Registering an address book destination Settings Item Description [Name] Type in the registration name for the address book destination. [Fax number] Type in the fax number of the recipient. „ [Tone]: Press to send push-button tones when pulse dialing is being used. [T] appears in the screen. „ [Pause]: Press to insert a pause when dialing. [P] appears in the screen. „ [-]: Press to insert a dash as a separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the dialing. „ If the machine is being used with a PBX, press [Outside] when registering an outside destination. [E] appears in the screen. At the point indicated by [E], the outside line access number specified on this machine is automatically dialed. For details, refer to “[PBX Connection Settings]” on page 2-17. „ If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (Register)] is set to [ON], the fax number must be entered again after [OK] is pressed. [Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON]. This allows the destination to be found more easily, which is useful when destinations are being selected. [Index] Select the search characters that will be used to search for the destination.Registering an address book destination 6-5 Internet fax Internet fax destinations can be registered only from the PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the user mode of PageScope Web Connection. [Line Settings] Configure the line used to send faxes. [ECM OFF] The error correction mode (ECM) is turned off to shorten the transmission time. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other while confirming that the data sent is free of errors. [V34 OFF] V.34 is a communication mode used with super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line through a PBX, it may not be possible to establish communication in super G3 mode due to the condition of the telephone line. In this case, it is recommended that V.34 be turned off before sending data. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on the V.34 mode. [Check Dest. & Send] The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and the data is sent only if those fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail, resulting in a transmission error. To verify the destination and send the fax, the recipient’s fax number must be specified on their fax machine. Item Description6-6 Registering a program destination Registering a program destination The procedure for registering a program destination for fax transmission is described below. Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens. – For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 3-11. – For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13, “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14 and “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17. – For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Press [Register]. 5 At [Name], enter the name. 6 At [Dest.], specify the destination. – Press , select the address book or group destinations, and then press [OK]. 7 Press [OK].Communication management7-2 Checking a job Checking a job From the Job screen, the status of transmission/reception jobs and results of jobs can be viewed. In the home screen, press [Job] to display the Job screen. " For details on the Job screen, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. Checking jobs being performed A list of jobs currently being performed appears when the initial Job screen is displayed. If the job log is displayed, press [Active] to display the list of jobs currently being performed. Transmission jobs Press [Send] to view the list of jobs queued for redialing and queued for transmission. To delete a job, select the job from the list, and then press [Delete]. Reception jobs Press [Receive] to view the list of jobs being received and queued for reception. To delete a job, select the job from the list, and then press [Delete].Checking a job 7-3 Checking the job log Press [Log] in the Job screen to display the job log. " If [Admin Settings] – [Security Settings] – [Security Details] – [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], the job log cannot be displayed. Transmission jobs Press [Send] to view the log for transmission jobs. To view job details, select the job from the list, and then press [Details]. " To view an address, select the job from the job log, and then press [Details]. If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Hide Personal Data] is set to [ON], the address is displayed as “****”. Reception jobs Press [Receive] to view the log for reception jobs. To view job details, select the job from the list, and then press [Details].7-4 Printing reports/lists Printing reports/lists This section describes the fax-related reports and lists that can be printed by this machine. Types of reports The following types of fax-related reports can be printed by this machine. Report name Description Activity Report This report provides a record of transmissions and receptions. Results can be viewed of the last 100 transmissions/receptions. Transmission results and reception results are printed separately. If necessary, the conditions for printing can be specified. TX Result Report This report provides a record of the transmission results. A reduced image of the sent document is printed on the first page. This report is automatically printed when a fax is sent. If necessary, the conditions for printing can be specified. Reservation TX Report (G3 fax only) This report provides a detailed record of timer transmissions. This report is automatically printed when a timer transmission is queued. If necessary, the machine can be set so that this report is not printed. Broadcast Result Report This report provides a record of the results of broadcast transmissions. If necessary, the conditions for printing can be specified. Broadcast Reservation Report (G3 fax only) This report provides a detailed record of broadcast timer transmissions. This report is automatically printed when a broadcast timer transmission is queued. If necessary, the machine can be set so that this report is not printed. PC-Fax TX Error Report This report is printed if an error occurred, preventing a PC fax transmission from being completed correctly.Printing reports/lists 7-5 Types of lists The following types of fax-related lists can be printed by this machine. I-Fax RX Error Report This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax failed. List name Description Address Book List This list contains the information registered for address book destinations. Group List This list contains the information registered for group destinations. Program List This list contains the information registered for program destinations. Fax Setup Information List This list contains the fax-related settings that have been specified. Report name Description7-6 Printing reports/lists Activity Report This report provides a record of transmissions and receptions. Results can be viewed of the last 100 transmissions/receptions. Transmission results and reception results are printed separately. The Activity Report is printed automatically. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Activity Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [No.] Shows the communication number. [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the destination. [Start Time] Shows the time that communication began. [Time] Shows the length of time required for communication. [Prints] Shows the number of pages sent/received. [Result] Shows the communication results. For details, check the margin of the report. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the communication. For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-7 TX Result Report This report provides a record of the transmission results. If necessary, a reduced image of the first page of the sent document can be printed in the report. The TX Result Report is printed automatically when transmission is completed. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Result Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Result Report Image], whether or not to print a reduced image of the sent document in the TX Result Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Confirm TX Result Report], whether or not to print the transmission results report before transmission can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the destination. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission began. [Time] Shows the length of time required for transmission. [Prints] Shows the number of pages sent. [Result] Shows the results of the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.7-8 Printing reports/lists Reservation TX Report This report provides a detailed record of timer transmissions. The Reservation TX Report is printed automatically when a timer transmission is queued. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Reserve], whether or not to print the Reservation TX Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the destination. [Create Time] Shows the time that the transmission was queued. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin. [Prints] Shows the number of pages that were scanned. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-9 Broadcast Result Report This report provides a record of the results of broadcast transmissions. The Broadcast Result Report is printed automatically when a broadcast transmission is completed. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Broadcast Report], whether or not to print the Broadcast Result Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Broadcast Result Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of all destinations for the broadcast transmission. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission began. [Time] Shows the length of time required for transmission. [Prints] Shows the number of pages sent. [Result] Shows the results of the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.7-10 Printing reports/lists Broadcast Reservation Report This report provides a detailed record of broadcast timer transmissions. The Broadcast Reservation Report is printed automatically when a broadcast timer transmission is queued. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Reserve], whether or not to print the Broadcast Reservation Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of all destinations for the broadcast transmission. [Create Time] Shows the time that the transmission was queued. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin. [Prints] Shows the number of pages that were scanned. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-11 PC-Fax TX Error Report This report is printed if an error occurred, preventing a PC fax transmission from being completed correctly. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [PC-Fax TX Error Report], whether or not to print the PC fax transmission error report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed I-Fax RX Error Report This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax failed. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [I-Fax RX Error Report], whether or not to print the I-Fax RX error report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or fax number of all destinations for the broadcast transmission. [Create Time] Shows the time that a PC fax was sent from the computer. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin. [Cause] Shows the cause of the error. For details, check the margin of the report. [Name] Shows the user name. Item Description [From] Shows the e-mail address of the sender. [Receiving time] Shows the time that reception began. [Cause] Shows the cause of the reception error. [Subject] Shows the subject text.7-12 Printing reports/lists Address Book List/Group List/Program List These lists contain the information registered for the various destinations. The procedure for printing a destinations list is described below. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Admin Settings]. 3 Type in the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Address Registration]. 5 Press [Address Book]. 6 Select the list to be printed. – To print [Address Book] list, continue with step 7. – To print the [Group] list, continue with step 8. – To print the [Program] list, continue with step 7. 7 Select the type of destinations to be printed on. 8 If necessary, specify settings for [Start Number] and [Number of Addresses] to limit the number of destinations to be printed. – With [Start Number], specify the registration number for the first destination to be printed. – With [Number of Addresses], specify the number of destinations to be printed. The specified number of destinations starting from the registration number specified with [Start Number] will be printed. 9 Press [List Output]. 10 Press [Print], and then press [OK]. The destination list is printed. Fax Setup Information list This list contains the fax-related settings that have been specified. For details on printing the settings list, refer to “[List Print]” on page 2-19.Troubleshooting8-2 Problems when sending faxes Problems when sending faxes " For details on the error messages, refer to “Error messages” on page 8-9. For details on troubleshooting procedures for document misfeeds, paper misfeeds, poor print quality, or empty toner, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. If the fax cannot be sent correctly, refer to the following table, and then perform the indicated operation. If the fax still cannot be sent correctly, even after performing the described operations, contact your technical representative. G3 fax Symptom Cause Solution The document is not scanned. The document is too thick, too thin or too small. Use the original glass to send the fax. The document is scanned at an angle. The document guides are not adjusted to the width of the document. Slide the document guides to fit the width of the document. The fax received by the recipient is blurry. The document is incorrectly positioned. Position the document correctly. The original glass is dirty. Clean the original glass. The text in the document is written too faint. Adjust the density. There may be a problem with the telephone connection. Check the telephone line, and then try sending the fax again. There may be a problem with the recipient’s fax machine. Make a copy to check that this machine is operating correctly, and then, if the copy was printed correctly, have the recipient check the condition of their fax machine. The fax received by the recipient is blank. The document was sent with the front side facing down (when the ADF is used). Load the document to be faxed facing up.Problems when sending faxes 8-3 Transmission is not possible. The transmission procedure may have been performed incorrectly. Check the transmission procedure, and then try sending the fax again. The fax number may be wrong. Check the fax number. The address book destination, group destination or program destination may have been registered incorrectly. Check that the destinations were correctly registered. The telephone line may be incorrectly connected. Check the telephone line connection. If it is disconnected, connect it. There may be a problem with the recipient’s fax machine (such as, no paper or turned off). Contact the recipient. An incorrect telephone line setting may have been selected. Check that the dialing method setting selected from the [Comm. Settings] screen matches the telephone line being used. An incorrect password may have been specified when the transmission was sent with [Password TX] set to [Yes]. Check the password at the receiving end, and then try sending the fax again with the correct password. An incorrect password may have been specified when the transmission was sent with [F-Code TX] set to [Yes]. Check the password at the receiving end, and then try sending the fax again with the correct password. The recipient’s fax number may have been incorrectly specified on their fax machine when the transmission was sent with [TX Confirm CSI] set to [Yes]. Have the recipient check that their fax number is correctly specified on their machine. Symptom Cause Solution8-4 Problems when sending faxes Internet fax PC fax Symptom Cause Solution Transmission is not possible. The network settings are not specified correctly. Check that the settings in “Initial settings” on page 1-13 have been correctly specified. The e-mail address for the destination is incorrect. Check that the registered destination information is correct. The cables are not connected correctly. Check that the cables are correctly connected. Symptom Cause Solution The message “Printer is not connected” or “Print Error” appears on the computer screen. The fax driver specified when sending may not be supported by the printer controller. Check the specified printer name. The network or USB cable may be disconnected. Check that the cable is correctly connected. An error may have occurred on this machine. Check the control panel of this machine. Memory may be insufficient. Check whether a test page can be sent.Problems when sending faxes 8-5 Print processing on the computer finished, but transmission does not start. The fax driver specified when sending may not be supported by the printer controller. Check the specified printer name. The network or USB cable may be disconnected. Check that the cable is correctly connected. An error may have occurred on this machine. Check the control panel of this machine. Unprocessed jobs may remain queued on this machine. From the control panel of this machine, check the Job screen for the processing order for the job. Account track settings have been specified, but an unregistered account name or password has been entered. Enter the correct account name and password. User authentication settings have been specified, but an unregistered user name or password has been entered. Enter the correct user name and password. The computer may have insufficient memory. Check whether a test page can be sent. A network connection with the printer controller is not established (when connecting via the network). Contact your administrator. This machine may be in enhanced security mode. Contact your administrator. Symptom Cause Solution8-6 Problems when receiving faxes Problems when receiving faxes If the fax cannot be received correctly, refer to the following table, and then perform the indicated operation. If the fax still cannot be received correctly, even after performing the described operations, contact your technical representative. G3 fax Symptom Cause Solution The received fax is blank. There may be a problem with the telephone connection or with the caller’s fax machine. Check that the machine can make clean copies. If it can, have the caller send the fax again. The caller may have loaded the pages backward. Contact the caller. Reception is not possible. The machine is set to receive faxes manually. Set the machine to automatic reception. Otherwise, perform the manual reception operation. Memory is full. Load paper if it is empty, and then print the faxes stored in memory. The telephone line is incorrectly connected. Check the telephone line connection. If it is disconnected, connect it. There may be a problem with the caller’s fax machine. Make a copy to check that this machine is operating correctly, and then, if the copy was printed correctly, have the recipient check the condition of their fax machine. [Closed Network RX Password] - [Enable] may have been set to [Yes]. If [Closed Network RX Password] - [Enable] is set to [Yes], faxes can only be received from specific senders. For details, contact the administrator.Problems when receiving faxes 8-7 Internet fax Reception is not possible. The fax may have been sent with an incorrect Sub address for the specified F-code. If an incorrect Sub address is received, a communication error occurs and the fax cannot be received. Have the sender check the Sub address on their fax machine. Printing is not possible. [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Setting] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine’s memory. [Memory RX] - [Memory RX] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine’s memory. [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night Fax RX Print] may have been set to [ON]. Printing is performed when the specified night time has ended. Symptom Cause Solution Reception is not possible. The cables are not connected correctly. Check that the cables are correctly connected. Memory is full. Load paper if it is empty, and then print the faxes stored in memory. Printing is not possible. [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Setting] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine's memory. [Memory RX] - [Memory RX] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine's memory. Symptom Cause Solution8-8 Other problems Other problems Symptom Cause Solution The number of document pages indicated in the transmission results report is different from the number of pages in a batch transmission. Memory is full. During batch transmissions, the number of document pages indicated in the transmission results report may be different from the number of pages in the transmission if the memory is full.Error messages 8-9 Error messages If a machine malfunction occurs, the error screen appears with one of the following error messages. Refer to the following table, and then perform the indicated operation. If fax transmissions/receptions still cannot be performed correctly, even after performing the described operations, contact your technical representative. Error message Cause Solution [Off-Hook] The machine has been left off-hook after a manual transmission. Put the machine back on-hook. [Memory Full (Fax)] The memory is full. If a fax is being sent, send the scanned document pages. Otherwise, send the fax manually. If a fax is being received, print the received documents saved in the memory. [Fax TX Failed] An error occurred while a G3 fax is being sent. This error is automatically cleared. [Fax RX Failed] An error occurred while a G3 fax is being received. This error is automatically cleared. [PC-Fax TX Error] An error occurred while receiving PC-Fax TX data. This error is automatically cleared. [Polling RX Error] Multiple destinations were specified for polling reception. Multiple destinations cannot be specified for polling reception. Try performing the operation again with only one destination specified. [PC-Fax Restricted] A PC fax transmission was requested although PC fax transmissions are prohibited. For details on specifying PC fax transmission settings, refer to “[Fax Function Settings]” on page 2-13. [I-Fax TX failed] An error occurred while an Internet fax is being sent. This error is automatically cleared.8-10 Error messages [I-Fax RX failed] An error occurred while an Internet fax is being received. This error is automatically cleared. Error message Cause SolutionAppendix AA-2 Technical specifications Technical specifications G3 fax Internet fax Item Specifications Compatible lines PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) PBX (Private Branch eXchange) Compatibility ECM/Super G3 Modem speed 2.4 kbps - 33.6 kbps Fax transmission speed 3 sec/page (at A4, 33.6 kbps, JBIG, V.34) Coding method MH, MR, MMR or JBIG Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX/RX Maximum scanning size ADF: 216 mm × 1000 mm Original glass: Legal Maximum recording size Legal (Pages with a maximum length of 1,000 mm can be received or printed, depending on the selected page splitting setting.) Edge erase 4.0 mm (top, bottom, left and right) Resolution Standard: 200 × 100 dpi (8 × 3.85 dot/mm) Fine: 200 × 200 dpi (8 × 7.7 dot/mm) Super Fine: 400 × 400 dpi (16 × 15.4 dot/mm) Super Fine (Reception only): 200 × 400 dpi (8 × 15.4 dot/mm) Item Description Protocol Internet fax (Simple mode), TCP/IP, SMTP, POP3 Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX/RX File type Monochrome (TIFF) Coding method (Transmission) TIFF-S (MH) Coding method (Reception) TIFF-S (MH), TIFF-F (MH/MR/MMR)Technical specifications A-3 PC fax (Fax driver) " For details on other specifications, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. Resolution (Transmission) Standard: 200 × 100 dpi Fine: 200 × 200 dpi Resolution (Reception) 200 × 100 dpi, 204 × 98 dpi (80 × 38.5 dot/cm) 200 × 200 dpi, 204 × 196 dpi (80 × 77 dot/cm) 300 × 300 dpi 200 × 400 dpi, 204 × 391 dpi (80 × 154 dot/cm) 400 × 400 dpi, 408 × 391 dpi (160 × 154 dot/cm) Item Description Operating system Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Windows Server 2003 (32-bit/64-bit) Windows XP (32-bit/64-bit) Windows Vista (32-bit/64-bit) Windows Server 2008 (32-bit/64-bit) Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 (32-bit/64-bit) CPU Pentium 3: 400 MHz or higher (Windows Vista: 1 GHz or higher) Memory 512 MB or more Item DescriptionA-4 Text input Text input The procedure for using the keyboard screen is described below. Entering text In the keyboard screen, press the character that you want to enter. „ To enter uppercase letters, press [ ]. „ To enter symbols, press [ ]. „ To enter special characters, such as accented characters, press [ ]. „ To delete the character to the right of the cursor, press [Delete]. „ To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ]. " Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad in the control panel. " To clear all entered text, press the [C] key.Index Index A-5 A Account track ....................1-11, 1-12 Address Book ...............................6-2 Address Registration ...................6-3 ADF ................................................3-4 C Canceling ....................................3-23 Closed network reception ............4-7 Comm. Method ............................3-14 F-Code TX ................................3-15 Password TX ............................3-15 Timer TX ...................................3-14 Comm. Settings .................3-13, 3-14 Control Panel ................................1-3 D DRPD .............................................4-4 Ring Pattern ................................4-4 E E-mail forwarding ........................ 4-8 E-mail Settings ........................... 3-17 F Fax driver ...................................... 5-8 Authentication/ Account Track .......................... 5-12 Basic ........................................ 5-11 Configure .................................. 5-13 Favorite Setting ........................ 5-14 FAX .......................................... 5-10 Layout ...................................... 5-12 Printing Preferences ................... 5-8 Properties ................................... 5-8 Settings .................................... 5-13 Uninstall ................................... 5-19 Fax forwarding ............................. 4-8 Fax screen .................................... 1-8A-6 Index Fax Settings (Admin Settings) ....2-4 Closed Network RX Password ............................2-15 Comm. Settngs .........................2-10 Fax Factory Default ..................2-20 Fax Function Settings ...............2-13 Fax Image Initialized .................2-20 Fax Report ................................2-18 Fax Target ................................2-20 Forward TX Settings .................2-15 Function Settings ......................2-12 Header/Footer Settings ...............2-9 List Print ....................................2-19 Memory RX ...............................2-15 Nighttime RX Settings ...............2-17 PBX Connection Settings .........2-17 PC-Fax RX Settings ..................2-16 Remote RX Settings .................2-16 Sender Settings ..........................2-8 Fax Settings (User Settings) ........2-2 Footer ..........................................4-14 G Group .............................................6-2 Group Address List ....................7-12 H Header .........................................3-24 Home screen .................................1-6 I Icon ................................................1-9 J Job .................................................7-2 Active ..........................................7-2 Log ..............................................7-3 L Line Settings ...............................3-13 ECM OFF ..................................3-13 TX Confirm CSI .........................3-13 V34 OFF ...................................3-13 Lists .............................................. 7-5 Address Book List .................... 7-12 Fax Setup Information List ....... 7-12 M Machine Parts .............................. 1-2 Memory reception ........................ 4-7 Mode Memory ............................. 3-21 N Night reception .......................... 4-10 O Off-Hook ..................................... 3-22 Original glass ............................... 3-5 Original Settings ........................ 3-18 Binding Position ....................... 3-19 Long Original ............................ 3-18 Original Size ............................. 3-18 Simplex/Duplex ........................ 3-18 P Parts .............................................. 1-2 PC-Fax ................................. 5-2, 5-18 Address book ............................. 5-4 FAX Cover Sheet ....................... 5-5 Phone book ................................ 5-3 Transmission operation .............. 5-2 Phone book ................................ 5-15 Polling reception .......................... 4-6 Printing received faxes ............. 4-11 Program ........................................ 6-2 Program Address ......................... 6-6 Program Address List ............... 7-12 R Receiving G3 faxes ...................... 4-2 Automatic reception ................... 4-2 DRPD ......................................... 4-4 Manual reception ........................ 4-3 Receiving Internet faxes ............. 4-5 Redial .......................................... 3-23 Remote reception ........................ 4-9Index A-7 Reports ..........................................7-4 Activity Report .............................7-6 Broadcast Reservation Report .......................................7-10 Broadcast Result Report .............7-9 I-Fax RX Error Report ...............7-11 PC-Fax TX Error Report ...........7-11 Reservation TX Report ...............7-8 TX Result Report ........................7-7 S Scan Settings ..............................3-11 Background Removal ...............3-12 Density ......................................3-12 Original Type ............................3-11 Resolution .................................3-11 Separate Scan ..........................3-11 Sharpness .................................3-12 Sending faxes ...............................3-1 General operation .......................3-2 Specifications .............................. A-2 Specifying destinations ...............3-7 Direct Input .................................3-8 Favorites .....................................3-7 LDAP ........................................3-10 Log ..............................................3-9 Search ........................................3-8 T Text input ..................................... A-4 Touch panel ..................................1-6 Troubleshooting ...........................8-1 Error messages ..........................8-9 U User authentication ....................1-11 Device authentication ...............1-11 External server authentication ...........................1-11A-8 IndexCopyright A121-9562-13A 2009 2011. 1 http://konicaminolta.com User’s Guide [Box Operations]Introduction C550 x-1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. This User’s Guide contains details on the operations required to use the User Box functions of the bizhub C550, precautions on their use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this User’s Guide before using the machine. If software (such as PageScope Job Spooler, HDDTWAIN or PageScope Box Operator) other than that described in this User’s Guide has been installed, data saved in a user box can be used from a computer on the network. Since the operation differs for each software, refer to the manual for the corresponding software for details. In addition, for details on the operation of PageScope Web Connection, which can be used to operate this machine over a network, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations]. Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations used in this manual.Introduction C550 x-2 Trademarks and registered trademarks KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape is a registered trade mark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. RSA ® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE ® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. License information This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc. OpenSSL statement OpenSSL license Copyright © 1998-2005 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”Introduction C550 x-3 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay license Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.Introduction C550 x-4 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] NetSNMP License Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights ReservedIntroduction C550 x-5 Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.Introduction C550 x-6 Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) Portions of this code are copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.Introduction C550 x-7 - Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) Copyright © 2003-2004, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD)Introduction C550 x-8 Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Kerberos Copyright © 1985-2005 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All rights reserved. permission notice WITHIN THAT CONSTRAINT, permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Furthermore if you modify this software you must label your software as modified software and not distribute it in such a fashion that it might be confused with the original MIT software.Introduction C550 x-9 M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT ORIGINAL MIT SOFTWARE, MODIFIED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Mersenne Twister A C-program for MT19937, with initialization improved 2002/1/26. Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto. Before using, initialize the state by using init_genrand(seed) or init_by_array(init_key, key_length). Copyright © 1997-2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura, All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.Introduction C550 x-10 Any feedback is very welcome. http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/emt.html email: m-mat @ math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp (remove space)Introduction C550 x-11 Contents Introduction Trademarks and registered trademarks .........................................x-2 OpenSSL statement ....................................................................... x-2 NetSNMP License .......................................................................... x-4 Kerberos ......................................................................................... x-8 Mersenne Twister ........................................................................... x-9 Contents ...........................................................................................x-11 About this manual ...........................................................................x-17 Structure of the manual ................................................................ x-17 Notation ........................................................................................ x-17 Explanation of manual conventions ..............................................x-18 User’s Guides ..................................................................................x-20 Printed manuals ............................................................................ x-20 User’s Guide CD manuals ............................................................ x-20 1 Overview of the User Box functions 1.1 Available User Box functions ...........................................................1-2 Saving documents ..........................................................................1-2 Using document data .....................................................................1-3 Organizing document data .............................................................1-5 1.2 Set-up for User Box functions .........................................................1-7 User box registration ......................................................................1-7 1.3 Control panel .....................................................................................1-8 1.4 Touch panel .....................................................................................1-11 Screen layout ................................................................................1-11 Icons on the touch panel ..............................................................1-12 1.5 About External Memory ..................................................................1-13 Available External Memory ...........................................................1-13 Connecting an external memory ..................................................1-13 2 Saving documents 2.1 Information on saving documents ...................................................2-2 User authentication ........................................................................2-2 Registering user boxes ...................................................................2-4 Naming documents ........................................................................2-4Introduction C550 x-12 2.2 Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed ..................2-6 When user authentication and account track settings are not specified .........................................................................................2-6 When only user authentication settings are specified ....................2-7 When only account track settings are specified .............................2-8 When user authentication and account track settings are specified and synchronized ............................................................2-8 When user authentication and account track settings are specified, but not synchronized ...................................................2-10 2.3 Saving copies in user boxes ..........................................................2-12 Settings that can be saved and changed .....................................2-12 Saving copy documents ...............................................................2-13 2.4 Saving scans in user boxes ............................................................2-17 Previewing ....................................................................................2-17 Preview - View Pages - Change Setting .......................................2-19 Preview - View Status ...................................................................2-20 Saving after previewing ................................................................2-20 Using a user box destination ........................................................2-22 Entering destinations directly .......................................................2-24 Saving in User Box mode .............................................................2-27 Saving on external memory from User Box mode .......................2-29 2.5 Saving printouts in user boxes ......................................................2-32 Saving data in a user box .............................................................2-33 Saving data in the Secure Print User Box ....................................2-36 Saving data in the Encrypted PDF User Box ................................2-38 2.6 Specifying scan settings ................................................................2-39 Settings that can be specified ......................................................2-39 Original Type ................................................................................2-40 Simplex/Duplex ............................................................................2-42 Resolution .....................................................................................2-43 File Type .......................................................................................2-44 Density ..........................................................................................2-49 Separate Scan ..............................................................................2-50 Color (Quality Adjustment) ............................................................2-50 Background Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) .............................2-52 Sharpness (Quality Adjustment) ...................................................2-54 Frame Erase (Erase) ......................................................................2-56 Book Copy (Book Scan) ...............................................................2-58 Scan Size (Application) .................................................................2-60 Original Settings ...........................................................................2-64Introduction C550 x-13 2.7 Display and operation of the left panel .........................................2-67 Job List .........................................................................................2-67 Job List - Delete ...........................................................................2-68 Job List - Job Details ....................................................................2-68 Settings when saving documents ................................................2-73 Detail - Check Scan Settings .......................................................2-74 Detail - Check Original Settings ...................................................2-75 Settings when using documents ..................................................2-75 Detail .............................................................................................2-76 Check Job Settings ......................................................................2-76 Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................2-77 Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings ..........................................2-77 Preview .........................................................................................2-78 Preview - Detail ............................................................................2-79 Preview - Detail (Print/Combine) ..................................................2-79 Preview - Detail (Send/Bind TX) ...................................................2-80 3 Organizing user box documents 3.1 Overview of document organizing ...................................................3-2 Available operations in the File Document screen .........................3-2 Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................3-3 Description of File Document screen .............................................3-5 Searching for a user box name ......................................................3-6 3.2 Deleting a document .........................................................................3-8 3.3 Changing the document name .......................................................3-10 3.4 Moving a document ........................................................................3-12 3.5 Duplicating a document .................................................................3-14 3.6 Checking document details ...........................................................3-16 Check the details ..........................................................................3-17 Preview screen operations ...........................................................3-19 4 Printing a user box document 4.1 Overview of document printing .......................................................4-2 Available operations in the Use Document screen .........................4-2 Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................4-3 Description of Use Document screen ............................................4-5 Searching for a user box name ......................................................4-5 4.2 Printing ...............................................................................................4-6 Available print settings ...................................................................4-6 To print a document .......................................................................4-7 Changing the number of copies .....................................................4-8 Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing ...............................4-8Introduction C550 x-14 Specifying Finishing settings ..........................................................4-9 Adding a binding margin ..............................................................4-16 Adding cover pages (Cover Sheet) ...............................................4-19 Adding insertions (Insert Sheet) ....................................................4-24 Inserting chapter title pages (Chapters) .......................................4-29 Printing the date/time (Date/Time) ................................................4-33 Printing page numbers (Page Number) ........................................4-36 Adding preset text or images (Stamp) ..........................................4-41 Adding text and images to prevent copying (Copy Protect) ........4-44 Adding repeated preset text or images (Stamp Repeat) ..............4-53 Inserting a header/footer (Header/Footer) ....................................4-61 4.3 Combined printing ..........................................................................4-66 Available combined printing parameters ......................................4-66 To print a document .....................................................................4-67 5 Sending a user box document 5.1 Overview of document transmissions .............................................5-2 Available document transmission operations .................................5-2 Transmission methods ...................................................................5-2 Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................5-3 Description of Use Document screen ............................................5-5 Searching for a user box name ......................................................5-5 To send a document .......................................................................5-6 5.2 Specifying the destination ................................................................5-8 Selecting from the address book ...................................................5-8 Selecting from a group destination ................................................5-9 Searching for a destination ...........................................................5-11 Directly specifying an e-mail destination ......................................5-13 Directly specifying an SMB destination ........................................5-15 Directly specifying an FTP destination .........................................5-16 Directly specifying a WebDAV destination ...................................5-19 Selecting a destination with an Address search ..........................5-21 5.3 Specifying the transmission settings ............................................5-24 Settings that can be specified ......................................................5-24 File Type .......................................................................................5-25 E-Mail Settings (Communication Settings) ...................................5-29 URL Notification Setting (Communication Settings) ....................5-30 E-Mail Encryption (Communication Settings) ...............................5-31 Digital Signature (Communication Settings) .................................5-32 Date/Time (Application) ................................................................5-33 Page Number (Application) ...........................................................5-37 Stamp (Application) ......................................................................5-41 Header/Footer (Application) .........................................................5-44 Send & Print (Application) .............................................................5-49Introduction C550 x-15 5.4 Bind TX .............................................................................................5-52 Available combined sending parameters .....................................5-52 To perform a combined transmission ...........................................5-52 5.5 Checking settings before sending .................................................5-56 Deleting unnecessary destinations ...............................................5-57 6 Printing/sending a system user box document 6.1 Overview of system user boxes .......................................................6-2 6.2 Secure Print User Box ......................................................................6-3 Available printing parameters .........................................................6-3 To print a document (Mode 1) ........................................................6-4 To print a document (Mode 2) ........................................................6-7 6.3 Annotation User Box .......................................................................6-10 Available printing parameters .......................................................6-10 To print a document .....................................................................6-11 Available transmission parameters ...............................................6-13 To send a document .....................................................................6-15 Changing the text .........................................................................6-17 6.4 Encrypted PDF User Box ................................................................6-21 Printing .........................................................................................6-21 Deleting .........................................................................................6-23 6.5 ID & Print User Box .........................................................................6-26 Printing .........................................................................................6-27 Deleting .........................................................................................6-28 6.6 External Memory .............................................................................6-30 Available printing parameters .......................................................6-30 File types that can be printed .......................................................6-30 Document Details .........................................................................6-31 To print a document .....................................................................6-31 To print an encrypted PDF file ......................................................6-33 7 Specifying Utility mode parameters 7.1 Settings that can be specified from Utility mode ...........................7-2 Utility mode parameters .................................................................7-2 PageScope Web Connection .........................................................7-2 7.2 User box permissions .......................................................................7-3 Types of users ................................................................................7-3 Public user boxes and personal/group user boxes ........................7-3 7.3 Displaying settings screens .............................................................7-4 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen ................................7-4Introduction C550 x-16 7.4 Registering user boxes .....................................................................7-6 Registering user boxes ...................................................................7-7 Registering annotation user boxes ...............................................7-11 7.5 Maximum Number of User Boxes ..................................................7-18 7.6 User Box Settings ...........................................................................7-20 Displaying the User Box Settings screen .....................................7-20 Delete Unused User Box ..............................................................7-21 Delete Secure Print Documents ...................................................7-22 Auto Delete Secure Document .....................................................7-23 Encrypted PDF Delete Time .........................................................7-24 ID & Print Delete Time ..................................................................7-25 Document Hold Setting ................................................................7-26 External Memory Function Settings .............................................7-27 7.7 ID & Print Settings ...........................................................................7-29 7.8 User Box Administrator Setting .....................................................7-31 7.9 HDD Setting .....................................................................................7-34 Check HDD Capacity ...................................................................7-35 Overwrite Temporary Data ...........................................................7-36 Overwrite All Data .........................................................................7-39 HDD Lock Password ....................................................................7-41 HDD Encryption Setting ...............................................................7-44 Format HDD ..................................................................................7-46 8 Appendix 8.1 Error message list .............................................................................8-2 8.2 Entering text ......................................................................................8-3 Enlarging the keyboard ...................................................................8-5 To type text .....................................................................................8-6 List of Available Characters ............................................................8-6 8.3 Glossary .............................................................................................8-7 9 Index 9.1 Index ...................................................................................................9-2Introduction C550 x-17 About this manual This User’s Guide covers the bizhub C550 box functions. This section introduces the structure of the manual and notations used for product names, etc. This manual is intended for users who understand the basic operations of computers and the machine. For the operating procedures of Windows or Macintosh operating system and application programs, refer to the respective manuals. In addition, software, such as HDDTWAIN and PageScope Box Operator, which are used with the Box functions of this machine, are also available. Users of these software should refer to the corresponding manuals on the CDROM. Structure of the manual This manual consists of the following chapters. Chapter 1 Overview of the User Box functions Chapter 2 Saving documents Chapter 3 Organizing user box documents Chapter 4 Printing a user box document Chapter 5 Sending a user box document Chapter 6 Printing/sending a system user box document Chapter 7 Specifying Utility mode parameters Chapter 8 Appendix Chapter 9 Index Notation Product name Notation in the manual bizhub C550 This machine, C550 Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista When the operating systems above are written together Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/VistaIntroduction C550 x-18 Explanation of manual conventionsIntroduction C550 x-19Introduction C550 x-20 User’s Guides This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User’s Guide CD. Printed manuals Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions, allowing the machine to immediately be used. In addition, this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine. Be sure to read this manual before using the machine. User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. Refer to this manual for details on using copy, network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode. User’s Guide CD manuals User’s Guide [Copy Operations] This manual contains descriptions of the Copy mode operations and machine maintenance. Refer to this manual for details on the paper and documents, copy procedures using convenient Application functions, replacing consumables, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User’s Guide [Print Operations] This manual contains details of the printing functions that can be specified with the standard built-in printer controller. Refer to this manual for operating procedures on using the printing functions. User’s Guide [Box Operations] (this manual) This manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the hard disk. Refer to this manual for details on saving data in user boxes, retrieving data from user boxes and transferring data. User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations] This manual contains descriptions on specifying network settings for standard equipment and operating procedures for scanning functions. Refer to this User’s Guide for details on using network functions and the Scan to EMail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB operations.Introduction C550 x-21 User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations] This manual contains descriptions on the machine settings that can be specified remotely with PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer. Refer to this manual for details on operating procedures for using PageScope Web Connection. User’s Guide [Fax Operations] This manual contains descriptions of the G3 fax operations. Refer to this manual for details on using the G3 fax operations when the optional fax kit is installed. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User’s Guide [Network Fax Operations] This manual contains details on the network fax functions. Refer to this manual for operating procedures on Internet faxing and IP address faxing. User’s Guide [Fax Driver Operations] This manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to send a fax directly from a computer. Refer to this manual for operating procedures on using the PC-FAX functions. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User’s Guide [Advanced Function Operations] This User’s Guide describes overview and usage of functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and enabling its function, and functions that become available by connecting the MFP with applications. In order to use the functions effectively, please read this User’s Guide. The following models support the advanced function. bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C2031 Overview of the User Box functionsOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-2 1 Overview of the User Box functions 1.1 Available User Box functions The User Box functions allow document data to be saved on the internal hard disk of the machine and later printed. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by e-mail, forwarded to an FTP site, or sent to a computer. By using the User Box functions, documents can easily be scanned repeatedly and the separate data can be saved on a computer. Saving documents Data can be saved to the following box: *1 To connect an external memory, an optional local interface kit is required. User box Description Reference Public/personal/group user boxes Document data that has been copied or scanned on this machine can be saved in the user boxes. Document data, which is printed from a computer on the network, can be saved. Based on user authentication or account track settings, access to some boxes, such as personal and group user boxes, can be limited to particular users. p. 2-2 Annotation user box Document data saved in Scan mode and to be printed or transmitted with an image of the date/time or an annotation number can be saved. p. 2-2 External memory *1 Appears if an external memory is installed. Scanned data can be directly saved in the external memory connected to the machine. p. 2-29Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-3 Using document data The document saved in boxes can be used as follows: Original Computers Fax External memory FTP server etc. User box Description Reference Public/personal/group user boxes Saved documents can be printed or sent. Multiple documents can be selected for printing/transmission. Depending on user authentication and account track settings, use of some boxes, such as personal and group user boxes, can be limited to a particular user. p. 6-2 Bulletin board user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. Saved documents in the bulletin board user box can be printed. - Polling TX user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. Documents sent using polling can be printed. - Secure print user box Saved documents can be printed. To print the data, enter an ID and password. p. 6-3 Memory RX user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. The fax document received though the memory RX setting can be confirmed and printed. - Annotation user box Document data saved can be printed or transmitted with an image of the date/time or an annotation number. p. 6-10Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-4 *1 For details on bulletin board, Polling TX, Polling RX, Memory RX and File Re-TX, refer to the User's Guide [Fax Operations]. *2 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, see PageScope Direct Print manual or the manual of PageScope Web Connection. *3 To connect an external memory, an optional local interface kit is required. Fax retransmit user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. Saved documents can be retransmitted or printed for confirmation. - Encrypted PDF user box *2 Saved documents can be printed. Encrypted PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are also saved in this box. To print documents, the preset password is necessary. p. 6-21 ID & Print user box *3 This user box appears if user authentication is applied. Documents being sent for print jobs by the printer driver after logging on as a user can be printed. p. 6-26 External memory *3 Appears if an external memory is installed. Document data in the external memory connected to the machine can be printed. p. 6-30 User box Description ReferenceOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-5 Organizing document data Documents can be organized by renaming the saved document name, changing the box where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them. Fax Computers External memory FTP server etc. E-mail etc. Printouts User box Delete Change name Move Copy Details Public/personal/group user boxes o o o o o Bulletin board user box o × × × × Polling TX user box o × × × × Secure print user box o o × × o Memory RX user box o o × × o Annotation user box o o × × o Fax retransmit user box o × × × × Encrypted PDF user box × × × × × ID & Print User Box × × × × ×Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-6 External memory × × × × × User box Delete Change name Move Copy DetailsOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-7 1.2 Set-up for User Box functions Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be specified. User box registration Create and save the user boxes where documents will be saved. Boxes can be registered by using the machine’s touch panel or by using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network. The following boxes can be created: - Public/personal/group user boxes (p. 7-6) - Annotation user box (p. 7-11)Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-8 1.3 Control panel Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following keys and switches are provided on the control panel. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 8 14 13 12 9 15 16 17 18 11 10 19 20 21 22 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 Sub power switch Press to turn on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Press to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/ scan program.Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-9 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message “Now in Interrupt mode.” appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 8 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 9 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. Press the [Proof Copy] key before scanning or copying, the result can be viewed on the touch panel. ! Detail This key cannot be used if the [User Box] key was pressed to save a document. To preview a document being saved in a user box, press the [Fax/Scan] key. For details on previewing, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 10 [Start] key Press to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin to scan, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot be started. Press to restart a stopped job. 11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when data is being printed. 12 [C] (clear) key Press to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 13 Keypad Use to type in the number of sets to be copied. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [Help] key Press to display the Help screen. From this screen, descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. 15 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, it does not enter Enlarge Display mode. 16 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. No. Part name DescriptionOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-10 7 CAUTION Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. % Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 17 [Power Save] key Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 18 [Access] key In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings have been applied, enter the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track), and then press this key. Also press this key to log off. 19 [Brightness] dial Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 20 [User Box] key Press to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. 21 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For details on the scan operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. For details on the fax operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. 22 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. No. Part name DescriptionOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-11 1.4 Touch panel Screen layout 1 4 5 3 2 No. Part Name Description 1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed. 2 Functions/settings display area Softkeys to select functions are displayed. This area is for specifying the settings of various functions. Touch softkeys to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. 3 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. 4 Left panel The softkeys, such as [Job List] showing the jobs being processed or to be processed, and [Mode Check] showing the result of the specified settings, appear in this area. For details on the left panel, refer to “Display and operation of the left panel” on page 2-67. 5 Toner supply indicators These indicators show the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-12 Icons on the touch panel The status of the machine may appear in the icon display area. The followings are the icons appear on the touch panel. Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that data is being received by the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation. Touch this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. If the optional image controller is installed, touch this icon to display the setting screen for the image controller. Indicates that Enhanced Security mode is set to ON. Indicates that an external memory is installed.Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-13 1.5 About External Memory If the optional local interface kit is installed on this machine, a USB flash memory can be connected for saving or printing data. Available External Memory The conditions of external memories available on this machine are as follows. - USB flash memory supporting the USB (1.1/2.0) Interface - FAT32 formatted. Connecting an external memory Connect an external memory to the USB connector on the side of this machine.Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-14 When the external memory is connected, an icon appears on the bottom of the screen and the following screen appears.Check it, and then touch [OK]. 2 Reminder This machine is equipped with two USB connectors on the side. As one is for optional connection, two sets of external memories cannot be connected at a time. Do not pull out the external memory while a document is being saved to the external memory or being printed. Do not use any USB device other than the USB flash memory (such as hard disk or USB hub). However, the optional products connectable to the USB connector of this machine are exceptions.2 Saving documentsSaving documents 2 C550 2-2 2 Saving documents 2.1 Information on saving documents Keep in mind the following information before saving documents. User authentication This machine can be set so that an account or user name and a password must be entered in order to use the machine. Contact the administrator for details on the account or user name for using the machine. With user authentication (machine authentication) Type in the user name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. With user authentication (external server authentication) Specify the user name, password and authenticating server, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.Saving documents 2 C550 2-3 With account track Type in the account name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. 2 Note With user authentication, the only boxes that are displayed are those that can be accessed by the user that is logged on. For details, refer to “Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed” on page 2-6. If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, contact your server administrator for log on.Saving documents 2 C550 2-4 For details on logging on when using optional authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 for authentication, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. Registering user boxes Before document data can be saved, a user box must be created for saving the data. Up to 1,000 user boxes can be created. Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single user box. A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all user boxes. A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all user boxes. There are public user boxes (which can be used by more than one person), personal user boxes (which can be used only by a single person), and group user boxes (which can be used by users belonging to the account that has been logged on when account track settings have been specified). For details on registering user boxes, refer to “Registering user boxes” on page 7-6. Naming documents Document data that is saved can be given a name. The names can contain a maximum of 30 characters. The names can also be changed after they are saved. The names can be specified when the data is saved; however, if the data is saved without a name specified, a preset name is applied. Names are created by combining the following elements. As an example, the document name “CKMBT_C55008102315230” is described. Element Description C This letter indicates the mode when the document was saved. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan P: Print KMBT_C550 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory default is “KMBT_C550”. This name can be changed with the “Input Machine Address” parameter on the Administrator/Machine Setting screen in Administrator mode. A name of up to 10 characters can be specified. 08102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The last digit is a serial number if the document is part of a series of scans.Saving documents 2 C550 2-5 2 Note “S” appears for documents saved from the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box mode screen. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear beside “Document Name”; however, it is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Add this part to the name according to the naming conditions of the server receiving the files, for example, when data is sent by FTP. .TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. These characters do not appear beside “Document Name”; however, they are added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Element DescriptionSaving documents 2 C550 2-6 2.2 Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed When user authentication and account track settings have been applied, the user boxes that can be accessed and the permissions change as shown below. Specify the user authentication and account track settings according to the desired functions. When user authentication and account track settings are not specified Users can access all public user boxes. User boxes created by users and the administrator are public user boxes. Create and access Public user boxSaving documents 2 C550 2-7 When only user authentication settings are specified Users can access all public user boxes and only personal user boxes that the user has created. Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users. A user box administrator can be specified. A user box administrator can access all public user boxes and all personal user boxes. If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes become public user boxes. User 1 User 2 Accessible Public user box Personal user box for user 1 Personal user box for user 2 Box administratorSaving documents 2 C550 2-8 When only account track settings are specified Users can access all public user boxes and only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to. If authentication data is erased by canceling the account track settings or changing the authentication method, all group user boxes become public user boxes. When user authentication and account track settings are specified and synchronized Account A Account B Accessible Public user box Group user box for account A Group user box for account B Account A User 1 Account B User 2Saving documents 2 C550 2-9 If the account for the user was previously registered, group user boxes for accounts that the user does not belong to cannot be accessed. Users can access all public user boxes, only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to, and only personal user boxes that the user has created. Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users. A user box administrator can be specified. A user box administrator can access all public user boxes, all personal user boxes and all group user boxes. If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes and group user boxes become public user boxes. Account A Account B User 1 User 2 Accessible Public user box Personal user box for user 1 Box administrator Group user box for account A Group user box for account B Personal user box for user 2Saving documents 2 C550 2-10 When user authentication and account track settings are specified, but not synchronized If the account for the user was not previously registered, the user logs on with the account name and password. The group user box for the account can be accessed by a member of an account different from the one that is logged on. Account A User 1 Account BSaving documents 2 C550 2-11 Users can access all public user boxes, and only personal user boxes that the user has created. Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users. If a user enters an account name and password when logging on, the group user box for that account can be accessed. A user box administrator can be specified. A user box administrator can access all public user boxes, all personal user boxes and all group user boxes. If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes and group user boxes become public user boxes. User 1 Accessible Public user box Personal user box for user 1 Box administrator Accessible by entering the account name and password Group user box for account A Group user box for account BSaving documents 2 C550 2-12 2.3 Saving copies in user boxes Settings that can be saved and changed Within the various functions that can be specified before making copies, there are functions whose settings can be saved and there are functions that cannot be saved but can be set when printing. The functions whose settings can be saved and those that can be changed are listed below. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Punch settings are available only if optional finisher FS-517 and the punch kit are installed. Function type Function Can be saved Can be set when printing Number of copies × o Paper tray selection o × Output tray selection o × Basic screen settings Color o × Paper o × Zoom o × Original > Copy o o Fold/Bind o o Collate/Group o o Punch o o Staple o o Original Settings Combine o × Quality/Density Original Type o × Density o × Background Adjustment o × Application Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert o o Edit Color o × Page Margin o o Stamp/Composition o oSaving documents 2 C550 2-13 Saving copy documents Copy documents can be saved in user boxes. Specify the following information when saving copy documents. ! Detail The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box 2 Note To output the copy document after saving it to a user box and specifying Z-Fold for it, specify a paper size that supports Z-Fold when saving the copy document. The sizes that support Z-Fold are 8-1/2 × 14 w, 11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w and 8K w. 1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Application]. Parameter Description User Box Specify the user box where the data is to be saved. Document Name Type in 30 characters or less for the name of the document to be saved. Save & Print To make copies of the document while saving it, touch [Yes].Saving documents 2 C550 2-14 3 Touch [Save in User Box]. The Save in User Box screen appears. 4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box]. 5 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then touch the button for the user box to select it. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. – To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user box.Saving documents 2 C550 2-15 The button for the selected user box appears selected. ? Is a password required when saving data? % It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the user box. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Specify the name of the document to be saved. To change the automatically specified name, touch [Document Name].Saving documents 2 C550 2-16 8 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 9 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes]. 10 Touch [OK]. 11 Specify the necessary copy settings. – If a User Box function was set, [Save in User Box] appears selected. 12 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 13 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image. – For details on using previews in Copy mode, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 14 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. – If “Yes” was selected beside “Save & Print”, the scanned document is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box. – If “No” was selected beside “Save & Print”, the scanned document data is saved in the specified user box. ! Detail For details on the copy settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. For details on printing the document saved in a user box, refer to “Printing a user box document” on page 4-2.Saving documents 2 C550 2-17 2.4 Saving scans in user boxes From the Fax/Scan mode screen, scanned images can be saved in user boxes. User box destinations can be registered in the address book, or a user box destination can be specified directly. The following procedures describe how to select a user box destination, how to specify a user box destination directly, and how to save from User Box mode. 2 Note Press the [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan mode screen. ! Detail The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box (only when entered directly) Previewing When saving scans in registered user box destinations, pressing the [Proof Copy] key in the control panel after loading the document displays a preview of the finished scan in the touch panel. In the Preview screen, the orientation of the scanned document can be checked and the settings can be changed. ! Detail A preview cannot be displayed if the document is scanned with an encryption setting specified. A preview cannot be displayed if the document is being saved by pressing the [User Box] key, then touching [Save Document]. The following operations can be performed from the Preview - View Pages screen.Saving documents 2 C550 2-18 2 Note By directly selecting a page, the image of the selected page is rotated by 180 degrees. Item Description [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If the document being saved contains multiple pages, the various pages can be displayed. Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and then use the scroll bars at the right side and at the bottom of the image to view the desired section of the image. Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this button to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees. [Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the document being saved contains multiple pages. A list of scanned pages appears, allowing you to select the pages to be rotated by 180 degrees. The following operations are available in the list of scanned pages. [Select Odd]: Touch this button to rotate the images of the odd-numbered pages by 180 degrees. [Select Even]: Touch this button to rotate the images of the evennumbered pages by 180 degrees. [Select All]: Touch this button to rotate the images of all pages by 180 degrees. [View Finishing] The specified settings appear as icons and descriptions in the preview image. To remove the icons and descriptions and display only the image, touch [View Finishing] to deselect it. [Change Setting] Touch this button to change some of the settings specified before the document is scanned. For details, refer to “Preview - View Pages - Change Setting” on page 2-19.Saving documents 2 C550 2-19 Preview - View Pages - Change Setting The following settings specified before scanning the original can be changed. The new settings are applied to the originals scanned after the change of setting. Item Description Basic - Document Select either 1-sided or 2-sided. If the “Cover + 2-Sided” is specified, [Cover + 2-Sided] also appears. Basic - Binding Position This item can be selected when the destination of “E-Mail”, “User Box”, “FTP”, “SMB” or “WebDAV” is specified and “Book Copy” is not selected. Basic - Original Size This item can be selected when “Mixed Original” is specified. Application - Frame Erase Specify settings for the “Frame Erase” function. (p. 2-56) Application - Center Erase When [Center Erase] appears and is able to be selected, Center Erase can be specified.Saving documents 2 C550 2-20 Preview - View Status Select whether or not to continue scanning. Saving after previewing The following procedure describes the operations performed after the document is positioned. 1 Position the document to be scanned. 2 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 3 Select the document orientation. – When placed on the original glass Item Description [Finish] To continue scanning after the currently displayed original, make sure that [Finish] is not selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-21 – When loaded into the ADF 4 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned, and the Preview screen is displayed. 5 Check the preview image, and then rotate the image or change the settings, if necessary.Saving documents 2 C550 2-22 – To scan another document page, touch the View Status tab, touch [Finish] to deselect it, and then position the other document page. 6 Press the [Start] key. The transmission begins. Using a user box destination A destination where a user box has been registered is called a “user box destination”. User box destinations are saved on the Address Book tab and are indicated by “User Box” as the destination type. The following procedure describes how to select a previously registered user box destination for saving data. 2 Note If a user box destination is used, the document is automatically saved with the default name. 1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-23 2 Touch [Address Book]. The registered destinations are displayed. 3 Select the user box where the document is to be saved. 4 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 5 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 6 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image. – For details, refer to “Saving after previewing” on page 2-20. 7 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. The document is scanned and the data is saved.Saving documents 2 C550 2-24 Entering destinations directly Using the control panel to directly type in the user box destination is called “direct input”. 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears. 2 Touch [Direct Input]. 3 Touch [User Box]. The User Box screen appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-25 4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box]. – To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [Scan Settings], then [Application], and then touch [Annotation] to select the user box. 5 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. The button for the selected user box appears selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-26 6 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. – The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 7 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK]. 8 Touch [OK]. The Direct Input tab appears again. The number of the specified user box appears under “Broadcast Destinations”. 9 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 10 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass.Saving documents 2 C550 2-27 11 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image. – For details, refer to “Saving after previewing” on page 2-20. 12 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission, but multiple e-mail and fax destinations can be specified. Saving in User Box mode Press the [User Box] key in the control panel, and then directly type in the user box destination. Documents to be saved can be used in the same way as saved scan data. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears. 2 Touch [Save Document].Saving documents 2 C550 2-28 3 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box. – To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user box. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. The button for the selected user box appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. The Save Document screen appears. 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. – The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.Saving documents 2 C550 2-29 6 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK]. 7 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 2-39. 8 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission. Saving on external memory from User Box mode If the optional local interface kit is installed on this machine, external memory can be connected for saving scanned documents. ! Detail The default setting for saving a document to external memory is “OFF” (cannot be saved). In addition, the user setting is “OFF” (cannot be saved), even if user authentication settings have been specified. To save documents to external memory, change the settings in Administrator mode so that documents can be saved. For details, refer to “External Memory Function Settings” on page 7-27. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-30 2 Touch [Save Document]. 3 Touch [System User Box], and then touch [External Memory]. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name].Saving documents 2 C550 2-31 – The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 6 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK]. 7 Specify the necessary scan and document settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 2-39. 8 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Saving documents 2 C550 2-32 2.5 Saving printouts in user boxes If the printer driver for this machine is installed on a computer on the network, the document can be saved in a user box with the same operation for printing it. ! Detail The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. The user box number must be entered in order to save the document. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box 2 Note To output the document after saving it to a user box and specifying ZFold for it, specify a paper size that supports Z-Fold when saving the document. The sizes that support Z-Fold are 8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w and 8K w.Saving documents 2 C550 2-33 Saving data in a user box 1 In the application, click “Print” on the “File” menu. 2 Click the [Preferences] button beside the printer name.Saving documents 2 C550 2-34 3 From the “Output Method” list, select “Save in User Box” or “Save in User Box/Print”. 4 In the User Settings dialog box, type the file name and box number, and then click the [OK] button.Saving documents 2 C550 2-35 5 Click the [OK] button. 6 Click the [OK] button to start printing. ! Detail If user authentication and account track settings have been specified, click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user name for logging on and account information. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].Saving documents 2 C550 2-36 Saving data in the Secure Print User Box 1 In the application, click “Print” on the “File” menu. 2 Click the [Preferences] button beside the printer name. 3 From the “Output Method” list, select “Secure Print”.Saving documents 2 C550 2-37 4 In the User Settings dialog box, type the ID and password for the confidential document, and then click the [OK] button. 5 Click the [OK] button. 6 Click the [OK] button to start printing.Saving documents 2 C550 2-38 ! Detail If user authentication and account track settings have been specified, click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user name for logging on and account information. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations]. Saving data in the Encrypted PDF User Box A command for saving a file in a user box cannot be specified from the printer’s Properties dialog box for a PDF file that requires a password to be entered in order for it to be opened. To print from this machine, the file must be saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box. The file can be saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box in either of the following two ways. - Saving from PageScope Direct Print - Saving with direct printing from PageScope Web Connection When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it. When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine, and then print the document. ! Detail For details on PageScope Direct Print, refer to the corresponding manual. For details on printing a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to “Encrypted PDF User Box” on page 6-21.Saving documents 2 C550 2-39 2.6 Specifying scan settings The scan and document settings that can be specified when saving data in User Box mode are described below. Settings that can be specified In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings] or [Original Settings] to specify detailed settings for scanning and sending. Settings can be specified for the following. Scan Settings Parameter Description Page reference Original Type Select the quality of the document to be scanned. p. 2-40 Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is to be scanned. p. 2-42 Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. p. 2-43 File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 2-44 Density Select the density for scanning. p. 2-49 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF or when placing the document on the original glass. p. 2-50 Quality Adjustment Adjust the image quality, such as the background, color and sharpness. p. 2-50 Erase Specify settings for the “Erase” function. p. 2-56 Book Scan Set the “Book Copy” function. p. 2-58 Application Specify settings for the scan size. p. 2-60Saving documents 2 C550 2-40 Original Settings Original Type From the following five image quality settings, select the appropriate setting according to the type of document being scanned. If “Text/Photo” or “Photo” is selected, the photo type can also be selected. Parameter Description Page reference Mixed Original Select this setting when loading a document containing different page sizes. p. 2-64 Z-Folded Original Select this setting when loading a zigzag-folded document. p. 2-64 Long Original Select this setting for documents that are longer than the standard size. p. 2-64 Original Direction Select the orientation of the loaded document. p. 2-64 Binding Position Select the binding position for the document. p. 2-64 Despeckle Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left partition glass has on images when the document is loaded into the ADF. p. 2-64 Setting Description Text Select this setting for documents consisting only of text. Text/Photo Select this setting for documents consisting of both text and photos (halftones). Photo Select this setting for documents consisting of only photos (halftones). Dot Matrix Original Select this setting for documents consisting of text that generally appears faint. Copied Paper Select this setting for documents with an even density produced using a copier or printer.Saving documents 2 C550 2-41 2 Note The “Compact PDF” File Type setting and the “Text” or “Dot Matrix Original” Original Type settings cannot be selected at the same time. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Original Type]. 3 Touch the button for the image quality. Setting Description Photo Paper Select this setting for photos printed on photo paper. Printed Photo Select this setting for printed photos, such as in books or magazines.Saving documents 2 C550 2-42 4 If “Text/Photo”or “Photo” is selected, select the photo type, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is to be scanned. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Simplex/Duplex]. Setting Description 1-Sided Select this setting to scan a single-sided document. 2-Sided Select this setting to scan a double-sided document. Cover + 2-Sided Select this setting to scan the first page of the document as a singlesided cover page, then scan the remaining pages as double-sided.Saving documents 2 C550 2-43 3 Select the scanning type. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Resolution].Saving documents 2 C550 2-44 3 Select the resolution. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. File Type Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following six file formats are available. File type ! Detail Even if the file type was selected when the document was saved in the user box, it is necessary to specify the file type when the date is downloaded. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations]. If “JPEG” is selected, “Single Page” is automatically selected under “Scan Setting”. A compression method can be selected when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Setting Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. Compact PDF Select this setting to compress the data more than with the PDF format. This is used with full-color scan data. TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format. Compact XPS Select this setting to compress the data more than the XPS format and save.Saving documents 2 C550 2-45 Some File Type settings may not be available, depending on the selected Color setting. The possible combinations of the File Type and Color settings are shown below. If the “PDF” or “Compact PDF” File Type setting is selected, the encryption level and stamp combination method can be specified. Encryption settings Detail Settings of Encryption If document permissions are specified from the Encryption screen, detailed permission settings can be specified. In addition, the grouping of the saved data can be specified. Scan Setting Auto Color Full Color Gray Scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o × TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o × XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o × Parameter Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again. Document Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again. Parameter Description Printing Allowed Select whether or not to allow printing of the data. If “Encryption Level” is set to “High level”, “Low Resolution” appears. Enable copying of text, images and other content Select whether or not to allow text and images to be extracted. Change Allowed Select the permission level for document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data.Saving documents 2 C550 2-46 ! Detail For details on specifying the Color setting, refer to “Color (Quality Adjustment)” on page 2-50. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [File Type]. – Even if “Single Page” is selected when saving a document in a user box, the document is saved in “Multi Page”. Pages can be specified when downloading data to a computer. – For details on downloading to a computer, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations]. 3 Select the file format. Setting Description Single Page Select this setting to create a file in a format where the data for each page can be saved when downloading. Multi Page Select this setting to create a single file from the entire scanned document. This setting cannot be selected if the “JPEG” File Type setting is selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-47 – When saving data in a user box, the file format must be specified, even if the file format was selected before scanning. 4 If “PDF” or “Compact PDF” was selected, touch [Encryption], if necessary. – The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-48 5 Specify the encryption settings. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Select the scan setting. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-49 Density Adjust the density for scanning. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Density]. 3 Select the density. – To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark]. – To select the default setting, touch [Standard]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-50 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions for various types of documents, for example, when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF, when placing the document on the original glass, or when single-sided documents are combined with double-sided documents. Touch [Separate Scan]. The setting is selected when the button appears selected. Color (Quality Adjustment) Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white. The following four settings are available. Some Color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type setting. The possible combinations of the Color and File Type settings are shown below. Setting Description Auto Color Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting. Full Color Select this setting to scan in full color. Gray Scale Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos. Black Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings.Saving documents 2 C550 2-51 ! Detail For details on specifying the File Type setting, refer to “File Type” on page 2-44. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Quality Adjustment]. Auto Color Full Color Gray Scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o × TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o × XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o ×Saving documents 2 C550 2-52 3 Select the color type. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Background Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) The scanning density of the document background can be adjusted. When documents printed on colored paper are scanned in color, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Quality Adjustment].Saving documents 2 C550 2-53 3 Touch [Background Removal]. 4 Adjust the density of the background. – To adjust the density automatically, touch [Auto]. – To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark]. – To select the default setting, touch [Standard]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-54 Sharpness (Quality Adjustment) Contours, for example, the edges of text, can be emphasized when scanning. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Quality Adjustment]. 3 Touch [Sharpness].Saving documents 2 C550 2-55 4 Adjust the sharpness. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-56 Frame Erase (Erase) An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with a width between 1/16 and 2 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified separately for the left and right sides and the top and bottom. ! Detail If a width to be erased around the document is specified with “Frame Erase” with the “Book Copy” function, the same settings are also applied on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen). 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Erase]. 3 Touch [Frame Erase].Saving documents 2 C550 2-57 4 Select the width of the area to be erased. – To use frame erasing, touch [Yes]. – To erase the same width on all sides, touch [Frame], and then specify a value. – To specify different widths for the top, left, right and bottom, touch the button for the desired location, and then specify a value. To cancel frame erasing, touch [None]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Saving documents 2 C550 2-58 Book Copy (Book Scan) Select the method for scanning page spreads. The following four scanning methods are available. In addition, the binding position and erase settings can be specified. 2 Note Specify the size of the page spread as the scan size. The document can be scanned while erasing the shadows typical for page spreads. 2 Note If a width to be erased around the document is specified with “Frame Erase” with the “Book Copy” function, the same settings are also applied on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen). 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. Setting Description Book Spread Select this setting to scan a page spread as a single page. Separation Select this setting to scan a page spread as two separate pages (left and right). Front Cover Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover. Front + Back Covers Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover, the second page as the back cover, and the remaining pages as the body. Parameter Description Frame Erase An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with a width between 1/16 and 2 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified separately for the left and right sides and the top and bottom. Center Erase An area along the center of the document can be erased. An area with a width between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 30.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified.Saving documents 2 C550 2-59 2 Touch [Book Scan]. 3 Touch [Book Copy]. 4 Specify the settings for the “Book Copy” function.Saving documents 2 C550 2-60 – If “Separation”, “Front Cover” or “Front + Back Covers” was selected, touch [Binding Position], and then select the binding position. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Scan Size (Application) Select the size of paper that is to be scanned. The following Scan Size settings are available. 2 Note If the “Book Copy” function was set, specify the size of the page spread. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. Setting Description Auto Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded document. Standard sizes Select a preset paper size (such as A4 or B5) and orientation. Custom Size Type in the dimensions of a custom size that is not available as a preset size. The size in the X direction can be set between 2 and 17 inches on the North American (inch) model (30.0 and 432.0 mm on the European (metric) model), and the size in the Y direction can be set between 2 and 17 inches on the North American (inch) model (30.0 and 297.0 mm on the European (metric) model). Photo Size On the North American (inch) model, 3 × 5 or 2-1/4 × 3-1/4 can be selected. On the European (metric) model, 13 × 18, 10 × 15 or 9 × 13 can be selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-61 2 Touch [Application]. 3 Touch [Scan Size]. 4 Select the desired size and orientation. – On the North American (inch) model:Saving documents 2 C550 2-62 – On the European (metric) model: – Select the orientation and size of the paper to be scanned. – Touching [Custom Size] displays the Custom Size screen. Use the keypad to type in the size, and then touch [OK]. – The values can be specified in 1/16-inch increments on the North American (inch) model (in 0.1 mm increments on the European (metric) model). – On the North American (inch) model:Saving documents 2 C550 2-63 – On the European (metric) model: – Touching [Photo Size] displays the Photo Size screen. Select the orientation and size of the photo to be scanned, and then touch [OK]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Saving documents 2 C550 2-64 Original Settings Specify the type of document that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or is folded in a zigzag. 2 Note The original settings and direction settings can be used together. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Original Settings]. 2 Select settings for the Original Settings functions. Parameter Description Mixed Original Select this setting when documents of different sizes are loaded into the ADF (optional). The scan speed is decreased since the size of each page is detected before it is scanned. Z-Folded Original Select this setting to detect the size of a zigzag-folded document by the length fed through the ADF. Long Original Select this setting for documents that are longer than the standard size. Original Direction Select the orientation of the document. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. Binding Position Select the binding position, such as when holes are punched in the document or the document is stapled. This adjusts the scan of double-sided documents so that the binding position is not reversed. Left Select this setting for a document with binding on the left side. Top Select this setting for a document with binding at the top. Auto: The binding is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less, or it is on the short side if the page is more than 297 mm. Despeckle Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left partition glass has on images when the document is loaded into the ADF.Saving documents 2 C550 2-65 – Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen. Touch the button for the desired orientation, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen. Touch the button for the binding position, and then touch [OK]. – To apply the “Despeckle” setting, touch [Despeckle] to select it. 3 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-66 ! Detail The scanning speed will be reduced if the “Despeckle” setting is selected. Clean the left partition glass when it becomes extremely dirty. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Saving documents 2 C550 2-67 2.7 Display and operation of the left panel In the left panel of the touch panel, job status and settings can be displayed using the keys. The followings are the keys appear in the left panal in User Box mode. Job List Queued operation, such as saving document data to a user box and printing/ sending documents, is called a job. Touch [Job List] to display the jobs being processed. 1 2 3 No. Part Name Description 1 [Job List] Jobs that are being processed and the job history can be checked. 2 [Check Job] Information on the selected user box, scan, printing and transmission settings of documents can be checked. 3 [Preview] Saved document image can be previewed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-68 Job List - Delete Jobs being processed can be deleted from the list to cancel the job. Select the job from the job list, and then touch [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and then delete the job. ! Detail With documents containing multiple pages, an image for each page can be checked. Job List - Job Details Jobs that are being processed and the job history can be viewed from the Job List screens. Jobs are classified into the following three categories: Name Description [Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes. [Send] Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs. [Save] Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes.Saving documents 2 C550 2-69 2 Note If the optional fax kit has been installed, the Receive tab appears. Current Jobs in Print page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. If Change Job Priority in Administrator mode is set to “Restrict”, the print job priority control is not available. If Change Job Priority is set to ON, touching this softkey interrupts the printing job for the given priority. The interrupted job is automatically printed once the given priority job is finished. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Status: Job status (Receiving, PrintWait, Printing, StopPrint, Print Err, Job Stored) Document Name: File name to be printed. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. Copies: The number of copies to be printed. [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Delete] Deletes the selected job. [Increase Priority] Allows to change printing job priority. [Release Held Jobs] Allows to change settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job. [Check Job Set.] Allows to view the settings of the selected job. To check, touch either [← Back] or [Forward →]. [Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, output tray, queued time, the number of original pages, and the number of copies to be printed. Touch [Delete] to delete the job.Saving documents 2 C550 2-70 Job History in Print page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. Current Jobs in Send page Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Document Name: File name to be printed. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of originals. Copies: The number of copies to be printed. Result: Result of a job (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes). [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Touch the softkey to display each category of job. [Detail] Displays the results of the job, error details, user name, document name, output tray, queued time, completed time, the number of original pages, and the number of copies to be printed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Type of the terminal receiving data (Fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, others). Status: Job status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Waiting To Redial) Address: Fax number, E-mail address and user box name of the recipient. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. Touch [Delete] to delete the job. [L1][L2] These softkeys appear if the optional fax multi line has been installed. Displays the list of the selected line. [Delete] Deletes the selected job. [Redial] Select the job marked “Waiting To Redial” status for redialing. [Check Job Set.] Allows to view the settings of the selected job. To check, touch either [← Back] or [Forward →].Saving documents 2 C550 2-71 ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. “TWAIN” is indicated for jobs sent by the Web service. The external server information in [Detail] is available only if the external server authentication is applied. Job History in Send page [Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, destination type, destination, queued time, transmission time, the number of original pages, and external server information. Touch [Delete] to delete the job. Item Description Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Type of the terminal receiving data (Fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, others). Address: Fax number, E-mail address and user box name of the recipient. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. Result: Result of a job (Job Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User). [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Touch the softkey to display each category of job. [Comm. List] Displays the Scan list, Fax TX list, and Fax RX list. At each list screen, the activity report, TX report, and RX report can be printed. [Detail] Displays the job results, error details, user name, document name, destination type, queued time, transmission time, the number of original pages, and external server information.Saving documents 2 C550 2-72 ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. “TWAIN” is indicated for jobs sent by the Web service. The external server information in [Detail] is available only if the external server authentication is applied. Current Jobs in Receive page The Receive tab appears only when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details on the contents of the tab, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. Job History in Receive page The Receive tab appears only when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details on the contents of the tab, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. Current Jobs in Save page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Status: Job status (Receiving, Saving to Memory). Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Delete] Deletes the selected job. [Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, user box, queued time, and the number of original pages. Touch [Delete] to delete the job.Saving documents 2 C550 2-73 Job History in Save page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. Settings when saving documents When [Save Document] is selected, the information of the user box where the document is to be saved is displayed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of originals. Result: Result of a job (Job Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User/Reset Modes). [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Touch the softkey to display each category of job. [Comm. List] Displays the Scan list, Fax TX list, and Fax RX list. At each list screen, the activity report, TX report, and RX report can be printed. [Detail] Displays the job result, error details, user name, document name, user box, queued time, and the number of original pages.Saving documents 2 C550 2-74 When saving a document, select “Scan Settings” or “Original Settings”. [Details] appears. Touch [Detail] to view scan settings and original settings. Detail - Check Scan Settings The basic scan setting, scan settings, and application settings can be checked. To check, touch either [← Back] or [Forward →].Saving documents 2 C550 2-75 Detail - Check Original Settings The original settings can be checked. Settings when using documents When [Use Document] is selected, information of the selected user box is displayed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-76 Detail Touch [Document Details] in the Use Document screen to view the Registerd Time/User Name/Document Name/the No. of Pages/Job No. Touch [Preview] to view the preview image of the saved document. When multiple documents are selected, switch the preview page by touching [↑] [↓]. 2 Note For the procedure on viewing preview image, refer to “Preview” on page 2-78. Check Job Settings When [Send] or [Bind TX] is selected on the Use Document screen, [Check Job Settings] appears. Touch [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings: - Destination Settings - E-Mail SettingsSaving documents 2 C550 2-77 Check Job Settings - Destination Settings This screen displays the list of registered destinations. - To add a destination to the address book, touch [Store Address]. - To view the details of the destination on the screen, select the destination and touch [Details]. - To delete a destination, select the destination and touch [Delete]. ! Detail For details on address book registration, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings The document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages can be checked.Saving documents 2 C550 2-78 Preview When Use Document or File Document is selected, the image of the saved document can be previewed. Touch [Preview] to display the thumbnail image of the top page in the left panel. ! Detail With the documents containing multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be checked. The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-79 Preview - Detail To enlarge the preview image, touch [Detail]. The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. Preview - Detail (Print/Combine) When [Print] or [Combine] is selected while using documents, by touching [Detail], the page image of printing result can be previewed. ! Detail With documents containing multiple pages, an image for each page can be checked.Saving documents 2 C550 2-80 2 Note When selecting on the page directly, the image of the selected page is rotated by 180 degrees. Preview - Detail (Send/Bind TX) If [Send] or [Bind TX] is selected when using documents, by touching [Detail], the result of the page image to be sent can be previewed. Item Description [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If stored document contains multiple pages, touch [Prev. Page]/ [Next Page] to move to the previous/next page on the preview image. Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this key to rotate the page currently displayed by 180 degrees. [Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the stored document contains multiple pages. List of scanned pages appears. Select the desired page to rotate by 180 degrees. The rotation options in the list of scanned page are as follows: [Select Odd]: Rotates the images for odd number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select Even]: Rotates the images for even number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select All]: Rotates the images for all of pages by 180 degrees. [View Finishing] Touch this key to display the specified settings in the preview image by icons and text. When [View Finishing] is cancelled, the only image is displayed without icons or text.Saving documents 2 C550 2-81 2 Note When selecting on the page directly, the image of the selected page is rotated by 180 degrees. Item Description [Scan] This button appears if the optional fax kit has been installed. Touch this key to display the preview for [E-mail TX], [PC (FTP)], [SMB], and [WebDAV]. [Fax] This button appears if the optional fax kit has been installed. Touch this key to display the preview for sending G3 fax/IP address fax/ Internet fax. [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If stored document contains multiple pages, touch [Prev. Page]/ [Next Page] to move to the previous/next page on the preview image. Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this key to rotate the page currently displayed by 180 degrees. [Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the stored document contains multiple pages. List of scanned pages appears. Select the desired page to rotate by 180 degrees. The rotation options in the list of scanned page are as follows: [Select Odd]: Rotates the images for odd number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select Even]: Rotates the images for even number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select All]: Rotates the images for all of pages by 180 degrees. [View Finishing] Touch this key to display the specified settings in the preview image by icons and text. When [View Finishing] is cancelled, the image only is displayed without icons or text.3 Organizing user box documentsOrganizing user box documents 3 C550 3-2 3 Organizing user box documents 3.1 Overview of document organizing Available operations in the File Document screen The following operations can be performed from the File Document screen. From the File Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can be organized. The operations that can be performed with some user boxes may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below. ! Detail Documents can be moved or copied between public user boxes, personal user boxes and group user boxes. When organizing documents in the Secure Print User Box, the ID and password for the confidential document must be entered. Operation Description Page reference Delete Data that is no longer needed, for example, documents that have already been printed or transmitted, can be deleted. p. 3-8 Edit Name The name of a saved document can be changed. p. 3-10 Move Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box/ group user box. p. 3-12 Copy Document data currently saved in a user box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. p. 3-14 Document Details The date and time when the document was saved and a preview image can be checked. p. 3-16 Public/personal/ group user boxes Annotation User Box Secure Print User Box Delete o o o Edit Name o o o Move o × × Copy o × × Document Details o o oOrganizing user box documents 3 C550 3-3 Checking documents saved in user boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in a user box. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [File Document]. 3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box. – The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-4 – The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the user belongs to when account track settings are specified. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and then touch [OK].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-5 The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed. 2 Note If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect bpx password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Description of File Document screen As a default, thumbnails of the saved documents and the document names are displayed. The following information is displayed. To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. A thumbnail of the first page is displayed. The document name is displayed. The number of pages is displayed.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-6 Searching for a user box name The desired user box can be searched for by its name. 1 From the screen containing a list of the user boxes, touch [Search User Box]. The date/time when the document was stored is displayed. Touch to switch between displaying the list in ascending or descending order. The name of the user who stored the document and the mode when the document was registered are displayed. The document name is displayed.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-7 2 The user boxes for each index character appear. 3 Touch the button for an index character to display the list of user boxes registered with that index character. ! Detail A user box name can be searched for from the Save Document screen, Use Document screen or File Document screen. The personal user boxes and group user boxes that can be accessed when a user is logged on are also displayed.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-8 3.2 Deleting a document From the File Document screen, documents that are no longer needed, for example, documents that have already been printed, can be deleted. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be deleted. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. 2 Touch [Delete].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-9 3 Check the document information that appeared, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK] to delete the document. The documents are deleted.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-10 3.3 Changing the document name The name of a saved document can be changed. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be renamed. – A name cannot be changed if multiple documents are selected. 2 Touch [Edit Name].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-11 3 The current name appears. Type in the new name. 4 Touch [Start]. 2 Note The document name is the name of the file sent by e-mail or to an FTP, SMB or WebDAV server. Specify a document name according to the conditions of the destination server when transmitting. The document name can also be changed when the document is transmitted.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-12 3.4 Moving a document Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. 2 Note A document cannot be moved if multiple documents are selected. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be moved. 2 Touch [Move].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-13 3 Specify the user box where the document is to be moved. ? Is a password required for moving data to a different user box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when moving data to a different user box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 4 Check the information, and then touch [Start]. The data is moved, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed. 5 Touch [OK]. 2 Note The date and time that the document was moved is recorded under “Time Stored”.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-14 3.5 Duplicating a document Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. 2 Note A document cannot be copied if multiple documents are selected. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be copied. 2 Touch [Copy].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-15 3 Specify the user box where the document is to be copied. ? Is a password required for copying data to a different user box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when copying data to a different user box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 4 Check the information, and then touch [Start]. The data is copied, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed. 5 Touch [OK]. 2 Note The date and time that the document was copied is recorded under “Time Stored”.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-16 3.6 Checking document details The details of saved documents can be checked from the touch panel. The following information can be checked from the Document Details screen. ! Detail The preview screen can be displayed by touching a button in the sub display area or by touching a button in the Document Details screen. Item Description Registered Time Displays the date and time that the document was stored. User Name Displays the mode (Scan, Copy or Print) and name of the user who stored the document. Document Name Displays the name of the document. No. of Pages Displays the number of pages in the document. Job No. Displays the job number when the document was stored. [Preview] button Touch this button to display the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. For details, refer to “Preview screen operations” on page 3-19.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-17 Check the details 2 Note Multiple documents can be selected. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be checked. 2 Touch [Document Details]. The Document Details screen appears.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-18 3 Check the details of the document. – To select multiple documents, touch [↑] and [↓] to display different screens. – To display the preview, touch [Preview]. – To perform the operation from the sub display area, touch [Preview] in the sub display area, and then touch [Detail]. 4 After checking the document, touch [Close].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-19 Preview screen operations Touching [Enlarged Thumbnail View] in the Document Details screen displays the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. The image can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. The procedure for checking the image at a size of 4 times the normal size is described below. ! Detail With documents containing multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be checked. The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed. 1 The image is displayed at full size in the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. Touch [ ] twice. The image is displayed at a size 4 times the normal size.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-20 2 To select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the right side and at the bottom of the image. – When the selection is moved to the right: – When the selection is moved down: 3 After checking the image, touch [Close].4 Printing a user box documentPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-2 4 Printing a user box document 4.1 Overview of document printing Available operations in the Use Document screen The following operations can be performed from the Use Document screen. From the Use Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can be printed and transmitted. The operations that can be performed with some user boxes may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below. Operation Description Page reference Print Documents saved in user boxes in Copy mode, Fax/Scan mode or Print mode can be printed. Finishing settings, such as the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be added when the document is printed. p. 4-6 Send Documents saved in user boxes in Fax/Scan mode or Print mode can be sent by e-mail. Finishing and transmission settings can be added when the document is transmitted. p. 5-24 Combine Multiple documents within the same user box can be combined and printed. Finishing settings, such as the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be added when the document is printed. p. 4-66 Bind TX Multiple documents within the same user box can be combined and transmitted. Finishing and transmission settings can be added when the document is transmitted. p. 5-52 Document Details The date and time when the document was saved and a preview image can be checked. p. 3-16 Public/personal/group user boxes Annotation User Box Secure Print User Box Encrypted PDF User Box Print o o o o Send o o × × Combine o × × × Bind TX o × × × Document Details o o o oPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-3 Checking documents saved in user boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in a user box. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Use Document]. 3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box. – The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-4 – The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the user belongs to when account track settings are specified. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-5 The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed. 2 Note If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect box password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Description of Use Document screen The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to “Description of File Document screen” on page 3-5. Searching for a user box name For details on searching for a user box name, refer to “Searching for a user box name” on page 3-6.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-6 4.2 Printing Available print settings Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. For details on combining multiple documents and printing, refer to “Combined printing” on page 4-66. Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. p. 4-19 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-7 To print a document 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed. 2 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 3 Select the print settings.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-8 4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/ Combine)” on page 2-79. 5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8. Changing the number of copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. % In the Print screen, use the keypad to type in the desired number of copies. – The number of copies can be set between 1 and 9,999. – To reset the number of copies to “1”, press the [C] (clear) key. Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be printed.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-9 % Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided]. Specifying Finishing settings Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/ binding. Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Sort Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by sets. Group Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by page. Offset Select this setting to separate the sets or pages of the copies. If a finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out with each set shifted to separate it. If no finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. Staple Select one of these settings to bind copies with a staple in the corner (upper left or upper right) or with two staples. The stapling position can also be selected. Punch Select a setting to punch holes in copies. The position of the punched holes can also be selected. Half-Fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-10 Center Staple & Fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center, then fold the copies in half before feeding them out. Tri-fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. Z-Fold (Fold/Bind: When FS- 608 is installed) (Fold: When FS-517/FS- 518 is installed) Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountainfold one of the halves before feeding them out. Parameter DescriptionPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-11 ! Detail The feeding method when a finisher is installed can be changed from Administrator mode. For details on the Finishing settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. When a Fold/Bind setting is selected, “Sort” is automatically selected, and the “Group”, Offset, Staple and Punch settings are canceled. In order to carry out the Z-fold finishing process, the Z-folding unit must be installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). 2 Reminder In order to select a Fold/Bind setting, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 7-3/16 and 12-1/4 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 182 and 314 mm on the European (metric) model). The paper length must be between 10-1/8 and 18 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 257 and 458 mm on the European (metric) model). In order to use a Fold/Bind setting, optional finisher FS-608 must be installed. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Finishing].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-12 2 Touch [Sort] or [Group]. To separate the copies, touch [Yes] under “Offset”. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-13 – On the European (metric) model: 4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK]. – When the “Corner” Staple setting is selected:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-14 – When the “2 Position” Staple setting is selected: – When a Punch setting is selected: – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 6 If finisher FS-608 is installed, touch [Fold/Bind]. If finisher FS-517/FS- 518 is installed, touch [Fold].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-15 7 Touch [Yes], and then select the desired folding method. – If finisher FS-608 is installed – If finisher FS-517/FS-518 is installed 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-16 Adding a binding margin A binding margin can be added to the left or right side or to the top of the printed pages. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Page Margin]. 2 Touch [Yes]. 3 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then use the keypad to specify the width of the binding margin. – The width of the binding margin can be specified in 1/16-inch increments on the North American (inch) model (in 0.1 mm increments on the European (metric) model). – To set the binding margin to 0 mm, touch [None]. Parameter Description Margin Position Select the location where the binding margin is to be added. If “Auto” is selected, a binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is less than 11-11/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (less than 297 mm on the European (metric) model). If the document length is more than 11-11/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (more than 297 mm on the European (metric) model), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. Adjust Value An area with a width between 1/16 and 3/4 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 20.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified. To specify a binding margin of 0 mm, touch [None]. Image Shift When a binding margin is created, the image can be shifted according to the position of the created binding margin. The image can be shifted between 1/16 and 10 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 250 mm on the European (metric) model) left, right, up or down, depending on the position of the binding margin. If the document is to be printed double-sided, touch [Change Back Shift] to also specify the shift on the back side of the pages.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-17 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 4 To move the image according to the binding margin, touch [Image Shift]. The Image Shift screen appears. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-18 – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-19 Adding cover pages (Cover Sheet) Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back. First, load the paper trays with the paper for the front cover page and the back cover page. Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Front Cover None Select this setting to add no front cover. Front (Copy) Select this setting to print the first page of the document onto the front cover page. If “2-Sided” is selected, the second page of the document is printed on the back of the front cover page. Front (Blank) Select this setting to add the front cover page in front of the first page of the document. Back Cover None Select this setting to add no back cover. Back (Copy) Select this setting to print the last page of the document onto the back cover page. If “2-Sided” is selected, the last two pages of the document are printed on the back cover page. Back (Blank) Select this setting to add the back cover page after the last page of the document. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORTPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-20 2 Note If a setting for the “Cover Sheet” function is to be specified when printing a copied document, either of the following conditions must be met when saving the document in a user box. A paper tray is specified. A Cover Sheet setting is specified. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. 2 Touch [Cover Sheet].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-21 3 Select the desired cover page format. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: – To select the post inserter tray, select “Front (Blank)” or “Back (Blank)”. 4 Select the paper trays loaded with the paper for the front and back cover pages. Touch [Paper].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-22 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front or back cover page. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-23 – On the European (metric) model: 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-24 Adding insertions (Insert Sheet) The document can be printed with other paper, such as colored paper, inserted for the specified pages. There are settings (“Copy” and “Blank”) for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with single-sided printing or double-sided printing, the document is printed as described below. Example: When page 6 is specified ! Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. Setting Description Copy (with “1-Sided” selected) The specified paper is inserted for the 6th page, and the 6th page of the document is printed onto it. Copy (with “2-Sided” selected) The back side of the 3rd page is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 4th page, and a double-sided copy of the 6th and 7th pages of the document are printed onto it. Blank (with “1-Sided” selected) A specified paper is inserted after the 6th page. Blank (with “2-Sided” selected) The specified paper is inserted for the 4th page of the printed document. If an odd-numbered page is specified, the back side is left blank. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 3 4 2 3 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 1 1 REPORTPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-25 1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. 2 Touch [Insert Sheet]. 3 Touch [Yes], and then specify the locations where the paper is to be inserted. – Touch a button, and then use the keypad to type in the page where the paper is to be inserted. – To arrange the entered page numbers in order, touch [Sort].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-26 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 4 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertions. Touch [Insert Paper]. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-27 – On the European (metric) model: 5 Select the insertion method. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: – To select the post inserter tray, select “Blank” under “Insert Type”.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-28 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertions, and then touch [OK]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-29 Inserting chapter title pages (Chapters) Settings can be specified for the function when printing double-sided pages. Pages, such as chapter title pages, that must be printed on the front side of the paper can be specified. ! Detail Pages can be specified at a maximum of 30 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. 3 7 7 8 6 2 6 4 4 5 3 3 3 7 7 8 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-30 2 Touch [Chapters]. 3 Touch [Yes], and then specify the pages to be printed on the front side of the paper. – Touch a button, and then use the keypad to type in the desired page number. – To arrange the entered page numbers in order, touch [Sort].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-31 4 To print the front side of the page on different paper, touch [Copy Insert] under “Chapter Paper”. – If “None” is selected, all pages of the document are printed on the same paper. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-32 5 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: – The post inserter tray cannot be selected in the Chapter Paper Settings screen. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-33 Printing the date/time (Date/Time) The printing date and time can be added to all pages of a document. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Date/Time]. Parameter Description Date Format Select the format for the date. Time Format Select the whether or not the time is added and select its format. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-34 3 To insert the date and time, touch [Yes], and then specify the date and time settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-35 – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-36 – On the European (metric) model: 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close]. Printing page numbers (Page Number) Page numbers can be added to all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. With “Insert Sheet Setting”, settings can be selected to specify whether or not page numbers are printed on cover sheets and printed insertions. Parameter Description Starting Page Number Specify the starting page number. Starting Chapter Number Specify the starting chapter number. Page Number Type Select the format for the page number. Insert Sheet Setting Select whether or not page numbers are printed on inserted paper. Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-37 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. Setting Description Cover Sheet Print on Front and Back Cover Select this setting to print the page numbers on the front and back cover pages also. Print on Back Cover Only Select this setting to not print the page number on the front cover page. Do Not Print Page Number Select this setting to not print the page numbers on the front and back cover pages. Insert Sheet (Copy) Print Page # Select this setting to print the page number on printed insertions also. Do Not Print # Select this setting to not print the page number on printed insertions. Skip the Page(s) Select this setting to count printed insertions as pages, but not print the page numbers on them. Insert (Blank) Do Not Print # Select this setting to not print the page number on blank insertions. Skip the Page(s) Select this setting to count blank insertions as pages, but not print the page numbers on them.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-38 2 Touch [Page Number]. 3 To insert page numbers, touch [Yes], and then specify the page number settings. – Touching [Insert Sheet Setting] displays a screen for specifying settings. Touch the buttons for the desired settings, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-39 – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-40 European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-41 Adding preset text or images (Stamp) Preset text, such as “URGENT”, can be added to all pages of a document. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Stamp]. Parameter Description Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Select a stamp, such as “URGENT”, “DRAFT” or “DO NOT COPY”. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (minimum or standard) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-42 3 To insert a stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-43 then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-44 – On the European (metric) model: 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close]. Adding text and images to prevent copying (Copy Protect) Print hidden text on all pages of a document in order to prevent unauthorized copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. The following information can be inserted as copy protection. Type Description Registered Stamp Insert stamp images previously registered with the utility. Preset Stamp Insert preset text, such as “Invalid Copy”, “Copy” or “INTERNAL USE ONLY”, as preset stamps. 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORTPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-45 ! Detail The printed serial number is the serial number of the machine. For details on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative. Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details, refer to the manual for the utility. The paper is divided into 8 blocks for copy protection, and the items within that area can be increased. The number of areas required for each item is listed below. ! Detail When text is arranged at a +45-degree angle (-45-degree angle), up to four areas are needed. To insert spaces, touch [Position]. To specify the following copy protection settings, touch [Detailed Settings]. Date/Time Insert the date and time that the document was registered. Other Insert the job number assigned to the document, the serial number or a distribution number. Job Number: Select whether to print the job number. Serial Number: Select whether to print the serial number of the machine. Distribution Control Number: Select whether to print the entered distribution numbers. Item Description Required number of areas Registered Stamp One stamp 1 Preset Stamp One stamp 1 Date/Time Date Format 1 Time Format 1 Other Job Number 1 Serial Number 1 Distribution Control Number 1 Parameter Description Text/Background Color Select the color (black, cyan or magenta) used to print the text and background. Type DescriptionPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-46 To perform the following operations, touch [Position]. - Changing the angle of text within the area (+45 degrees, 0 degrees (none) or -45 degrees) - Inserting spaces between copy protection - Changing the printing order of copy protection - Deleting copy protection or spaces 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Copy Protect]. Density Select the printing density (light, std. or dark). Copy Protect Pattern Select the pattern type and contrast when the document is copied. Text Size Select the size (minimal, std. or large) in which text, such as the date/ time, is printed. Pattern Overwrite Select whether the pattern is printed on top of or behind the document text. Background Pattern Select the pattern to be printed in the background. Parameter DescriptionPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-47 3 To apply copy protection, touch [Yes], and then specify the copy protection settings. – Touching [Preset Stamp] displays a screen for specifying the preset stamp settings. Touch the button for the desired stamp type, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Date/Time] displays a screen for specifying the date/time settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-48 – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying other settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. 4 To specify detailed copy protection settings, touch [Detailed Settings]. A screen for specifying settings appears. Specify the desired settings, and then touch [OK]. – Text/Background ColorPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-49 – Density – Copy Protect Pattern – Text SizePrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-50 – Pattern Overwrite – Background Pattern 5 After finishing changing the settings, touch [Close]. 6 To change the arrangement of spaces, touch [Position].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-51 7 To arrange text at an angle, select the angle. – When text is arranged at an angle, up to four areas are needed. If five or more items are specified, delete an item before specifying the angle. 8 To change the arrangement or delete an item, touch [Change Pos./Delete]. – The Change screen appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-52 – To change the arrangement, select the copy protection item to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To insert a space, move o to the right of the location where the space is to be inserted, and then touch [Insert]. – To delete an item, select the item to be deleted. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-53 10 Touch [Close]. Adding repeated preset text or images (Stamp Repeat) Text or images can be repeatedly printed throughout all pages. The following information can be inserted as a repeating stamp. ! Detail The printed serial number is the serial number of the machine. For details on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative. Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details, refer to the manual for the utility. The paper is divided into 8 blocks for repeating stamps, and the items within that area can be increased. The number of areas required for each item is listed below. Type Description Registered Stamp Insert stamp images previously registered with the utility. Preset Stamp Insert preset text, such as “Invalid Copy”, “Copy” or “Private”, as preset stamps. Date/Time Insert the date and time that the document was registered. Other Insert the job number assigned to the document, the serial number or a distribution number. Job Number: Select whether to print the job number. Serial Number: Select whether to print the serial number of the machine. Distribution Control Number: Select whether to print the entered distribution numbers. Item Description Required number of areas Registered Stamp One stamp 1 Preset Stamp One stamp 1 Date/Time Date Format 1 Time Format 1 Other Job Number 1 Serial Number 1 Distribution Control Number 1Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-54 ! Detail When text is arranged at a +45-degree angle (-45-degree angle), up to four areas are needed. To insert spaces, touch [Position]. To specify the following stamp settings, touch [Detail Settings]. To perform the following operations, touch [Position]. - Changing the angle of text within the area (+45 degrees, 0 degrees (none) or -45 degrees) - Inserting spaces between stamps - Changing the printing order of stamps - Deleting stamps or spaces 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Text Color Select the color (black, cyan or magenta) used to print the text and background. Density Select the printing density (light, std. or dark). Text Size Select the size (minimal, std. or large) in which text, such as the date/ time, is printed. Pattern Overwrite Select “Front (Overwrite)”, “Transparent” or “Back” for printing the pattern.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-55 2 Touch [Stamp Repeat]. 3 To insert a repeating stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings. – Touching [Preset Stamp] displays a screen for specifying the preset stamp settings. Touch the button for the desired stamp type, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-56 – Touching [Date/Time] displays a screen for specifying the date/time settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying other settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. 4 To specify detailed repeating stamp settings, touch [Detail Settings]. A screen for specifying settings appears. Specify the desired settings, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-57 – Text Color – Density – Text SizePrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-58 – Pattern Overwrite 5 After finishing changing the settings, touch [Close]. 6 To change the arrangement of spaces, touch [Position].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-59 7 To arrange text at an angle, select the angle. – When text is arranged at an angle, up to four areas are needed. If five or more items are specified, delete an item before specifying the angle. 8 To change the arrangement or delete an item, touch [Change Pos./Delete]. The Change screen appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-60 – To change the arrangement, select the copy protection item to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To insert a space, move o to the right of the location where the space is to be inserted, and then touch [Insert]. – To delete an item, select the item to be deleted. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-61 10 Touch [Close]. Inserting a header/footer (Header/Footer) Headers or footers can be inserted on all pages. The contents of the header/ footer must be previously registered in Administrator mode. ! Detail For details on registering headers/footers, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Headers/footers use registered information that is recalled; however, the information can be checked or changed when printing. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Header Settings Select whether or not to print a header. If a header is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Footer Settings Select whether or not to print a footer. If a footer is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Pages Select the pages where the header/footer is to be printed (either all pages or 1st page only). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-62 2 Touch [Header/Footer]. 3 To print a header/footer, touch [Yes], and then select the type of header/footer to be recalled. 4 To check or temporarily change the selected settings, touch [Check/ Change Temporarily].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-63 The Check/Change Temporarily screen appears. 5 Under “Header Settings” or “Footer Settings”, touch [Print], and then specify the header/footer settings. – TextPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-64 – Date/Time – Other 6 Specify the settings for the pages to be printed on, the text color and the text size. – Text ColorPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-65 – Text Size – To cancel the temporarily changed settings, touch [Reset]. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 8 Touch [Close].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-66 4.3 Combined printing Available combined printing parameters Multiple documents can be printed together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be printed together. Additional settings, such as those for the number of copies, can be specified for the selected document. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note Documents saved in a box and having a front cover, back cover and blank insertion in addition to Image Repeat and OHP Interleave settings specified cannot be combined and printed. “Sort”, “Group” and “Tri-fold” cannot be specified with combined printing. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for offsetting, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-67 To print a document 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed. 2 Under “Action”, touch [Combine].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-68 3 Specify the combination order. – Select the two documents whose order is to be switched. – The documents are combined and printed in the order specified here. 4 Touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-69 5 Select the print settings. 6 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/ Combine)” on page 2-79. 7 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8.5 Sending a user box documentSending a user box document 5 C550 5-2 5 Sending a user box document 5.1 Overview of document transmissions Available document transmission operations Document data saved in a user box can be sent using four different methods. The data can easily be routed simply by registering a destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through different computers. 2 Note Documents saved from Copy mode cannot be sent. Transmission methods Specify the destination using any of the following four methods depending on the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. Method Description E-mail Document data can be sent as an e-mail attachment. PC (SMB) Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. FTP Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Document data is sent to the specified server on the network. Method Description Page reference Address book destination Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 5-8 Group destinations Multiple destinations can be registered together with this method. This is convenient when documents are always sent to the same destinations. p. 5-9 Direct input With this method, destinations for e-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions and WebDAV transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when sending data to a destination that is not already registered. p. 5-13 Address search Select this method when an LDAP server is used. Addresses registered on the LDAP server can be searched for the address that corresponds to the specified conditions. p. 5-21Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-3 ! Detail Up to 500 destinations can be specified from the address book and with an Address search. Up to five destinations can be entered directly each with e-mail transmissions, SMB transmissions, FTP transmissions and WebDAV transmissions. Checking documents saved in user boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in a user box. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Use Document].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-4 3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box. – The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication. – The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the user belongs to when account track settings are specified. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-5 The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed. 2 Note If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect box password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Description of Use Document screen The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to “Description of File Document screen” on page 3-5. Searching for a user box name For details on searching for a user box name, refer to “Searching for a user box name” on page 3-6.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-6 To send a document 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent. 2 Under “Action”, touch [Send]. 3 Specify the destination and transmission settings.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-7 4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/ Bind TX)” on page 2-80. 5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on specifying the destination and transmission settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 5-8. 2 Note Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-8 5.2 Specifying the destination Selecting from the address book Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a recipient from the already registered destinations. For details on registering destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [Address Book]. – The index appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to “Index”. If “Address Type” is selected, the index of destination types is displayed. A list of registered destinations appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-9 3 Touch a destination button to select the address. – The corresponding address appears as the name of the registered destination when an index button is touched. – Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time. – Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address. The button appears selected, and the destination appears under “Broadcast Destinations”. ! Detail The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to “Searching for a destination” on page 5-11. Selecting from a group destination “Group” refers to multiple destinations that are registered collectively. Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a group that has been registered in advance. For details on registering group destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. ! Detail The description below describes the procedure for specifying the group and sending the data, starting from the situation where “Address Book default” has been set to “Address Type” in [Custom Display Settings] in the User Settings screen. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-10 2 Touch [Group]. The registered group destinations appear. 3 Touch the button for the group destination. A list of destinations registered in the group appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-11 4 Select the destination where the data is to be sent, and then touch [OK]. – To select all destinations, touch [Select All]. – To deselect all destinations, touch [Reset]. – Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address. The button appears selected, and the destination appears under “Broadcast Destinations”. Searching for a destination A search for the desired destination can be performed using any of the following methods. The following procedure describes how to perform a search. Method Description Index This button appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to “Address Type”. The index characters can be searched based on the character that was specified when the destination was registered. Address Type This button appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to “Index”. The destination types can be searched based on the type that was specified when the destination was registered. Search Type in the destination name or part of the address to search for the corresponding address. Address search An LDAP search can be performed if an LDAP server is being used, for example, for user management. Search the addresses registered on the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. A basic search, where a keyword is entered, and an advanced search, where multiple conditions are used to narrow down the search, are available.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-12 ! Detail In order to perform an Address search, settings for the Address server must be specified from Administrator mode. For details, refer to “Enabling LDAP” in the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. For details on performing an Address search, refer to “Selecting a destination with an Address search” on page 5-21. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [Address Book], and then touch [Search]. 3 Touch [Detail Search]. 4 Touch [Name] or [Address] to select the search to be performed.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-13 5 Type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [OK]. The Detailed Search screen appears again, and the search results are displayed. 6 Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. Directly specifying an e-mail destination 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-14 2 Touch [E-Mail] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the address of the destination. 3 Type in the address of the destination, and then touch [OK]. – To specify additional destinations, repeat steps 2 and 3. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 2 Note Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to be recalled and used again. Prefixes and suffixes must first be registered in Administrator mode.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-15 Directly specifying an SMB destination Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [PC (SMB)] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path. Parameter Description Host Name Specify the host name (in uppercase letters) or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. File Path Type the path to the destination folder in uppercase letters. User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Reference Check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination folder.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-16 3 Enter the information for the destination, and then touch [OK]. – To check the contents of the shared folders, touch [Reference]. – To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 2 Reminder If more than the following number of computers or workgroups exist on the network (subnet) that this machine belongs to, browsing over the network may not be performed correctly. Workgroups: 128 Computers: 128 Directly specifying an FTP destination Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Host Name Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. File Path Specify the path to the destination folder. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-17 Detailed Settings 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [FTP] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path. Parameter Description Port Number Type in the port number. PASV Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Touch [Yes] or [No]. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Touch [Yes] or [No].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-18 3 Type in the destination information. – To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 4 To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then specify the settings. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-19 Directly specifying a WebDAV destination Settings can be specified for the following. Detailed Settings 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [WebDAV] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path. Parameter Description Host Name Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. File Path Type (in uppercase letters) the path to the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Parameter Description Port Number Type in the port number. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. SSL Settings Select whether or not SSL is used with transmissions.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-20 3 Type in the destination information. – To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 4 To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then specify the settings. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-21 Selecting a destination with an Address search If LDAP server settings are specified in Administrator mode, [Address Search] appears in the screen. ! Detail For details on the LDAP server settings, refer to “Enabling LDAP” in the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Address Search] does not appear. The position of [Address Search] can be changed from the User Settings screen. For details, refer to “Address Book Default” in the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 1 Touch [Address Search]. 2 If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-22 3 Select the desired search type. – When there is only one LDAP server – When there are multiple LDAP servers 4 Specify the search conditions. – If “Search” was selected, type in the keyword to be searched for, and then touch [Start Search].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-23 – If “Advanced Search” was selected, select the search condition types and type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [Start Search]. 5 Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-24 5.3 Specifying the transmission settings Settings that can be specified In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings can be specified for the following. File Type Communication Settings ! Detail For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. The “Digital Signature” parameter may not be available or may be set to normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings. Application Parameter Description Page reference File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25 Parameter Description Page reference E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. p. 5-29 URL Notification Setting Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. p. 5-30 E-Mail Encryption This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to encrypt e-mail messages that are sent. p. 5-31 Digital Signature This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to add a digital signature to e-mail messages that are sent. p. 5-32 Parameter Description Page reference Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 5-33 Send & Print Settings can be specified to print a document when it is sent. In addition, various settings can be specified when printing. p. 5-49Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-25 File Type File Type Select the file format for sending the data. The following six file formats are available. 2 Note The “JPEG” setting cannot be selected for a received fax saved in a user box. “JPEG” cannot be selected for Bind TX. A compression method can be selected when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Encryption settings If the “PDF” or “Compact PDF” File Type setting is selected, the encryption level and stamp combination method can be specified. Setting Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. Compact PDF Select this setting to compress the data more than with the PDF format. This is used with full-color scan data. TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format. Compact XPS Select this setting to compress the data more than the XPS format and save. Parameter Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again. Document Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-26 Detail Settings of Encryption If document permissions are specified from the Encryption screen, detailed permission settings can be specified. Stamp Combine Method 2 Note The date/time, page number and header/footer can be combined as text. Stamps are combined as images. In addition, the grouping of the data to be sent can be specified. Scan Setting 2 Note “Single Page” cannot be selected for Bind TX. 1 Touch [File Type] in a screen for selecting a destination. Parameter Description Printing Allowed Select whether or not to allow printing of the data. If “Encryption Level” is set to “High level”, “Low Resolution” appears. Enable copying of text, images and other content Select whether or not to allow text and images to be extracted. Change Allowed Select the permission level for document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data. Setting Description Image Select this setting to insert the text as an image. Text Select this setting to insert the text as text. Setting Description Single Page Select this setting to send a single file for each page of the document. Multi Page Select this setting to send the entire document as a single file. This setting cannot be selected if the “JPEG” File Type setting is selected.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-27 2 Select the file format. 3 If “PDF” or “Compact PDF” was selected, touch [Encryption], if necessary. – The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-28 4 Specify the encryption settings. 5 To specify the stamp combination method, touch [Stamp Composition]. 6 Select the desired stamp combination method. 7 Touch [OK]. 8 Select the scan setting. 9 Touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-29 E-Mail Settings (Communication Settings) When data is sent, an e-mail message containing the document name can be sent to the specified e-mail address. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note If “Change the “From” Address” (displayed by touching [System Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Restrict User Access], then [Restrict Access to Job Settings]) is set to “Restrict”, the From address cannot be entered directly. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [E-Mail Settings]. Parameter Description Document Name The name of the file to be saved is displayed. The document name specified later appears as the document name, even if the document name was specified in the File Document screen. A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. Subject The text specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed. Touch [Direct Input] to change the text. A maximum of 64 characters can be entered. From The e-mail address specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed. Body The text specified from Utility mode is displayed. Touch [Direct Input] to change the text. A maximum of 256 characters can be entered.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-30 3 Specify the e-mail transmission settings. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. URL Notification Setting (Communication Settings) Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. ! Detail The destinations that can be specified for “URL Notification Setting” include FTP servers, SMB servers or WebDAV servers. This feature does not function during e-mail transmissions, even if a setting is specified. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [URL Notification Setting].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-31 3 Specify the e-mail address where notifications will be sent. – Select a registered e-mail address. – Touch [Direct Input], and then specify the e-mail address for the destination of URL notifications. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close]. E-Mail Encryption (Communication Settings) A setting can be specified for this parameter when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to encrypt e-mail messages that are sent. ! Detail For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-32 2 Touch [E-Mail Encryption]. 3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. Digital Signature (Communication Settings) This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to add a digital signature to e-mail messages that are sent. ! Detail For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. This parameter may not be available or may be set to normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-33 2 To add a digital signature, touch [Digital Signature], and then select the digital signature. 3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. Date/Time (Application) The scanning date and time can be added to all pages of a document. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. Parameter Description Date Format Select the format for the date. Time Format Select the whether or not the time is added and select its format. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-34 2 Touch [Stamp/Composition]. 3 Touch [Date/Time]. 4 To add a date and time, touch [Yes], and then specify the date and time settings.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-35 – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-36 European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-37 Page Number (Application) Page numbers can be added to all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Starting Page Number Specify the starting page number. Starting Chapter Number Specify the starting chapter number. Page Number Type Select the format for the page number. Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-38 3 Touch [Page Number]. 4 To add page numbers, touch [Yes], and then specify the page number settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-39 – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-40 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-41 Stamp (Application) Preset text, such as “URGENT”, can be added to all pages of a document. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note If “File Type” is set to “PDF” or “Compact PDF”, the stamps are added as images. They cannot be added as text. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Select a stamp, such as “URGENT”, “CIRCULAR” or “DO NOT COPY”. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (minimum or standard) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-42 3 Touch [Stamp]. 4 To specify a stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-43 – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-44 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. Header/Footer (Application) Headers or footers can be inserted on all pages. The contents of the header/ footer must be previously registered in Administrator mode. ! Detail For details on registering headers/footers, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Headers/footers use registered information that is recalled; however, the information can be checked or changed when printing. Settings can be specified for the following.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-45 1 In the Application screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Header/Footer]. Parameter Description Header Settings Select whether or not to print a header. If a header is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Footer Settings Select whether or not to print a footer. If a footer is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Pages Select the pages where the header/footer is to be printed (either all pages or 1st page only). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-46 3 To print a header/footer, touch [Yes], and then select the type of header/footer to be recalled. 4 To check or temporarily change the selected settings, touch [Check/ Change Temporarily]. – The Check/Change Temporarily screen appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-47 5 Under “Header Settings” or “Footer Settings”, touch [Print], and then specify the header/footer settings. – Text – Date/TimeSending a user box document 5 C550 5-48 – Others 6 Specify the settings for the pages to be printed on, the text color and the text size. – Text Color – Text Size – To cancel the temporarily changed settings, touch [Reset].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-49 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 8 Touch [Close]. Send & Print (Application) Settings can be specified to print a document when it is scanned. In addition, various settings can be specified when printing. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [Send & Print]. Parameter Description Copies Use the keypad to type in the number of copies to be printed. A number between 1 and 999 can be specified. Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Staple Select whether or not the prints will be stapled. If they will be stapled, select the number of staples and the position.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-50 3 To print a document while sending it, touch [Yes], and then specify the desired settings. 4 To select the staple position, touch [Corner] or [2 Position], and then touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-51 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Touch [Close].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-52 5.4 Bind TX Available combined sending parameters Multiple documents can be sent together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be sent together. In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings can be specified for the following. File Type Communication Settings Application To perform a combined transmission 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent. Parameter Description Page reference File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25 Parameter Description Page reference E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. p. 5-29 URL Notification Setting Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. p. 5-30 Parameter Description Page reference Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 5-33, p. 5-37, p. 5-41Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-53 2 Under “Action”, touch [Bind TX]. 3 Specify the combination order. – Select the two documents whose order is to be switched. – The documents are combined and transmitted in the order specified here.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-54 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Specify the destination and transmission settings. 6 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/ Bind TX)” on page 2-80. 7 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-55 ! Detail For details on specifying the destination and transmission settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 5-24. 2 Note Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-56 5.5 Checking settings before sending Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area to display the list of destinations. In this area, the selected settings can be checked. To change a destination, select it in this area. Settings can be checked and changed with the following. 1 Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area. The Broadcast Destinations list appears. 2 Select the desired destination from the list of registered destinations. Item Description Destination Settings The list of destinations can be viewed or changed, and destinations can be added. An address that was directly typed in can also be registered. Check E-Mail Settings The e-mail settings can be checked.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-57 3 Touch [Check Job Settings]. The Check Job Detailed Settings screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then check or change the setting. – If a setting is changed, the changed destination moves to the end of the list. 5 After checking the settings, touch [Close]. Deleting unnecessary destinations The selected destination can be deleted. 1 Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area. The Broadcast Destinations list appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-58 2 Select the destination to be deleted from the list of registered destinations. 3 Touch [Delete]. The destination is deleted.6 Printing/sending a system user box documentPrinting/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-2 6 Printing/sending a system user box document 6.1 Overview of system user boxes The operations available after touching [Use Document] can be performed with the system user boxes as shown below. ! Detail Documents saved in system user boxes can be deleted or the document names can be changed. For details, refer to chapter 3, “Organizing user box documents” on page 3-2. Type Description Print documents Send documents Secure Print User Box This user box contains documents that were saved from the printer driver with an ID and password specified. The ID and password must be entered in order to check the document contents. o × Annotation User Box This user box contains documents saved from Fax/Scan mode or Copy mode. Previously specified text can be added to the documents when they are printed or transmitted. o o Encrypted PDF User Box This user box contains encrypted PDF documents saved from PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print. o × ID & Print User Box This user box appears when user authentication settings have been specified. A document can be printed after the user has entered the user name and password from a computer on the network. o × External Memory This user box appears when the optional local interface kit is installed. A document saved on external memory connected to the USB interface can be printed. o ×Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-3 6.2 Secure Print User Box Available printing parameters Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional Finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. p. 4-19 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-4 To print a document (Mode 1) Follow the procedure described below when “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Mode 1”. 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-5 3 Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Type in the ID for the confidential document, and then touch [OK]. 5 Type in the password for the confidential document, and then touch [OK]. A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-6 6 Select the document to be printed. 7 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 8 Select the print settings. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-7 ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8. To print a document (Mode 2) Follow the procedure described below when “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Mode 2”. 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-8 3 Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Type in the ID for the secured document, and then touch [OK]. A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed and then touch [Enter Password].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-9 6 Type in the password for the secured document, and then touch [OK]. 7 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 8 Select the print settings. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings,refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-5.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-10 6.3 Annotation User Box Available printing parameters Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. p. 4-19 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-11 To print a document 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [Annotation User Box], and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-12 4 Select the desired box, and then touch [OK]. A list of documents appears. 5 Select the document to be printed. 6 Under “Action”, touch [Print].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-13 7 Select the print settings. 8 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/ Combine)” on page 2-79. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8. Available transmission parameters Document data saved in user boxes can be sent using four different methods. Method Description E-mail Document data can be sent as an e-mail attachment. PC (SMB) Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. FTP Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Document data is sent to the specified server on the network.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-14 2 Note Documents saved from Copy mode cannot be sent. Specify the destination using any of the following four methods depending on the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. ! Detail Up to 500 destinations can be specified from the address book and with an Address search. Up to five destinations can be entered directly each with e-mail transmissions, SMB transmissions, FTP transmissions and WebDAV transmissions. In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings can be specified for the following. File Type Method Description Page reference Address book destination Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 5-8 Group destinations Multiple destinations can be registered together with this method. This is convenient when documents are always sent to the same destinations. p. 5-9 Direct input With this method, destinations for e-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions and WebDAV transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when sending data to a destination that is not already registered. p. 5-13 Address search Select this method when an LDAP server is used. Addresses registered on the LDAP server can be searched for the address that corresponds to the specified conditions. p. 5-21 Parameter Description Page reference File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-15 Communication Settings Application To send a document 1 In the Annotation User Box screen, select the document to be sent. Parameter Description Page reference E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. p. 5-29 URL Notification Setting Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. p. 5-30 Parameter Description Page reference Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 5-33 Send & Print Settings can be specified to print a document when it is sent. In addition, various settings can be specified when printing. p. 5-49 Stamp Element The format of previously added text or distribution numbers can be changed. p. 6-17Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-16 2 Under “Action”, touch [Send]. 3 Specify the destination and transmission settings. 4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/ Bind TX)” on page 2-80. 5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings,refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-5.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-17 2 Note Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name. Changing the text The format for text or distribution numbers is first specified for documents saved in the Annotation User Box. This information can be changed when the document is sent. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. Parameter Description Secondary Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed. Density Select the density for the annotation numbers that are printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers that are printed. Print Position Select the printing position.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-18 2 Touch [Stamp Element]. The Change Text screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then change the setting. – Touch [Secondary Field], type in the text to be added, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-19 – Touch [Date/Time], select the format for the date and time to be printed, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Density], touch the button for the desired text density, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Number Type], select the format for the numbering, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-20 – Touch [Print Position], select the printing position, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-21 6.4 Encrypted PDF User Box In order to print a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box, the password specified when the document was saved must be entered. ! Detail Documents are saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box by using PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print. For details on saving documents, refer to the manual for the corresponding software. 2 Note When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it. When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine, and then print the document. Printing 1 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-22 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK]. A list of documents appears. 4 Select the document to be printed.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-23 5 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 6 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. Deleting 1 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-24 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the document to be deleted.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-25 5 Under “Action”, touch [Delete]. 6 Check the message, touch [Yes] to delete the document, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-26 6.5 ID & Print User Box This user box appears if user authentication is applied. If an appropriate user is logged on this machine, documents can be printed. Document data, which is printed from a computer on the network by entering the user name and password, is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box. When documents are saved in ID & Print User Box, the following keys appear on the login screen. Enter the user name and password, and then touch the desired key. 2 Note For details on saving document data sent for print jobs from a computer to ID & Print User Box, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations]. ! Detail Even if user authentication is not applied or for print jobs saved by a public user, print jobs can also be saved in ID & Print User Box. For details, refer to “ID & Print Settings” on page 7-29. When printing is completed, the data in ID & Print User Box is deleted. Item Description [Begin Printing] A document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed without logging in. [Print & Login] A document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed when a user is logged in. [Login] Login only. After logging on, a document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed or deleted.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-27 Printing 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-28 4 Select the document to be printed. 5 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. Deleting 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-29 3 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the document to be deleted. 5 Under “Action”, touch [Delete]. 6 Check the message, touch [Yes] to delete the document, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-30 6.6 External Memory If the optional local interface kit is installed, a document saved on external memory can be printed from this machine. Available printing parameters Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. File types that can be printed - Only files with the format (extension) for PDF, JPEG, TIFF or XPS can be printed. - Files with the JPEG and XPS format cannot be printed double-sided and cannot have holes punched or be stapled. - PDF files up to version 1.6 can be printed with this machine. Available parameters Description Copies Use the keypad to type in the number of copies to be printed. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Color Select whether printing is in full color or in black and white. Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Binding Position Select the binding margin position for double-sided printing. Select a binding margin at the top, left or right side. Finishing For details on the settings that can be specified, refer to“Specifying Finishing settings” on page 4-9. Paper Select the paper drawer containing the paper to be printed on.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-31 Document Details Select a file, and then touch [Document Details] to view information for the selected document, such as its modification date and the document name. To print a document 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears. 2 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-32 3 Touch [System User Box], and then touch [External Memory]. 4 Touch [OK]. – Of the saved files, only the names of files with a format that can be printed are displayed. – A maximum of 255 printable files can be displayed in the folder with the specified path. If there are more than 255 files in a single folder, it may take some time to display the file list. The configuration of the folders and files on the connected external memory is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed. – The document to be printed can also be specified by typing in the path to the folder containing it. Touch [File Path], and then type in the path. – To open the folder containing the currently selected item, touch [Up]. – To view the contents of the folder, touch [Open].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-33 – A maximum of 250 characters can be entered for the file path and file name. If the number of characters exceeds this limit, the file list cannot be displayed. 6 Touch [Print]. 7 Specify the print settings. 8 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. To print an encrypted PDF file When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it. When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine, and then print the document.7 Specifying Utility mode parametersSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-2 7 Specifying Utility mode parameters 7.1 Settings that can be specified from Utility mode Various basic settings and advanced parameters for using this machine can be set from the Utility mode. This chapter describes the procedures for setting the Utility mode parameters for the User Box functions. Utility mode parameters The following Utility mode parameters are described in this manual. PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into the device. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection. Specifying settings with the utility is convenient since text can easily be typed in from your computer instead of with the machine’s control panel. Since some settings can only be specified with PageScope Web Connection, refer to the PageScope Web Connection User’s Guide for details. Parameter Description Page reference One-Touch/User Box Registration Create new user boxes. “Registering user boxes” on page 7-6 Administrator Settings Specify various settings, for example, for deleting documents from user boxes. “User Box Settings” on page 7-20 Specify limitations on the number of user boxes that can be registered for each user. “Maximum Number of User Boxes” on page 7-18 Specify settings for the ID & Print User Box. “ID & Print Settings” on page 7-29 Specify the password for the user box administrator. “User Box Administrator Setting” on page 7-31 Perform operations such as formatting the hard disk and deleting data. “HDD Setting” on page 7-34Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-3 7.2 User box permissions Types of users Users of various levels can use this machine. Other than machine administrators, user box administrators can use User Box functions. The following types of users can access the various user boxes. ! Detail To log on as the user box administrator, type “boxadmin” as the user name for user authentication and type the password specified in “User Box Administrator Setting” on page 7-31. Public user boxes and personal/group user boxes The operations indicated below can be performed with public user boxes, which can be accessed by all users, and with personal/group user boxes, which can only be accessed by specific users. *1 The operations can be performed only on user boxes created by the registered user. *2 User box administrators and administrators can perform operations without entering the password, even if a password has been set for the user box. Type Description Public user This user has access when user authentication settings have not been applied. Registered user These user are registered by the administrator when user authentication settings have been applied. User box administrator This user can log on as a box administrator when user authentication settings have been applied. This user can access all user boxes, regardless of whether a password has been specified. Administrator This user can manage the machine. This user can create, change or delete any user box, regardless of whether a password has been specified. Operation Create boxes View/download/ delete documents Change box settings Delete boxes User box type Public Personal/ group Public Personal/ group Public Personal/ group Public Personal/ group Public user o × o × o × o × Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o User box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o*2 × × × o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-4 7.3 Displaying settings screens Displaying the Administrator Settings screen 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [3 Administrator Settings], press the [3] key in the keypad. 3 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-5 – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The Administrator Settings screen appears. ! Detail If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” is set to “Mode 2” an incorrect administrator password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator mode. For details on the “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” parameter, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-6 7.4 Registering user boxes New user boxes can be registered. The following types of user boxes can be registered. ! Detail If user authentication is canceled after personal user boxes are created, the personal user boxes become public user boxes. Bulletin board user boxes and relay user boxes can be created when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. If user authentication settings have been applied, be sure to type in the ID and password, and touch [Login] or press [Access] key. If authentication settings have not been applied, personal user boxes cannot be created. If optional fax kit FK-502 has been installed, confidential reception settings can be specified as advanced User Box functions. Type Description Public user boxes This shared user box can be accessed by everyone. Personal user boxes This user box for an individual can only be accessed by users that have logged on if user authentication settings have been applied. Group user boxes This user box can only be accessed by users who belong to the account and have logged on when account track settings have been specified. Annotation user boxes This user box is used when an image of the date/time or an annotation number is added to saved document data that is to be printed or transmitted. The type of text to be added can be specified when the document is being used. Annotation user boxes are registered in Administrator mode.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-7 Registering user boxes Settings can be specified for the following when registering. New screen 1/2 New screen 2/2 2 Reminder If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. Parameter Description User Box No. The next available user box number is displayed. To specify a user box number, touch [User Box No.], and then use the keypad to type in the user box number (between 1 and 999999999). User Box Name Touch [User Box Name], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the user box name (20 characters or less). The same user box name can be specified for a multiple number of user boxes if the boxes have been given different user box numbers. Password Specify a password to limit access to the user box. Touch [Password], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the password (8 characters or less). Index Select the index characters. Type Depending on the user authentication and account track settings that have been specified, select “Public”, “Personal” or “Group”. If “Personal” was selected, specify the owner name. To change the owner, touch [Change Owner], and then select a different owner. If “Group” was selected, specify the owner account. In the Change Owner screen, select a different owner account. Parameter Description Auto Document Delete Time Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the user box. Confidential RX This parameter appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Select whether or not the confidential reception function is added to the user box. If the confidential reception function is added, type in the confidential reception password.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-8 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 3 Touch [2 Create User Box]. The Create User Box screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-9 4 Touch [1 Public/Personal User Box]. 5 Touch [New]. New screen 1/2 appears. 6 Specify the desired settings.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-10 7 Touch [Forward→]. New screen 2/2 appears. 8 Specify the desired settings. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 9 Touch [OK]. The user box is registered. ! Detail In the screen showing the list of user boxes, registered user boxes can be edited or deleted. To change the settings, select the user box, and then touch [Edit]. To delete a user box, select the user box, and then touch [Delete].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-11 Registering annotation user boxes Settings can be specified for the following when registering. New screen 1/3 New screen 2/3 New screen 3/3 2 Reminder If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters Parameter Description User Box No. The next available user box number is displayed. To specify a user box number, touch [User Box No.], and then use the keypad to type in the user box number (between 1 and 999999999). User Box Name Touch [User Box Name], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the user box name (20 characters or less). The same user box name can be specified for a multiple number of user boxes if the boxes have been given different user box numbers. Password Specify a password to limit access to the user box. Touch [Password], use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the password (8 characters or less). Parameter Description Count Up Select whether the count for the annotation number is formatted by jobs or by pages. Secondary Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed. Density Select the density for the annotation numbers that are printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers that are printed. Print Position Select the printing position. Primary Field Text can be added. A maximum of 40 characters can be entered. Parameter Description Auto Document Delete Time Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the user box.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-12 before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 Touch [3 One-Touch/User Box Registration] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [2 Create User Box] in the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen. 3 Touch [4 Annotation User Box].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-13 4 Touch [New]. New screen 1/3 appears. 5 Specify the desired settings. 6 Touch [Forward→]. New screen 2/3 appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-14 7 Specify the desired settings. The text can be specified in the corresponding screen. – Secondary Field – Date/TimeSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-15 – Density – Number Type – Print PositionSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-16 – Primary Field 8 Touch [Forward→]. New screen 3/3 appears. 9 Specify the desired settings. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 10 Touch [OK]. The user box is registered.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-17 ! Detail In the screen showing the list of user boxes, registered user boxes can be edited or deleted. To change the settings, select the user box, and then touch [Edit]. To delete a user box, select the user box, and then touch [Delete].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-18 7.5 Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify limitations on the number of user boxes that can be registered for each user. 1 Touch [3 One-Touch/User Box Registration] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [4 Maximum Number of User Boxes] in the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen. The Maximum Number of User Boxes screen appears. 3 Select a user type, and then select a user name. The maximum number of user boxes can be specified for the selected user.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-19 4 Specify the user box limitation settings. – A maximum between 0 and 1,000 user boxes can be specified. – If the maximum number of user boxes is set to “0”, new user boxes cannot be registered. – To specify no limit, touch [OFF] under “Max. No. of Use Boxes”. – To specify a limit, touch [ON] under “Max. No. of Use Boxes”, use the keypad to type in the maximum number of user boxes, and then touch [Apply]. 5 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-20 7.6 User Box Settings Displaying the User Box Settings screen 1 Touch [1 System Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [0 User Box Settings] in the System Settings screen. The User Box Settings screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-21 Delete Unused User Box Boxes containing no saved documents can be deleted as unused boxes. 1 Touch [1 Delete Unused User Box] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To delete the user boxes, touch [Yes].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-22 Delete Secure Print Documents All documents saved in the Secure Print User Box can be deleted. 1 Touch [2 Delete Secure Print Documents] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To delete the documents, touch [Yes].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-23 Auto Delete Secure Document Select the time until confidential documents are deleted after they are saved. 1 Touch [3 Auto Delete Secure Document] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To specify the time setting, touch [Yes], and then select the time period. – The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days. – To not delete the documents, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-24 Encrypted PDF Delete Time Select the time until encrypted PDF files are deleted after they are saved. 1 Touch [4 Encrypted PDF Delete Time] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To specify the time setting, touch [Yes], and then select the time period. – The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days. – To not delete the documents, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-25 ID & Print Delete Time Specify the length of time until documents are deleted from the ID & Print User Box after they are saved. ! Detail [ID & Print Delete Time] appears if user authentication settings have been specified. 1 Touch [5 ID & Print Delete Time] in the User Box Settings screen. 2 To automatically delete the documents, touch [Yes], and then select the time period.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-26 ! Detail The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days. 2 Note To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. Document Hold Setting Select whether or not documents are automatically deleted when they are transmitted or printed. 1 Touch [6 Document Hold Setting] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 Specify the desired settings.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-27 – To not delete the document when it is printed or transmitted, touch [ON]. – To delete the document when it is printed or transmitted, touch [OFF]. External Memory Function Settings Select whether or not external memory connected to the machine can be used. ! Detail The default setting for saving a document to external memory is “OFF” (cannot be saved). In addition, the user setting is “OFF” (cannot be saved), even if user authentication settings have been specified. To save documents to external memory, change the settings in Administrator mode so that documents can be saved. Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Save Document Select whether or not a scanned document can be saved on external memory when [Save Document] is touched in User Box mode. Print Document Select whether or not a document saved on external memory can be printed or sent when [Use Document] is touched in User Box mode.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-28 1 In the User Box Settings screen, touch [7 External Memory Function Settings]. 2 Specify the desired settings. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-29 7.7 ID & Print Settings Settings concerning the ID & Print User Box can be specified. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note Public user jobs are printed or stored when printing by a public user is permitted. Jobs without authentication are printed or stored when “Print without Authentication” is permitted. 1 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. 3 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. Parameter Description ID & Print “ON”: All the general print jobs and ID & Print jobs from the registered user are saved in the ID & Print User Box. “OFF”: The ID & Print jobs from the registered user are saved in the ID & Print User Box. General print jobs are output without being saved in the ID & Print User Box. Public User “Print Immediately”: Public user jobs or jobs without user authentication information are printed without being saved in the ID & Print User Box. “Save”: Public user jobs or jobs without user authentication information are saved in the ID & Print User Box.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-30 4 Touch [ID & Print Settings]. 5 Specify the desired settings, and then touch [OK].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-31 7.8 User Box Administrator Setting Select whether or not use by the box administrator is permitted. (The default setting is “Allow”.) When logging on as the box administrator, type “boxadmin” as the user name in the user authentication screen, and then type in the password specified in step 5. 0 If both user authentication and account track settings are not applied, a user box administrator cannot be specified. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on operations that can be performed by box administrators, refer to “User box permissions” on page 7-3. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [2 User Box Administrator Setting] in the Security Setting screen. The User Box Administrator Setting screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-32 3 Select whether a user box administrator will be specified. – To prohibit it, touch [Restrict], and then touch [OK]. – To allow it, touch [Allow], and then continue with step 4. 4 Type in the password for the user box administrator (up to 8 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3. A screen for retyping the password appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-33 5 Type in the password again, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The password for the user box administrator is specified and use by the user box administrator is permitted. 2 Reminder If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-34 7.9 HDD Setting Various hard disk operations are available, such as those for erasing data from the hard disk and for checking the amount of free space on the hard disk. Settings can be specified for the following. ! Detail The following data is erased when the hard disk is formatted. Program destinations Address book destinations Authentication method settings User authentication settings Account track settings User boxes User box settings Documents in user boxes Secure print user box settings Bulletin board user box settings Parameter Description Check HDD Capacity The amount of hard disk space that is used and that remains can be checked. Overwrite Temporary Data Select whether mode 1 or mode 2 is used as the method for overwriting data on the hard disk. When the security kit is installed, select whether encryption or overwriting is given priority. Overwrite All Data All data can be overwritten. HDD Lock Password Specify the hard disk locking password HDD Encryption Setting Specify the setting for encrypting the data on the hard disk. A setting is required only when the optional security kit is installed. Format HDD Format the hard disk.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-35 Check HDD Capacity The amount of space on the hard disk can be checked. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [1 Check HDD Capacity] in the HDD Setting screen. The Check HDD Capacity screen appears. 4 Touch [Close]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The HDD Setting screen appears again.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-36 Overwrite Temporary Data The setting for overwriting data on the hard disk can be specified. (The default setting is “Mode 1”.) This machine destroys data by overwriting all data in the entire area where an image was stored when that image data on the hard disk is considered unnecessary. In addition, destroying the structure of data other than image data prevents the disclosure of the data in case the hard disk is stolen. 2 Reminder When the setting for giving priority to encryption or overwriting is changed, the hard disk must be formatted. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [2 Overwrite Temporary Data] in the HDD Setting screen. – Select “Encryption Priority” when performing high-level security encryption processing. However, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk differs depending on whether “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” is selected. Normally, “Encryption Priority” is selected. – If “Overwrite Priority” is selected, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk is performed depending on whether “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” is selected. Select this setting when the format of the data written to the hard disk is considered important. Setting Description Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with the letter “A” (0x61) → VerifiedSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-37 – When the security kit is not installed: – When the security kit is installed: The Overwrite Temporary Data screen appears. 4 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes], and then select the overwriting method. – If the security kit is installed, touch [Encryption Priority] or [Overwrite Priority]. 5 Touch [OK]. – If “Encryption Priority” and “Overwrite Priority” was changed, continue with step 6. The mode for overwriting temporary data is specified.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-38 6 If a message appears, asking whether to reformat the hard disk, touch [Yes]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [No]. 7 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. 8 If an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match, the Administrator Settings screen appears. In this screen, touch [Format HDD]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-39 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly. In order to enable the setting specified in the Overwrite Temporary Data screen, “Overwrite Temporary Data” must be set to “Yes”. Overwrite All Data The machine can be set to overwrite all data on the hard disk. The methods for overwriting data are described below. 2 Reminder Perform this operation before disposing of the machine. Before performing this operation, be sure to consult with your service representative. 2 Note The operation for Mode 1 takes approximately 40 minutes. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. Setting Description Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Overwritten with random 1- byte numbers → Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 3 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Verified Mode 4 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff Mode 5 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff Mode 6 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with random number Mode 7 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0xaa Mode 8 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0xaa → VerifiedSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-40 – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [3 Overwrite All Data] in the HDD Setting screen. The Overwrite All Data screen appears. 4 Select the desired method for overwriting data on the hard disk, and then touch [Overwrite]. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to overwrite the data. 5 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To return to the Overwrite All Data screen without overwriting the data, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-41 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. All data on the hard disk is overwritten. 2 Reminder While the data is being overwritten, do not use the main power switch to turn the machine off and on. When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly. HDD Lock Password The password for locking the hard disk can be specified. The hard disk locking password is extremely important in order to protect the data on the hard disk. Keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. If the password is lost, significant restoration operations will be required for recovery.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-42 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [4 HDD Lock Password] in the HDD Setting screen. The HDD Lock Password screen appears. From this screen, the password can be changed or the hard disk locking password can be canceled. 4 Type in the password (20 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – Do not specify a password that is the same character repeated 20 times. – For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3. A screen for retyping the password appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-43 5 Type the password specified in step 4, and then touch [OK]. The message “Turn the main switch OFF and ON.” appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The hard disk locking password is set. 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not be lost.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-44 HDD Encryption Setting If the security kit is installed, the machine can be set to encrypt the hard disk. ! Detail [HDD Encryption Setting] appears when security kit SC-503 is installed. If the encryption key is specified or changed, data saved on the hard disk may no longer be available. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [HDD Encryption Setting] in the HDD Setting screen. A message appears, requesting confirmation to specify the setting. 4 To encrypt the data, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The HDD Encryption Setting screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-45 5 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the new encryption key. To delete the entered encryption key, press the [C] (clear) key. The HDD Encryption Setting screen appears again. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-46 2 Note The encryption key must be registered by the machine’s administrator. The encryption key must contain 20 characters. Do not specify an encryption key that contains the same character repeated 20 times. Be sure to keep the specified encryption key in a safe place so that it will not be lost. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly. Format HDD The hard disk can be formatted. 2 Note When the hard disk is formatted, the data saved on the hard disk is erased. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [Format HDD] in the HDD Setting screen. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to format the hard disk.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-47 4 To format the hard disk, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To return to the HDD Settings screen without formatting the hard disk, touch [No]. The hard disk is formatted. 5 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly.8 AppendixAppendix 8 C550 8-2 8 Appendix 8.1 Error message list If any of the following error messages appear, perform the operations described below. 2 Note For details on the network settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Message Cause and remedy Cannot connect to the network. A connection to the network could not be established. Check if the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, check that the Network Setting parameters on the Administrator mode have been correctly specified. The destination cannot be selected because the number of destinations has exceeded the max. number of broadcasting possible. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Image could not be saved in the User Box due to insufficient HDD capacity check log. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the data again. The number of User Boxes has reached its maximum. The number of user boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary user boxes, and then try registering new boxes again. This user box has reached its maximum number of documents allowed. The number of documents that can be saved in a user box has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents, and then try saving the document again. The number of programmed jobs has reached the max. allowance. Wait until a programmed job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job.Appendix 8 C550 8-3 8.2 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Password input screen: Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size: Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols).Appendix 8 C550 8-4Appendix 8 C550 8-5 Enlarging the keyboard The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read. 1 While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON]. The keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 Note The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged.Appendix 8 C550 8-6 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch [←] and [→] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. List of Available Characters space Alphanumeric characters/ symbolsAppendix 8 C550 8-7 8.3 Glossary Term Definition 10Base-T/100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T An Ethernet standard, which is a cable consisting of twisted copper wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. Adobe® Flash® Software developed by Adobe Systems, Inc. (formaly developed by Macromedia, Inc.), and used to create data combining vector-graphic animation and sound, and the format of this data file. The bidirectional content can be manipulated using a keyboard and a mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact, and they can be accessed with the Web browser plug-in. anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering “anonymous” as the account name. Auto IP A function for automatically acquiring the IP address. If acquisition of the IP address failed with DHCP, an IP address is acquired from the address space of 169.254.0.0. bit Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1. Bit-mapped Font Fonts that are represented by a set of dots to form the character. Dithering may occur if the character size is increased. BMP Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data which uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms. You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when saved. Byte Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Configured as 1 byte equals 8 bits. Compact PDF Compression method for reducing the data amount using the PDF format when converting color documents to data. The highest compression efficiency is achieved by identifying the text and image regions and using the resolution and compression method most appropriate for each region. The compact PDF format can be selected when converting documents to data using the scanning functions of this machine. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). An image with little light/dark variation is said to have a low contrast, and an image with large light/dark variation is said to have a high contrast. Default The initial settings. The settings first selected when the machine is turned on, or the settings first specified when the function is selected. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a “gateway” to access computers not on the same LAN Density An indication of the amount of darkness in the image Density Adjustment The function that adjusts the color tones of an output device, such as a printer or monitorAppendix 8 C550 8-8 DHCP Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies the network settings from the server. With collective management of the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid duplication of an address and you can build a network easily. Dither A method of using only black and white to create the illusion of different shades of gray. The process is simpler than with error diffusion; however, some irregularities may occur. DNS Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment. DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and understand IP addresses. DPI (dpi) Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet LAN transmission line standard File Extension The characters added to the file name in order to differentiate file formats. The file extension is added after a period, for example, “.bmp” or “.jpg”. FTP Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network. Gradation The light and dark levels of an image. As the number increases, smoother brightness variations can be reproduced. Grayscale Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information from black to white Halftone The method of producing the light and dark parts of an image through varying sizes of black and white dots Hard Disk Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be stored even if the power is turned off. HTTP Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips can be exchanged with the expressive form information. ID & Print Function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver when performing user authentication. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers on to a computer IP Address A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devices, including computers, which are connected to the Internet. JPEG Abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is “.jpg”.) The compression ratio is roughly 1/10 to 1/100. This format uses an effective method in the compression of continuous-tone images, such as photographs. Term DefinitionAppendix 8 C550 8-9 Kerberos A type of network authentication system used by Windows 2000 or later. Used in Active Directory authentication. Users can be safely and efficiently authenticated with a two-phase authentication (user logon and network resource usage) on a dependable site set up on the network. LAN Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP Abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. On a TCP/ IP network, such as the Internet or an intranet, this protocol is used to access a database for managing environment information and the e-mail addresses of network users. Memory Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is turned off the data may or may not be erased. Multi-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains multiple pages OS Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling the system of a computer. PASV Abbreviation for PASsiVe. A mode for connecting to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not specified, the firewall will be considered inaccessible and the connection will be terminated, preventing the file from being sent. PDF Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically formatted document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the PostScript format, you can use the free Adobe Reader software to view documents. Pixel An image pixel. The smallest unit of an image. Plug-and-play Ability to automatically find and use the appropriate driver when a peripheral device is connected to a computer Port Number The number that identifies the transmission port for each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI Abbreviation for Pixels Per Inch. Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. This measurement indicates the number of image pixels contained within 1 inch. Preview A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print or scan job Print Job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device Property Attribute information When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the file. Protocol The rules that allow computers to communicate with other computers or peripheral devices Proxy Server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections Term DefinitionAppendix 8 C550 8-10 Resolution Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print matter correctly Scanning With the scanning operation of the scanner, an image is read while the row of image sensors is gradually moved. The direction that the image sensors are moved is called the main scanning direction, and the direction in which the image sensors are arranged is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen Frequency Indicates the density of dots used to create the image Single-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains only a single page SMB Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft Windows. SSL/TLS Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. The encoding method for safely transmitting data between the Web server and browser. Subnet Mask The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are higher than the IP address. TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The de facto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP addresses to identify each network device. Thumbnail A small image that shows the contents of the image or document file (the image displayed when the file was opened) TIFF Abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is “.tif”.) Depending on the tag indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN The interface standard for imaging devices, such as scanners and digital cameras, and for applications, such as graphics software. In order to use a TWAIN-compliant device, the TWAIN driver is required. Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer USB Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer. Web Browser Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for viewing Web pages Term Definition9 IndexIndex 9 C550 9-2 9 Index 9.1 Index Numerics 1-Sided/2-Sided ...............................4-8 A Address search ..............................5-21 Administrator Settings screen ..........7-4 Annotation User Box ............6-10, 7-11 Auto Delete Secure Document .......7-23 B Background Adjustment ................2-52 Bind TX ...........................................5-52 Book Copy .....................................2-58 C Caution explanation .......................x-18 Changing document name .............3-10 Changing text .................................6-17 Chapters .........................................4-29 Check HDD Capacity .....................7-35 Check Job ......................................5-56 Check Job Settings ........................2-76 Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..........................................2-77 Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings ..........................................2-77 Color ...............................................2-50 Combined printing ..........................4-66 Control panel ....................................1-8 Copies ..............................................4-8 Copy protect ..................................4-44 Cover Sheet ...................................4-19 Creating user boxes .........................7-6 Current Jobs .................................. 2-69 D Date/Time ............................ 4-33, 5-33 Delete Secure Print Documents .... 7-22 Delete Unused User Box ............... 7-21 Deleting documents ........................ 3-8 Density .......................................... 2-49 Detail ............................................. 2-76 Detail - Check Original Settings .... 2-75 Detail - Check Scan Settings ........ 2-74 Detail explanation ...........................x-18 Digital Signature ............................ 5-32 Direct input .................................... 2-24 Document Details .......................... 3-16 Document Hold Setting ................. 7-26 Document names ............................ 2-4 Duplicating documents ................. 3-14 E E-Mail Encryption .......................... 5-31 E-Mail Settings .............................. 5-29 Encrypted PDF Delete Time .......... 7-24 Encrypted PDF User Box .... 2-38, 6-21 Entering text .................................... 8-3 Erase ............................................. 2-56 Error message list ............................ 8-2 F File Document ................................. 3-2 File Type .............................. 2-44, 5-25 Finishing .......................................... 4-9 Format HDD .................................. 7-46Index 9 C550 9-3 G Glossary ...........................................8-7 Group destinations ...........................5-9 H HDD Encryption Setting .................7-44 HDD Lock Password ......................7-41 HDD Setting ...................................7-34 Header/Footer ......................4-61, 5-44 I Icon ................................................1-12 ID & Print Delete Time ....................7-25 ID & Print Settings ..........................7-29 ID & Print User Box ........................6-26 Insert Sheet ....................................4-24 J Job History .....................................2-70 Job List ...........................................2-67 Job List - Delete .............................2-68 Job List - Job Details .....................2-68 L Left panel .......................................2-67 M Maximum Number of User Boxes .............................................7-18 Moving documents ........................3-12 N Note explanation ............................x-18 O Original Settings .............................2-64 Original Type ..................................2-40 Overwrite All Data ..........................7-39 Overwrite Temporary Data .............7-36 P Page Margin .................................. 4-16 Page Number ...................... 4-36, 5-37 Preview .......................................... 2-78 Previewing ..................................... 3-19 Print settings ................................... 4-6 Printing and saving ........................ 2-32 R Registered destinations ................... 5-8 Reminder explanation ....................x-18 Resolution ..................................... 2-43 S Saving copy documents ................ 2-13 Saving in User Box mode .............. 2-27 Saving scanned data ..................... 2-17 Scan Settings ................................ 2-39 Scan Size ...................................... 2-60 Searching for a destination ........... 5-11 Searching for user box name .......... 3-6 Secure Print User Box ........... 2-36, 6-3 Send & Print .................................. 5-49 Sending documents ........................ 5-2 Separate Scan ............................... 2-50 Settings when using documents ... 2-75 Sharpness ..................................... 2-54 Simplex/Duplex ............................. 2-42 Stamp .................................. 4-41, 5-41 Stamp Repeat ............................... 4-53 System user boxes .......................... 6-2 T Text entry ........................................ 8-3 Touch panel ................................... 1-11Index 9 C550 9-4 U URL Notification Setting .................5-30 Use Document .................................4-2 User authentication ..........................2-2 User Box Administrator Setting .....7-31 User box destinations ....................2-22 User box permissions ......................7-3 User Box Settings ..........................7-20 User’s guide conventions ...............x-18 User’s guides .................................x-20 Utility mode ......................................7-2 W Warning explanation ......................x-18Copyright A00J-9644-44 2006 2008. 4 http://konicaminolta.com User’s Guide [Advanced Function Operations]bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings].................................................................................................................. 3-4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-2 4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-2 Restrictions on Flash Player ..................................................................................